Skip to main content

Full text of "Isotopes"

See other formats


NORTHEASTERN  UNIVERSITY 
LIBRARIES 


GIVEN  IN  MEMORY  OF 
DR.  OTTO  RAUBENHEIMER 


ISOTOPES 


Fi  W.  ASTON,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  A.I.C.,  F.R.S. 

"fellow   of  trinity   college,   CAMBRIDGE 


A-c^  4x< 


LONDON 

EDWARD     ARNOLD     &     CO. 

1922 

[All  rights  reserved] 


Printed  in  Great  Britain 


PREFACE 

I  HAVE  undertaken  the  preparation  of  this  book  on  Isotopes 
in  response  to  many  requests  made  to  me  by  teachers  of  physics 
and  chemistry  and  others  working  in  these  subjects  that  I 
should  publish  the  results  obtained  by  means  of  the  Mass- 
spectrograph  in  a  form  more  convenient  to  the  public  than  that 
in  which  they  first  appeared.  This  is  one  of  the  reasons  why 
the  space  allotted  to  the  inactive  isotopes  may  appear,  in  the 
light  of  the  general  title  of  the  book,  somewhat  disproportion- 
ately large.  Another  is  that  the  subject  of  radioactive  isotopes 
really  requires  a  book  to  itself,  and  I  am  in  the  hope  that  the 
inadequacy  of  my  account  may  stimulate  the  production  of 
such  a  volume  by  hands  more  competent  than  mine  to  deal 
with  this  very  special  and  remarkable  field  of  modern  science. 
The  logical  order  of  exposition  of  a  scientific  subject  is  to  start 
with  the  simple  and  from  that  build  up  the  more  complex. 
Unfortunately  the  sequence  of  events  in  experimental  research 
is  the  exact  opposite  of  this  so  that  a  compromise  must  be 
effected,  unless  one  is  content  to  sacrifice  historical  treatment 
altogether.  The  latter  seems  very  undesirable  in  a  new  subject. 
I  have  endeavoured  in  Chapters  I,  II  and  IV,  and  elsewhere 
when  possible,  to  adhere  strictly  to  the  historical  order  of 
events  even  at  the  cost  of  some  reiteration. 

I  wish  to  take  this  opportunity  of  expressing  my  indebted- 
ness to  Mr,  C.  G.  Darwin  for  his  timely  criticism  and  unfailing 
assistance  throughout  the  work,  and  also  to  Mr.  R.  H.  Fowler 
for  help  with  the  proofs.  My  thanks  are  also  due  to  Professor 
Soddy  for  his  diagram  of  the  radioactive  isotopes,  to  Mr,  A.  J. 
Dempster  for  kindly  sending  me  the  illustrations  of  his  work, 

iii 


5111^ 


iv  PREFACE 

to  the  proprietors  of  the  Philosophical  Magazine  and  to 
the  Council  of  the  Chemical  Society  for  permission  to  use  the 
plates  and  figures  of  my  original  papers,  and  to  Messrs. 
Macmillan  &  Co.,  for  the  diagram  of  the  radioactive  trans- 
formations. 

F.  W.  ASTON. 

Cambridge, 

January,  1922. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  I 
Introduction 

1.  Introduction  ..... 

2.  Hypothesis  of  Dalton  and  Prout 

3.  Crookes'  Meta-elements  . 

4.  The  discovery  of  Isotopes 


PAGE 

1 
2 
4, 
6 


CHAPTER  II 

The  Radioactive  Isotopes 

5.  Chemical  identities  among  the  radioactive  elements 

6.  Spectroscopic  identity  of  isotopes    . 

7.  The  chemical  law  of  Radioactive  change 

8.  Isobares  ...... 

9.  The  Radioactive  Transformations     . 

10.  The  Atomic  weight  of  Lead    . 

11.  Atomic  weights  of  Thorium  and  Ionium 

12.  Use  of  radioactive  isotopes  as  indicators 

13.  Classification  of  the  radioactive  isotopes  . 


7 
9 
11 
12 
13 
16 
18 
19 
21 


CHAPTER  III 
Positive  Rays 

14.  Nature  of  Positive  Rays  ......  22 

15.  Mechanism  of  the  electric  discharge  in  gases  at  low  pressure    .  23 

16.  The  Crookes  Dark  Space 24 

17.  Methods  of  detecting  positive  rays  .....  25 

18.  Sir  J.  J.  Thomson's  "  Parabola  "  method  of  analysis        .  25 

19.  Secondary  rays       ........  29 

20.  Negatively  charged  rays  ......  29 

21.  Rays  with  multiple  charges     ......  30 

22.  Dempster's  method  of  positive  ray  analysis      ...  31 


CHAPTER  IV 

Neon 

23.  Positive  ray  analysis  of  neon  . 

24.  Apparatus  for  the  determination   of  density 

25.  Method  of  using  the  density  balance 

26.  Experiments  on  separation  by  distillation 

27.  Experiments  on  separation  by  diffusion   . 

28.  Second  attempt  at  separation  by  diffusion 

29.  The  analysis  of  neon  by  the  Mass-spectrograph 


33 

35 
36 
37 
39 
41 
41 


VI 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


CHAPTER  V 

The  Mass-Spectbograph 

30.  Limitations  of  the  parabola  method 

31.  Methods  of  increasing  the  intensity  of  the  spot 

32.  Possibilities  of  "  focussing  "     . 

33.  Principle  of  the  Mass-spectrograph 

34.  Optical  analogue     . 

35.  The  discharge  tube 

36.  The  slit  system 

37.  The  electric  field 

38.  The  magnetic  field 

39.  The  camera    . 

40.  Experimental  procedure 

41.  Form  of  the  Spectrum  Lines 

42.  The  distribution    of   the  mass 

graphic  plate    . 

43.  Practical  method  of  deducing  the  effective  mass  of  a  parti 

from  the  position  of  its  line  on  the  photograph 

44.  Comparison  of  masses  by  the  method  of  coincidence 

45.  The  measurement  of  the  lines  .... 

46.  Resolving  power  and  acciiracy  of  mass  determination 

47.  Order  of  results  and  nomenclature 

48.  Lines  of  the  first,  second  and  higher  orders     . 

49.  Negative  mass-spectra     ...... 


-spectrum    over    the    photo 


cle 


CHAPTER  VI 

Analysis  of  the  Elements 

50.  Arrangement  of  results   .... 

51.  Oxygen  and  carbon  .... 

52.  Neon 

53.  Possibility  of  a  third  isotope  of  neon 
64.  Chlorine  ...... 

55.  Argon    ....... 

56.  Nitrogen  ...... 

57.  Hydrogen  and  helium     .... 

58.  The  determination  of  the  masses  of  atoms  of  hydrogen  and 

heliiim  by  the  method  of  "  Bracketing  " 

59.  Triatomic  hydrogen 

60.  Krypton  and  Xenon 

61.  Mercury 

62.  Boron,  Fluorine,  Silicon 

63.  Molecular  lines  of   the  second  order 

64.  Bromine 

65.  Svdphur 

66.  Phosphorus.     Arsenic 

67.  Selenium.     Tellurium 

68.  Iodine    . 

69.  Antimony 

70.  Tin         . 

71.  Nickel    . 


CONTENTS 


vu 


CHAPTER  VII 

Analysis  of  the  Elements  (Continued) 

72.  Positive  rays  of  metallic  elements 

73.  Dempster's  analysis  of  Magnesium  . 

74.  The  Mass-spectra  of  the  alkali  metals 

75.  Experiments  with  the  parabola  method  of  analysis 

76.  Lithiima 

77.  Sodiimi  . 

78.  Potassium 

79.  Rubidium 

80.  Caesium  . 

81.  Thomson's  work  on  Beryllium 

82.  Calciiom  and  Strontitmi  . 

83.  Table  of  Elements  and  Isotopes 


PAGE 

80 
80 
83 
84 
86 
86 
87 
87 
87 
88 
88 
88 


CHAPTER  VIII 
The  Electbical  Theory  or  Matter 

84.  The  whole  number  rule  ...... 

85.  The  unitary  theory  of  the  constitution  of  matter     . 

86.  The  atom  of  negative  electricity,  or  electron  . 

87.  The  atom  of  positive  electricity,  or  proton 

88.  The  nucleus  atom  ....... 

89.  Moseley's  atomic  numbers        ..... 

90.  The  Bolir  atom 

91.  The  Lewis  Langmuir  atom       ..... 

92.  Diagrammatical  representation  of   atoms  of    Isotopes  and 

Isobares  ....... 

93.  The  relation   between   Isotopes  and  Elements  in  the  same 

Group      ........ 

94.  Abnormal  compounds  formed  by  charged  atoms 

95.  The  failure  of  the  additive  law  in  respect  to  mass 

96.  The    explanation  of  the   fractional  mass   of  the  hydrogen 

atom  by  the  hypothesis  of  "packing" 

97.  The  structure  of  the  nucleus  ..... 

98.  Cosmical  effects  due  to  change  of  mass   . 

99.  The  stable  systems    of    protons    and    electrons    known  to 

occur        ......... 


90 
90 
91 
92 
92 
93 
95 
95 

96 

98 
98 
99 

100 
101 
103 

105 


CHAPTER  IX 

Isotopes  and  Atomic  Numbers 

100.  The   relation  between  chemical  atomic  weight   and  atomic 

number    .........      108 

101.  Statistical  relations  exhibited  by  elements  and  their  isotopes .      109 

102.  The  preponderance  of  elements  of  even  atomic  number  .      Ill 

103.  The  constancy  of  chemical  atomic  weights       .  .  .112 

104.  The  agreement   between  the  chemical  atomic  weight  and 

the    mean   atomic   weight   deduced   from    the    mass- 
spectrum  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .113 

105.  The  meaning  of  the  word  "element"      .  .  .  .115 

106.  Disintegration  theory  of  the  evolution  of  the  elements     .      116 

107.  Crookes'  theory  of  the  evolution  of  the  elements     .  .117 


viii  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

CHAPTER  X 

The  Spectra  or  Isotopes 

108.  The  spectra  of  isotopes  .  .  .  .  .  .  .121 

109.  The  magnitude  of  the  gravitational  effect         .  .  .121 

110.  Deviation  of  the  Bolir  orbits  due  to  change  in  the  position  of 

the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  rotating  system     .  .      122 

111.  Later  experiments  of  Aronberg  and  Merton     .  .  .123 

112.  "  Isotope  "  effect  on  the  infra-red  spectrum  of  molecules   .      126 

CHAPTER  XI 

The  Separation  of  Isotopes 


113.  The  separation  of  isotopes       ..... 

114.  Separation  by  diffusion  ..... 

115.  The  separation  of  the  isotopes  of  chlorine  by  the  difiusion 

of  HCI 

116.  Separation  by  thermal  diffusion       .... 

117.  Separation  by  gravitation  or  "pressure  diffusion"  . 

118.  Separation    by    chemical    action    or     ordinary    fractional 

distillation         ....... 

119.  Separation  by  evaporation  at  very  low  pressure 

120.  Separation  of  the  isotopes  of  chlorine  by  free  evaporation 

121.  Separation  by  positive  rays     ..... 

122.  Separation  by  photochemical  methods 

123.  Other  methods  of  separation  and  general  conclusions 


127 

127 

129 
129 
131 

133 
134 
136 
136 
137 
138 


Appendix      I.     Table  of  Atomic  Weights  and  Isotopes  of 

THE  Elements      .  .  .          .  .141 

„  II.     The  Periodic  Table  of  the  Elements         .     144 

„          III.     Recent  Results  obtained  by  Dempster     .      146 


LIST   OF   PLATES 

Plate     I.     Positive  Ray  Parabolas        .          .          .  To  face  page  28 

„      II.     Original  Mass-Spectrograph  .          .          .  „          ,,46 

„    III.     Mass  Spectra         .          .          .          .         •  „          „      66 

„    IV.     Mass  Spectra „         „      72 


CHAPTER   I 
INTRODUCTION 

1.  Introduction. — Towards  the  end  of  the  last  century 
the  attitude  of  science  in  relation  to  the  atomic  theory  started 
to  undergo  a  complete  and  radical  change.  What  had  been 
before  regarded  as  a  convenient  working  hypothesis  became 
with  remarkable  rapidity  a  definite  statement  of  fact. 

This  transformation  is  now  complete  and  in  any  well- 
equipped  laboratory  to-day  not  only  can  individual  atoms  be 
detected  but  the  movements  of  the  swiftest  of  them  can  be 
tracked  and  made  visible  even  to  the  untrained  eye. 

The  causes  of  this  remarkable  advance  are  to  be  ascribed  in 
particular  to  the  discovery  of  radioactivity,  which  has  provided 
us  with  atomic  projectiles  possessing  enough  energy  to  produce 
visible  and  measurable  effects  individually,  and  in  general  to 
the  steady  and  continuous  improvement  in  technical  methods. 
Subject  to  such  unprecedented  scrutiny  it  was  to  be  expected 
that  the  fundamental  physical  theories  which  underlie  the 
applied  science  of  chemistry  and  form  a  solid  mathematical 
foundation  for  its  formulae,  might  show  hitherto  unsuspected 
flaws.  Such  expectations  began  to  be  reahsed  when,  among 
the  radioactive  elements,  Boltwood  failed  to  separate  ionium 
from  thorium,  and,  among  the  inactive  elements,  when  Sir 
J.  J.  Thomson  a  few  years  later  observed  the  anomalous 
behaviour  of  neon  when  subjected  to  positive  ray  analysis. 
Further  and  stiU  more  delicate  and  careful  scrutiny  of  these 
flaws  revealed  them,  as  it  must  always  do,  if  they  are  real,  not 
as  fortuitous  and  disconnected  but  as  a  definite  and  ultimately 
intelligible  pattern.  It  is  with  the  interpretation  of  this 
pattern,  so  revealed,  that  this  volume  is  concerned,  so  that  it 
will  be  of  interest  to  look  back  rather  over  a  century  to  the 

1  B 


2  ISOTOPES 

beginning  of  the  theories  which  form  the  background  against 
which  it  was  first  observed. 

2.  Hypotheses  of  Dalton  and  Prout. — In  the  generalisa- 
tion, known  as  the  Atomic  Theory,  put  forward  by  Dalton  in 
1803,  which  laid  the  foundations  of  the  whole  of  modern  , 
chemistry,  five  postulates  were  laid  down,  and  it  is  a  striking  | 
tribute  to  the  shrewd  intuition  of  that  observer  that,  of  those 
five,  to  this  day,  the  validity  of  one  only  is  in  any  question. 
This  postulate  is  that : — Atoms  of  the  same  element  are  similar 
to  one  another  and  equal  in  weight.  It  obviously  consists  i 
of  two  parts  and  if  we  combine  both  as  a  definition  of  the  word 
element  the  whole  becomes  a  truism  ;  this  aspect  of  the  matter 
will  be  considered  later  on.  For  the  present  we  shall  take  the 
word  "  element  "  to  mean  what  Dalton  evidently  intended  it 
to  mean,  and  what  we  generally  consider  it  to  mean  to-day, 
namely  a  substance  such  as  chlorine  or  lead  which  has  constant 
chemical  properties,  and  which  cannot  be  resolved  into  further 
components  by  any  known  chemical  process.  The  first  half 
— taken  together  with  the  other  four  postulates — is  then 
sufficient  to  define  the  word  "  element "  and  the  second 
becomes  a  pure  hypothesis. 

About  ten  years  later  Prout  suggested  that  the  atoms  of  the 
elements  were  all  made  up  of  aggregations  of  atoms  of  hydrogen. 
On  this  view  the  weights  of  all  atoms  must  be  expressed  as 
whole  numbers,  and  if,  as  postulated  by  Dalton,  the  atoms  of 
any  particular  element  are  all  identical  in  weight,  the  atomic 
weights  and  combining  ratios  of  all  elements  must  be  whole 
numbers  also.  Chemists  soon  found  that  in  the  case  of  many 
elements  this  was  certainly  not  in  agreement  with  experiment ; 
the  more  results  they  obtained  the  more  impossible  it  was  to 
express  the  atomic  weights  of  all  the  elements  as  whole  numbers. 
They  therefore  had  to  decide  which  hypothesis,  Dalton's  or 
Prout's,  they  would  adopt.  There  was  little  doubt  as  to  the 
result  of  the  decision  and  in  due  course  Prout's  theory  was 
abandoned. 

It  is  interesting  to  consider  the  reasons  which  led  to  a  decision 
which  the  subsequent  history  of  science  proves  to  have  been 
as  wise  in  principle  as  it  was  wrong  in  fact.     The  alternative 


INTRODUCTION  3 

views  were — either  an  element  was  composed  of  atoms  of  iden- 
tically the  same  weight,  when  in  certain  elements  the  weights  of 
the  individual  atoms  must  be  fractional,  or  these  particular 
elements  were  composed  of  atoms  of  different  weights  mixed 
together,  so  that  though  the  individual  weights  of  the  atoms 
would  still  be  whole  numbers  their  mean  would  be  a  fraction. 
It  is  almost  inconceivable  that  the  second  alternative  never 
occurred  to  philosophers  during  the  time  when  the  decision 
hung  in  the  balance — indeed  it  was  far  more  likely  to  be 
considered  then  than  years  later  when  Dalton's  view  had  been 
generally  accepted — but  the  objections  to  it  were  immediate 
and  formidable.  The  idea  that  particles  could  behave  in  a 
practically  identical  manner  even  though  they  had  different 
weights  is  not  one  that  commends  itself,  a  "priori,  to  common 
sense,  and  as  a  working  hypothesis  for  chemists  it  is  as  hopeless 
and  indefinite  as  the  simpler  alternative  is  distinct  and  inspiring. 
Also  it  could  be  urged  that  the  objections  to  the  fractional 
weights  of  atoms  were  rather  philosophic  than  practical. 
They  were  concerned  with  the  structure  of  individual  atoms 
and  so  might  be,  and  wisely  were,  set  aside  till  the  time,  distant 
enough  it  would  then  have  seemed,  when  these  hypothetical 
entities  could  be  dealt  with  experimentally. 

The  idea  that  atoms  of  the  same  element  are  aU  identical  in 
weight  could  not  be  challenged  by  chemical  methods,  for  the 
atoms  are  by  definition  chemically  identical  and  numerical 
ratios  were  only  to  be  obtained  in  such  methods  by  the  use  of 
quantities  of  the  element  containing  countless  myriads  of 
atoms.  At  the  same  time  it  is  rather  surprising,  when  we 
consider  the  complete  absence  of  positive  evidence  in  its 
support  that  no  theoretical  doubts  were  publicly  expressed 
until  late  in  the  nineteenth  century,  first  by  Schutzenberger 
and  then  by  Crookes,  and  that  these  doubts  have  been  regarded, 
even  up  to  the  last  few  years,  as  speculative  in  the  highest 
degree.  In  order  to  dismiss  the  idea  that  the  atoms  of  such  a 
famihar  element  as  chlorine  might  not  all  be  of  the  same 
weight,  one  had  only  to  mention  diffusion  experiments  and  the 
constancy  of  chemical  equivalents.  It  is  only  within  the  last 
few  years  that  the  lamentable  weakness  of  such  arguments 
has  been  exposed  and  it  has  been  realised  that  the  experimental 


4  ISOTOPES 

separation   of  atoms  differing  from  each  other  by  as  much  as 
10  per  cent,  in  weight,  is  really  an  excessively  difficult  operation. 

3.  Crookes'  meta- elements. — The  chemist  who  above 
all  others  urged  the  possibility  of  the  heterogeneity  of  atoms 
was  the  late  Sir  WiUiam  Crookes,  to  whom  we  are  indebted 
for  so  many  remarkable  scientific  prophecies.  His  address  to 
the  Chemical  Section  of  the  British  Association  at  Birmingham 
in  1886^  is  a  most  amazing  effort  of  reason  and  imagination 
combined  and  should  be  read  by  all  those  interested  in  the 
history  of  scientific  thought.  In  it  he  says  :  "  I  conceive, 
therefore,  that  when  we  say  the  atomic  weight  of,  for  instance, 
calcium  is  40,  we  reaUy  express  the  fact  that,  while  the  majority 
of  calcium  atoms  have  an  actual  atomic  weight  of  40,  there 
are  not  a  few  which  are  represented  by  39  or  41,  a  less  number 
by  38  or  42,  and  so  on.  We  are  here  reminded  of  Newton's 
'  old  worn  particles.' 

"Is  it  not  possible,  or  even  feasible,  that  these  heavier  and 
lighter  atoms  may  have  been  in  some  cases  subsequently  sorted 
out  by  a  process  resembUng  chemical  fractionation  ?  This 
sorting  out  may  have  taken  place  in  part  while  atomic  matter 
was  condensing  from  the  primal  state  of  intense  ignition,  but 
also  it  may  have  been  partly  effected  in  geological  ages  by 
successive  solutions  and  reprecipitations  of  the  various  earths. 

'*  This  may  seem  an  audacious  speculation,  but  I  do  not 
think  it  beyond  the  power  of  chemistry  to  test  its  feasibihty." 

Later  ^  he  developed  this  idea  in  connection  with  his  pioneer 
work  on  the  rare  earths.  By  a  laborious  process  of  fractional 
precipitation  he  subdivided  the  earth  yttria  into  a  number  of 
components  which  had  different  phosphorescent  spectra  but 
resembled  each  other  very  closely  in  their  chemical  properties. 
Pointing  out  that  at  that  time  yttrium  was  considered  to  be 
an  element  he  says  :  "  Here,  then,  is  a  so-caUed  element  whose 
spectrum  does  not  emanate  equally  from  all  its  atoms  ;  but 
some  atoms  furnish  some,  other  atoms  others,  of  the  lines  and 
bands  of  the  compound  spectrum  of  the  element.  Hence  the 
atoms  of  this  element  differ  probably  in  weight,  and  certainly 

^  Nature,  M,  i23,     1886. 

2  Trans.  Chem.  Soc,  53,  487.     1888  ;  55,  257.     1889. 


INTRODUCTION  5 

in  the  internal  motions  they  undergo."  He  called  such  com- 
ponents "  Meta-elements  "  and  suggested  that  the  idea  might 
apply  to  the  elements  generally,  for  example  referring  to  the 
seven  series  of  bands  in  the  absorption  spectrum  of  iodine, 
*'  some  of  these  molecules  may  emit  some  of  the  series,  others 
others,  and  in  the  jumble  of  aU  these  molecules,  to  which  is 
given  the  name  '  iodine  vapour,'  the  whole  seven  series  are 
contributors," 

In  so  far  as  they  differed  a  little  in  atomic  weight  and  a 
mixture  of  them  constituted  a  chemical  element,  these  hypo- 
thetical meta-elements  may  be  said  to  have  offered  the  first 
feasible  explanation  of  the  fractional  atomic  weights.  But 
as  more  and  more  refined  chemical  methods  were  appHed,  the 
rare  earths  one  after  another  yielded  to  analysis  and  the 
different  spectra  observed  by  Crookes  were  shown  to  be  due 
to  the  fact  that  he  was  dealing  with  a  mixture  of  real  elements, 
each  of  which  had  a  characteristic  spectrum  and  a  definite 
atomic  weight.  The  theory  of  meta-elements  was  therefore 
abandoned  and  the  problem  of  fractional  atomic  weight 
remained  unsolved, 

4.  The  discovery  of  Isotopes. — As  time  went  on  the 
numbers  representing  the  atomic  weights  grew  more  and  more 
accurate  and  consistent.  Significant  figures  one  after  another 
were  added  by  one  worker,  confirmed  by  others,  and  finally 
approved  by  an  International  Committee,  Small  blame  to 
the  student  therefore  if,  when  studying  the  imposing  hst  of 
numbers  called  the  International  Atomic  Weights,  he  fell  into 
the  very  natural  error  of  confusing  "  atomic  weights  "  with 
"  weights  of  atoms,"  and  considered  that  these  figures  did 
actually  represent  the  relative  weights  of  the  individual  atoms 
themselves. 

Why  so  many  of  the  atomic  weights  should  be  very  nearly 
integers  when  expressed  on  the  scale  0=16  was  still  a  very 
difficult  question  to  answer,  for  the  probability  against  this 
being  due  to  pure  chance  was  enormous,  but  it  was  not  until 
the  discovery  of  radioactivity  that  the  true  reason  for  this 
curious  jumble  of  whole  numbers  and  fractions  was  suggested, 
and  later  confirmed  generally  by  positive  ray  analysis.     It  is 


6  ISOTOPES 

worth  noting  that  the  first  experimental  proof  that  the 
atoms  of  an  element  might  be  even  approximately  of  the  same 
weight  was  given  by  positive  ray  parabolas.^ 

The  results  given  by  the  radioactive  elements  introduced  a 
wealth  of  new  and  revolutionary  ideas.  One  of  these  was 
that  elements  might  exist  which  were  chemically  identical 
but  yet  differed  in  radioactive  properties  and  even  in  atomic 
weight.  By  1910  this  idea  had  gained  ground  and  was  seriously 
put  forward  and  discussed  by  Soddy.  At  about  the  same 
period  the  technique  of  positive  ray  analysis  was  rapidly  being 
improved,  and  in  1912  the  first  results  were  obtained  from  neon 
which  were  later  to  support  this  new  idea  and  carry  it  into  the 
region  of  the  non-radioactive  elements.  From  this  time 
onwards  advances  were  made  in  the  two  fields  side  by  side, 
and  so  it  happened  that  at  the  meeting  of  the  British  Associa- 
tion in  1913  2  papers  were  read  in  different  sections,  one  on 
the  Radio-elements  and  the  Periodic  Law,  the  other  on  the 
Homogeneity  of  Neon,  both  of  which  tended  to  prove  that 
substances  could  exist  with  identical,  or  practically  identical, 
chemical  and  spectroscopic  properties  but  different  atomic 
weights. 

The  need  for  a  specific  name  for  such  substances  soon  became 
imperative  and  Soddy  suggested  the  word  Isotopes  {laog 
equal,  ranog,  place)  because  they  occupied  the  same  place  in 
the  periodic  table  of  the  elements. 

1  F.  p.  29. 

2  Oddly  enough  this  was  the  first  meeting  of  the  Association  at 
Birmingham  since  the  one  twenty-seven  j-ears  before  at  which  Crookes 
made  his  prophetic  remarks  about  atomic  weights  aheady  quoted. 


CHAPTER   II 
THE   RADIOACTIVE   ISOTOPES 

5.  Chemical  identities  among  the  radioactive  ele- 
ments.— Apart  from  the  purely  speculative  considerations 
which  have  aheady  been  detailed,  the  theory  of  isotopes  had 
its  birth  in  the  gigantic  forward  wave  of  human  knowledge 
inaugurated  by  the  discovery  of  radioactivity.  It  can  admit- 
tedly be  argued  that,  even  if  no  radioactive  elements  existed, 
isotopes  would  inevitably  have  been  discovered  by  the  method 
of  positive  rays.  But  progress  must  then  have  been  exceed- 
ingly slow,  and  the  arrival  at  the  real  interpretation  of  the  idea, 
depending  as  it  does  on  Sir  Ernest  Rutherford's  theory  of 
the  "  nucleus  "  atom,  almost  impossible. 

In  1906  Boltwood  at  Yale  discovered  a  new  element  in  the 
radioactive  group  which  he  called  Ionium,^  and  described 
as  having  chemical  properties  similar  to  those  of  thorium. 
So  much  was  this  the  case  that  if,  by  accident,  salts  of  these 
two  elements  were  mixed,  he  found  it  impossible  to  separate 
them  again  by  any  of  the  chemical  processes. 

Boltwood,  being  occupied  in  the  experimental  proof  that 
ionium  was  the  parent  substance  of  radium,  did  not  pursue 
this  hne  of  investigation  further  at  the  time,  but  the  work 
was  later  taken  in  hand  by  Marckwald  and  Keetman  of  Berhn.^ 
Thanks  to  the  rapid  advance  in  radioactive  methods  there 
were  now  at  command  means  of  detecting  change  in  concen- 
tration of  a  dehcacy  unheard  of  in  the  previous  work  on  the 
rare  earths,  but  yet,  after  years  of  patient  and  laborious  work, 
not  the  shghtest  sign  of  separation  of  ionium  and  thorium 
could  be   observed.     The   chemical   similarity  between  these 

»  Boltwood.  Amer.  J.  ScL,  22,  537,     190G  ;  24,  370,     1907. 
*  Keetman,  Jahr.  Radioactivitat,  6,  269,     1909. 

7 


8  ISOTOPES 

two  bodies  was  therefore  of  an  order  entirely  different  to  that 
exhibited  by  the  rare  earth  elements,  and  came  as  near  absolute 
identity  as  the  most  critical  mind  could  require. 

This  result  was  confirmed  in  the  most  rigorous  manner  by 
Auer  V.  Welsbach/  who  was  able  to  apply  to  the  problem 
his  valuable  experience  in  work  on  the  rare  earths. 

Furthermore,  Mesothorium,  discovered  by  Hahn  in  1907, 
was  shown  to  be  chemically  inseparable  from  radium  by 
Marckwald  ^  and  Soddy  ^  and  similar  chemical  identities  were 
shown  to  be  exceedingly  probable  in  many  other  cases  of 
radioactive  products.  Certain  regularities  in  the  occurrence 
of  these  were  pointed  out  by  Hahn  and  Meitner.^ 

The  situation  was  admirably  summed  up  by  Soddy  in  his 
report  on  radioactivity  for  the  year  1910^  in  the  following 
words  : — 

"  These  regularities  may  prove  to  be  the  beginning  of  some 
embracing  generalisation,  which  will  throw  hght,  not  only  on 
radioactive  processes,  but  on  elements  in  general  and  the 
Periodic  Law.  Of  course,  the  evidence  of  chemical  identity 
is  not  of  equal  weight  for  all  the  preceding  cases,  but  the 
complete  identity  of  ionium,  thorium  and  radiothorium,  of 
radium  and  mesothorium  1,  of  lead  and  radium  D,  may  be 
considered  thoroughly  estabhshed.  .  .  .  The  recognition 
that  elements  of  different  atomic  weights  may  possess  identical 
properties  seems  destined  to  have  its  most  important  apphca- 
tion  in  the  region  of  inactive  elements,  where  the  absence  of 
a  second  radioactive  nature  makes  it  impossible  for  chemical 
identity  to  be  individually  detected.  Chemical  homogeneity 
is  no  longer  a  guarantee  that  any  supposed  element  is  not  a 
mixture  of  several  of  different  atomic  weights,  or  that  any 
atomic  weight  is  not  merely  a  mean  number.  The  constancy 
of  atomic  weight,  whatever  the  source  of  the  material,  is  not 
a  complete  proof  of  homogeneity,  for,  as  in  the  radioelements, 
genetic  relationships  might  have  resulted  in  an  initial  constancy 
of  proportion  between  the  several  individuals,  which  no  sub- 

1  A.  von  Welsbach,  Wien.  Ber.  iia,  119,  1011,     1910. 

2  Marckwald,  Ber.  d.  Chem.  Oes.,  40,  3420,     1910. 

3  Soddy,  Trans.  Chem.  Soc,  99,  72,     1911. 

*  Hahn  and  Meitner,  Physikal.  Zeitsch.,  11,  493,      1910. 

*  Soddy,  Chem.  Soc.  Ann.  Rep.,  285,     1910. 


THE  RADIOACTIVE  ISOTOPES  9 

sequent  natural  or  artificial  chemical  process  would  be  able  to 
disturb.  If  this  is  the  case,  the  absence  of  simple  numerical 
relationships  between  the  atomic  weights  becomes  a  matter  of 
course  rather  than  one  of  surprise." 

6.  Spectroscopic  identity  of  isotopes. — The  next  great 
advance  was  of  an  even  more  revolutionary  character.  This 
consisted  in  the  demonstration  that  the  chemically  indistin- 
guishable products  of  the  transformation  of  the  radioactive 
elements  might  also  be  spectroscopically  identical.  The  idea 
that  elements  of  different  atomic  weight  might  yet  have  the 
same  spectrum  originated  in  Sir  Ernest  Rutherford's  laboratory 
and  appears  to  have  been  first  entertained  by  A.  S.  Russell. 
With  Rossi  ^  he  undertook  the  comparison  between  the  spec- 
trum of  pure  thorium  and  that  of  a  mixture  of  thorium  and 
ionium  which  radioactive  evidence  showed  to  contain  a  large 
percentage  of  the  latter  element.  No  new  fines  attributable 
to  ionium  were  observed  ;  in  fact  the  spectra  obtained  were 
absolutely    indistinguishable. 

After  giving  in  full  the  radioactive  evidence  as  to  the  probable 
percentage  of  ionium  present,  and  showing  that  it  was  prac- 
tically impossible  for  this  to  be  too  small  for  its  spectrum  to 
appear,  the  writers  go  on  as  foUows  : — 

"  There  are,  however,  two  other  possible  ways  of  explaining 
our  failure  to  obtain  a  distinct  spectrum  for  ionium,  besides  the 
one  discussed  above.     It  is  possible  that : — 

"  (1)  Ionium  has  no  arc  spectrum  in  the  region  investigated, 
or 

"  (2)  Ionium  and  thorium  have  identical  spectra  in  the  region 
investigated. 

"  The  first  possibifity  is  highly  improbable,  for  all  solids  of 
high  atomic  weights  have  arc  spectra,  and,  further,  aU  rare 
earths  have  highly  comphcated  spectra. 

"  The  second  possibifity,  though  somewhat  speculative 
in  nature,  is  suggested  by  some  recent  work  on  the  chemical 
properties  of  the  radio-elements.  There  is  no  evidence 
at  present  to  disprove  its  truth.  It  is  well  known  that  there 
are  no  less  than  four  sets  of  longfived  radio-elements,  the 

1  Russell  and  Rossi,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc,  77A,  478,     1912. 


10  ISOTOPES 

members  of  each  of  which  are  chemically  non-separable.  These 
elements  do  not  all  belong  to  the  group  of  rare  earths,  many 
non-radioactive  members  of  which  are  known  to  be  chemically 
very  similar.  Mesothorium,  for  instance,  which  is  chemically 
non-separable '  from  radium,  belongs  to  the  alkahne  earth 
group.  Again  the  two  non-separable  a  ray  products  which 
are  present  in  ordinary  uranium,  and  which  have  been  called 
by  Geiger  and  Nuttall  uranium  I  and  uranium  II  belong  to 
the  chromium-molybdenum-tungsten  group  of  elements.  The 
explanation  of  these  striking  chemical  similarities  is  very 
probably  that  the  two  very  similar  bodies  are  really  different 
members  of  the  same  group  of  elements,  the  difference  in  their 
chemical  properties  being  less  pronounced  than  the  difference 
between  other  members  of  the  same  group,  owing  to  the  small 
difference  in  their  atomic  weights.  But  the  possibility  that 
they  are  identical  in  all  physical  and  chemical  properties,  and 
differ  only  in  atomic  weight  and  in  radioactive  properties,  should 
not  be  lost  sight  of.  If  this  explanation  should  eventually  prove 
justified,  the  spectrum  of  ionium  would  he  identical  with  that  of 
thorium." 

It  is  not  surprising  that  the  idea  was  put  forward  with  some 
caution.  Unhke  that  of  chemical  identity  which  had  been 
led  up  to  by  a  gradual  series  of  steps,  it  was  entirely  new  and 
contrary  to  all  the  preconceived  ideas  of  the  relations  between 
the  spectrum  of  an  element  and  the  masses  of  its  atoms.  The 
new  departure  was  supported  by  Soddy  ^  but  received  some 
adverse  criticism  on  the  ground  of  insufficient  evidence.  The 
later  work  bearing  on  this  point  will  be  described  in  Chapter  X. 

Ah-eady  in  1911  the  theory  of  the  "  Nucleus  Atom  "  2  had 
been  formulated.  This  gave  the  first  hint  as  to  the  physical 
meaning  of  chemical  and  spectroscopic  identity,  namely  that 
the  nuclei  of  atoms  might  vary  in  their  mass  but  yet,  at  the 
same  time,  possess  some  property  in  common  with  each  other, 
namely  nuclear  charge,  upon  which  the  chemistry  and  spectra 
depend. 

In   1912  appeared  the  electrochemical  work  of    Hevesy,* 

1  Soddy,  Chem.  News,  Feb.  28,  1913.  *  F.  p.  92. 

3  G.  Hevesy,  Phil.  Mag.,  23,  628,  1912  ;  Physikal.  Zeitsch.  15,  672, 
715,     1912. 


THE  RADIOACTIVE  ISOTOPES  11 

which  led  to  the  discovery  of  the  remarkable  field  of  research 
opened  up  by  the  use  of  radioactive  bodies  as  indicators.^  A 
Httle  later  Paneth  and  Hevesy  were  able  to  show  the  complete 
identity  of  the  electrochemical  properties  of  Radium  D  and 
Lead.2 

In  1914  Rutherford  and  Andrade  ^  examined  the  self -excited 
X-ray  spectrum  of  radium  B.  They  used  a  crystal  of  rock 
salt  for  the  analysis  and  got  rid  of  the  effect  of  the  swift  ^ 
rays  by  putting  the  source  in  a  strong  magnetic  field.  The  wave 
length  of  the  L  radiation  proved  to  be  exactly  that  expected 
for  lead  from  Moseley's  experiment.*  This  was  the  first 
proof  that  isotopes  had  identical  X-ray  spectra.  The  actual 
values  for  ordinary  lead  were  subsequently  determined  by 
Siegbahn  and  found  to  be  in  excellent  agreement  with  Ruther- 
ford and  Andrade's  results. 

7.  The  Chemical  Law  of  Radioactive  change. — This 
law,  put  in  the  briefest  form,  asserts  :  A  radioactive  element 
when  it  loses  an  alpha  particle  goes  back  two  places  in  the 
Periodic  Table  ;  when  it  loses  a  beta  particle  it  goes  forward 
one  place. 

The  law  has  been  associated  with  the  name  of  Soddy  ^  who 
was  the  first  to  suggest,  in  the  form  of  a  valency  property, 
that  part  of  it  relating  to  alpha  rays.^  But  in  its  more  com- 
plete enunciation,  which  took  place  early  in  1913,  at  least 
four  other  investigators  can  claim  a  share. 

RusseU  was  the  first  to  pubhsh  a  law  covering  both  Idnds  of 
rays,'  but  owing  to  the  fact  that  he  failed  to  reaHse  that  the 
sequence  of  elements  in  the  periodic  table  is  a  continuous  ex- 
pression, his  statement  was  not  so  simple  and  definite  as  it  might 
have  been.     Fajans,^  using  as  foundation  the  electrochemical 

^  F.  p.  19. 

2  Paneth  and  Hevesy,  Sitzungber.  K.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  iiA,  123, 
1037,     1913. 

3  Rutherford  and  Andrade,  Phil.  Mag.  27,  854,  1914.       *  V.  p.  93. 

^  V.  Stewart,  Recent  Advances  in  Physical  and  Inorganic  Chemistry, 
Longmans,  1919. 

^  Soddy,  The  Chemistry  of  the  Radio  Elements,  29,  First  Edition, 
Longmans,    1911. 

'  Russell,  Chem.  News,  Jan,  31,  1913, 

8  Fajans,  Physikal.  Zeitsch.  Feb.   15,  1913. 


12  ISOTOPES 

results  of  Hevesy,^  and  Soddy,  working  on  the  results  of  a 
very  full  chemical  investigation  carried  out  at  his  request  by 
Fleck,  2  pubUshed  the  generalisation  in  its  full  and  complete 
form  independently,  and  practically  at  the  same  time. 

This  law,  which  will  be  shown  later  to  be  a  natural  conse- 
quence of  the  much  wider  generahsation  discovered  by  Moseley,^ 
has  been  of  the  greatest  value  in  correlating  the  numerous 
products  of  radioactive  change,  and  predicting  with  accuracy 
which  of  them  mil  have  identical  properties.  To  the  latter 
the  name  Isotopes  was  apphed  by  Soddy  in  the  following 
words :  "  The  same  algebraic  sum  of  the  positive  and 
negative  charges  in  the  nucleus  when  the  arithmetical  sum 
is  different  gives  what  I  call  '  isotopes  '  or  '  isotopic  elements  ' 
because  they  occupy  the  same  place  in  the  periodic  table. 
They  are  chemically  identical,  and  save  only  as  regards  the 
relatively  few  physical  properties  which  depend  upon  atomic 
mass  directly,  physically  identical  also."  Any  element  which 
is  the  result  of  a  series  of  changes  involving  the  loss  of  twice 
as  many  beta  particles  as  alpha  particles  must  clearly  be  the 
isotope  of  the  parent  element,  since  it  must  inevitably,  by  the 
above  law,  reach  the  same  place  in  the  periodic  table  at  the  end 
of  these  operations. 

8.  Isobares. — Just  as  we  can  have  elements  of  the  same 
chemical  properties  but  different  atomic  weight  so  we  can  also 
have  those  with  the  same  atomic  weight  but  different  chemical 
properties.  These  Stewart  *  has  called  "  Isobares."  Any 
product  due  to  the  loss  of  a  beta  ray  (which  has  a  negligible 
mass)  5  must  be  an  isobare  of  its  parent  substance,  for,  without 
change  of  mass,  it  has  moved  in  the  periodic  table  and  so 
changed  its  chemical  properties.  It  is  interesting  to  note  in 
this  connection  that  no  isobare  has  actually  been  discovered 
among  the  non-radioactive  elements  as  yet,  but  they  must 
certainly  exist.*' 

^  Hevesy,  Physihal.  Zeitsch.  Jan.   15,   1913. 

2  Fleck,  Trans.  Chem.  Soc.  103,  381,   1052,     1913. 

3  V.  p.  93. 

*  Stewart,  Phil.  Mag.  36,  326,     1918. 
'  V.  p.  91. 
«  V.  p.  77. 


THE  RADIOACTIVE  ISOTOPES  13 

9.  The  Radioactive  Transformations. — The  radioactive 
elements  are  all  formed  from  the  two  parent  elements  inanium 
and  thorium  by  a  series  of  changes  or  transformations.  These 
changes  can  be  classified  according  to  their  nature  into  two 
types.  In  the  first  type  of  change  called  the  a  ray  change 
the  atom  loses  a  particle  of  mass  4  carrying  two  positive 
charges  {+  2e)  which  has  been  identified  with  the  nucleus 
of  the  helium  atom.^  In  the  second  or  ^  ray  change  the 
particle  shot  off  has  a  neghgible  mass  and  carries  a  single 
negative  charge  ( —  e).  Hence  in  an  a  ray  change  the  ele- 
ment loses  4  units  in  atomic  weight,  while  in  a  /3  ray  change 
its  weight  is  unaltered. 

The  rate  of  decay  of  an  element  is  measured  by  the  "  half 
value  "  period  which  may  vary  from  10^°  years  to  10 ~^^  of  a 
second.  The  velocity  with  which  the  rays  are  ejected  also 
varies  and  is  apparently  connected  with  the  period  of  the 
element  by  the  very  interesting  relation  of  Geiger  and  NuttaU.^ 
The  intricate  researches  by  which  the  complex  series  of  trans- 
formations have  been  explained  belong  to  the  subject  of 
Radioactivity  and  cannot  be  described  here.  From  the  point 
of  view  of  isotopes  it  will  be  enough  to  consider  the  final 
results  which  are  given  in  the  two  diagrams  (Figs.  1  and  2). 

In  the  first  of  these,  which  is  due  to  Soddy,^  the  nuclear 
charge  or  Atomic  number,'*  upon  which  all  the  chemical 
and  spectroscopic  properties  of  the  elements  depend,  and 
which  expresses  its  position  in  the  periodic  table,  is  indicated 
by  a  series  of  columns  edged  with  thick  fines  sloping  down- 
wards to  the  right.  The  atomic  weights  are  shown  by  fine 
lines  sloping  in  the  opposite  direction.  The  fines  corre- 
sponding to  even  atomic  weights  have  been  omitted  to  simpfify 
the  scheme.  AU  elements  lying  in  the  same  column  will 
therefore  be  isotopes  and  all  elements  lying  on  the  same  fine 
sloping  up  to  the  right  will  be  isobares.  The  a  and  ^  ray 
changes  are  shown  by  arrows  and  the  period  of  decay  of  the 
elements  indicated  by  times  expressed  in  suitable  units. 

1  V.  Table  p.  106. 

*  Rutherford,  Radioactive  Substances  and  their  Radiations,  p.  607, 
Cambridge,  1913. 

3  Soddy,  Trans.  Chem.  Soc,  U5,  16,     1919.  *  V.  p.  93. 


14 


ISOTOPES 


Fig.  1. — Diagram  of  the  transformations  of  the  radio-elements  showing 
atomic  number,  atomic  weight  and  period  of  disintegration  of  each 
product. 


THE  RADIOACTIVE  ISOTOPES 


16 


The  second  diagram  ^  is  arranged  in  a  simple  manner  to 
show  the  general  chains  of  transformation  at  a  glance.  In  it 
the  a  and  /5  ray  changes  are  plotted  against  atomic  number 
and  the  other  information  omitted.  On  this  diagram  all 
elements  lying  on  the  same  horizontal  level  will  be  isotopes. 
To  take  an  example,  uranium  I  which  has  an  atomic  number 
92  and  an  atomic  weight  238  loses  one  a  particle  and  becomes 
uranium  X,  atomic  number  90,  atomic  weight  234,  This  then 
gives  off  two  /3  rays  in  succession,  first  becoming  uranium  X2 


Uranium    U.ji 


Profoachnium 


U.x,     Ionium      U.Y     \     Rac/ioact.       Thorium  Radioth. 
j  Actinium  Mikj^ 


Racfu 


Ra.  Emanation 


Polonium        RaC         Ra.A  AcC^ 

Ral/      R^.C 


AcX  Mesoth.j     Th'.X 


A  C.Em. 


Tti.Em. 


Ac.  A 


Ra.D  Pb 
\ 
Ra. 


\ 


Ra.B       Pb     Pb. 


AcC 
\ 


\ 


n.Ci 
/  \ 


TfiA 


Ac.D 


Ac.B       P6.    P6. 


ThC 


Tfy.B 


Th.D 


92 

91 

90 

89 

^Z 

87 

86 

85 

84 

83 

82 

81 


Fig.  2. — Diagram  of  the  radioactive  transformations  in  relation  to  atomic 
numbers.  In  every  case  a  step  two  downwards  is  accompanied  by  the 
emission  of  an  a  particle  and  one  downwards  by  a  /3  particle. 

and  then  Uranium  II.  Uranium  II  has  an  atomic  number 
92  so  that  it  is  an  isotope  of  uranium  I.  It  has  an  atomic 
weight  234  so  it  is  anisobare  of  uranium  Xi  and  uranium  X2. 
Uranium  II  can  disintegrate  by  shooting  off  an  a  particle  in 
two  different  ways  ;  about  8  per  cent,  of  its  atoms  appear  to 
form  uranium  Y,  which  is  probably  the  parent  substance  of 
the  actinium  series.  Disregarding  this  for  the  moment  and 
following  the  main  chain,  92  per  cent,  of  the  atoms  of  uranium 


1  Darwin,  Nature,  106,  82,     1920. 


16  ISOTOPES 

II  suffer  an  a  ray  change  and  are  transformed  into  ionium,, 
atomic  weight  230,  atomic  number  90.  Ionium  loses  an  a 
particle  and  becomes  radium,  atomic  weight  226.  This  by 
the  same  process  changes  to  radium  emanation,  then  to  radium 
A,  and  then  to  radium  B  with  atomic  weight  214,  We  see 
that  uranium  II  has  lost  5  a  particles  in  succession,  thereby- 
coming  back  10  places,  92-82  in  the  periodic  table,  and  its 
atomic  weight  has  been  reduced  20  units  in  the  process. 
Radium  B  loses  a  ^  particle,  becoming  radium  C  which  can 
disintegrate  in  two  different  ways.  An  extremely  small  pro- 
portion, 0-03  per  cent.,  of  its  atoms  undergo  an  a  ray  change  to 
radium  C2  which  then  loses  a  ^  particle  and  may  become  inactive 
lead  of  atomic  weight  210.  The  vast  majority  of  the  atoms  of 
radium  C  lose  a  ^  particle  and  form  radium  C.  This  next 
loses  an  a  particle  and  becomes  radium  D,  an  active  isotope 
of  lead  of  atomic  weight  210.  Radium  D  now  loses  two  ^ 
particles  in  succession,  becoming  radium  E  and  then  radium  E, 
which  is  also  called  polonium.  This  finally  undergoes  its  last 
a  ray  change  and  becomes  inactive  uranium  lead  of  atomic 
weight  206. 

The  thorium  and  actinium  chains  can  be  followed  on  the  dia- 
grams in  the  same  manner,  but  in  the  case  of  actinium  the 
parent  elements  are  not  satisfactorily  settled  so  that  the 
atomic  weights  in  this  series  are  all  doubtful. 

10.  The  Atomic  Weight  of  Lead. — The  theory  of  Isotopes 
of  which  Professor  Soddy  had  proved  himself  so  prominent 
an  advocate  and  defender,  received  its  most  triumphant 
vindication,  as  far  as  it  concerned  the  products  of  radio- 
activity, at  the  hands  of  the  very  chemists  who  had  most 
reason  to  doubt  its  general  apphcation,  the  specialists  in  the 
determination  of  atomic  weights. 

The  charts  of  radioactive  disintegration  ^  show  that  the  final 
product  of  every  series  is  lead.  If  we  take  the  main  chain 
of  the  uranium -radium  transformation  this  lead  must  have  an 
atomic  weight  206,  for  it  has  lost  5  alpha  particles — each  of 
weight  4 — since  it  was  radium,  and  the  atomic  weight  of  radium 
is  226.     On  the  other  hand  if  we  take  the  main  thorium  chain 

1  P.  14. 


THE   RADIOACTIVE  ISOTOPES  17 

the  lead  end  product  must  be  6  alpha  particles  lighter  than 
thorium  (232-15)  and  so  should  have  an  atomic  weight  about 
-08. 

Now  ordinary  lead,  from  non-radioactive  sources  has  an 
atomic  weight  207*20,  so  Soddy  ^  suggested  in  1913  that  the 
lead  derived  from  minerals  containing  uranium  but  no  thorium 
might  have  a  smaller  atomic  weight  than  ordinary  lead,  and 
on  the  other  hand  the  atomic  weight  of  lead  from  minerals 
containing  thorium  but  no  uranium  might  be  greater. 

The  first  experiments  were  made  by  Soddy  and  Hyman  ^ 
with  a  very  small  quantity  of  lead  from  Ceylon  Thorite.  This 
gave  a  perceptibly  higher  atomic  weight  than  ordinary  lead. 
Later  a  large  quantity  of  the  same  mineral  was  available. 
The  lead  from  this  when  carefully  purified  gave  a  density 
0'26  per  cent,  higher  than  that  of  common  lead.  On  the 
assumption  that  the  atomic  volumes  of  isotopes  are  equal 
this  figure  corresponds  to  an  atomic  weight  of  207-74.  A  chem- 
ical atomic  weight  determination  gave  207-694.  A  sample  of 
the  same  lead  was  sent  to  Vienna  where  Professor  Honigschmid, 
a  well  known  expert  in  such  matters,  obtained  from  it  a  value 
207-77  as  a  mean  of  eight  determinations.  These  figures  not 
only  showed  that  thorium  lead  had  a  higher  atomic  weight 
than  ordinary  lead  but  also  that  their  atomic  volimies  were 
identical,  as  expected  from  theory .^ 

At  the  same  time  as  this  work  was  in  progress,  the  leading 
American  authority  on  atomic  weights,  T.  W.  Richards  of 
Harvard,  started  a  series  of  investigations  on  lead  derived  from 
various  radioactive  minerals.*  The  samples  of  lead  from 
uranium  minerals  all  gave  results  lower  than  ordinary  lead, 
as  was  expected,  and  one  particularly  pure  specimen  of  uranio- 
lead  from  Norwegian  cleveite  gave  206-08,^  a  very  strildng 
agreement  with  theory.  The  follomng  table  of  properties 
is  taken  from  his  Presidential  address  to  the  American 
Association  at  Baltimore,  December,  1918. 

1  Soddy,  Ann.  Rep.  Chem.  Soc,  269,     1913. 

2  Soddy  and  Hyman,  Trans.  Chem.  Soc,  105,  1402,     1914. 

3  Soddy,  Roy.  Ins.,  May  18,  1917. 

*  Richards  and  Lembert,  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc,  36,  1329,     1914. 
5  Richards  and  Wadsworth,  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc,  38,  2613,     1916. 

C 


18 


ISOTOPES 


Common 
Lead. 

Mixture 
Aiistralian. 

Uranio- 
Lead. 

Percentage 
Difference. 

A 

B 

C 

A-B 

A-C 

Atomic  weight       .... 

207-19 

206-34 

206-08 

0-42 

0-54 

Density 

11-337 

11-280 

11-273 

0-42 

0-56 

Atomic  volume      .... 

18-277 

18-278 

18-281 

0-01 

0-02 

Melting  point  (absolute)  . 

600-53 

600-59 

— 

0-01 

— 

Solubility  (of  nitrate) 

37-281 

37130 

— 

0-41 

— 

Refractive  Index  (nitrate)    . 

1-7815 

1-7814 

— 

0-01 

— 

Thermoelectric  effect . 

— 

— 

— 

0-00 

— 

Spectrum  wave-length     . 

— 

— 

— 

0-00 

0-00 

In  further  confirmation  Maurice  Curie  in  Paris  ^  reported 
206-36  for  a  lead  from  carnotite,  and  a  still  lower  figure,  206-046, 
•was  obtained  by  Honigschmid  in  Vienna  for  a  lead  from  the 
very  pure  crystalhsed  pitchblende  from  Morogoro.  This  is 
the  lowest  atomic  weight  found  so  far.  The  highest,  207-9, 
was  also  determined  by  Honigschmid  for  lead  from  Norwegian 
thorite.2 

1 1.  Atomic  weights  of  Thorium  and  Ionium. — Although 
the  above  results  obtained  with  lead  are  far  the  most  con- 
clusive and  important  it  is  not  the  only  element  which  affords 
direct  experimental  evidence  of  the  different  atomic  weights 
of  isotopes.  The  atomic  weight  of  ionium,  calculated  by 
adding  the  weight  of  one  alpha  particle  to  the  atomic  weight 
of  its  product,  radium,  is  230,  whereas  that  of  thorium,  its 
isotope,  is  slightly  above  232.  Joachimsthal  pitchblende  con- 
tains hardly  any  thorium  so  that  an  ionium-thorium  prepara- 
tion separated  by  Auer  von  Welsbach  from  30  tons  of  this 
mineral  might  be  regarded  as  containing  a  maximum  concen- 
tration of  ionium.  On  the  other  hand  the  period  of  thorium 
is  about  10^  times  longer  than  that  of  ionium  so  that  it  was 
doubtful  if  even  in  this  preparation  there  would  be  enough 
ionium  to  show  a  difference  in  atomic  weight.  Honigschmid 
and  Mile.  Horovitz  have  made  a  special  examination  of  this 
point,  first  redetermining  as  accurately  as  possible  the  atomic 
weight  of  thorium  and  then  that  of  the  thorium -ionium  prepar- 

iM.  Curie,  Compt.  Bend.,  158,  1676,     1914. 

■Honigschmid,  Zeit.  Elektrochem. ,  24,  163,     1918  ;  25,  91,     1919. 


THE   RADIOACTIVE   ISOTOPES  19 

ation  from  pitchblende.  They  found  232-12  for  the  atomic 
weight  of  thorium,  and  by  the  same  careful  method  231*51 
for  that  of  the  thorium -ionium. 

12.  Use  of  radioactive  isotopes  as  indicators. — Con- 
sider an  inactive  element  A  which  has  a  radioactive  isotope  B. 
If  these  are  mixed  together  in  any  proportions  no  chemical 
or  physical  process  known  is  capable  of  altering  the  ratio  of 
the  proportions  of  this  mixture  to  any  measurable  extent. 
Now  the  radioactive  methods  of  detecting  and  measuring  B 
are  many  milhons  of  miUions  of  times  more  dehcate  than 
the  chemical  methods  of  detecting  and  measuring  A,  so  that 
by  mixing  with  A  a  small  quantity  of  B  we  can  trace  its  presence 
far  beyond  the  limits  of  chemical  analysis.  We  have,  as  it 
were,  marked  the  atoms  of  A  with  an  indelible  label  so  that 
the  minutest  trace  of  the  element  can  be  measured  with  ease 
and  certainty. 

By  this  powerful  and  novel  device,  which  has  been  developed 
by  G.  Hevesy  ^  10~^  gr.  of  lead  can  be  determined  quantita- 
tively and  solution  concentrations  can  be  dealt  with  down  to 
10"^*  of  normal.  By  adding  radium  D  to  the  lead  salt  and 
estimating  it  electroscopically  the  solubihty  of  lead  sulphide 
and  chromate,  and  the  amount  of  lead  chloride  carried  down 
in  a  silver  chloride  precipitate,  may  readily  be  determined. 

Recently,  by  the  same  principle,  it  has  been  shown  that  a 
free  exchange  of  the  metallic  atom  among  the  competing  acid 
radicles  occurs  for  ionised,  but  not  for  non-ionised,  compounds. 
The  general  method  was  to  mix  solutions  of  two  different 
compounds  of  lead  in  equimolecular  proportions,  the  one 
compound  only  being  "  activated  "  by  presence  of  thorium-B 
(which  is  isotopic  with  lead),  and  to  determine  the  activity  of 
the  lead  in  the  less  soluble  compound  crystalHsing  out.  When 
active  lead  nitrate  and  inactive  lead  chloride  are  dissolved 
in  molecular  proportion  in  boiling  pyridine,  the  lead  in  the 
lead  chloride  crystalHsing  out  is  half  as  active  as  the  lead  in 
the  original  lead  nitrate,  but  when  such  an  active  lead  salt 
is  so  mixed  with  an  organic  compound  of  lead,  such  as  lead 
tetraphenyl  or  diphenyl  nitrate,  in  suitable  solvents,  no  inter- 

1  Hevesy,  Brit.  Assoc,  1913  ;   Chem.  News,  Oct.  13,  166,     1913. 


20  ISOTOPES 

change  of  lead  occurs,  and  the  active  lead  salt  retains  its 
original  activity.  This  constitutes  something  like  a  direct 
proof  of  the  ionic  dissociation  theory  and  of  the  current  views 
as  to  the  difference  between  the  nature  of  chemical  union  in 
electrolytes  and  non-electrolytes.  When  the  acetates  of 
quadrivalent  activated  lead  and  of  bivalent  inactive  lead  are 
mixed  in  glacial  acetic  acid,  the  activity  of  the  first  compound, 
after  crystallising  out  from  the  mixture,  is  reduced  to  one 
half.  This  indicates,  since  the  two  lead  ions  differ  only  by 
two  electrons,  a  free  interchange  of  electrons  between  them 
and  a  dynamic  equilibrium  between  ions  and  electrons 
and  between  free  electrons  and  the  electrodes  in  electro- 
lysis. ^ 

Isotopes  can  also  be  used  to  determine  the  velocity  of 
diffusion  of  molecules  among  themselves.^  The  rate  of  diffu- 
sion is  dependent  on  the  molecular  diameter,  and  not  on  the 
mass,  so  that  a  radioactive  element  diffusing  among  the 
inactive  molecules  of  its  isotope  affords  a  means  of  investi- 
gating this  otherwise  insoluble  problem.  The  experiment  has 
been  tried  with  molten  lead.  At  the  bottom  of  a  narrow 
vertical  tube  was  placed  a  layer  of  lead  rendered  active  by 
the  presence  of  thorium-B,  and  above  it  a  layer  three  times 
the  height  of  common  lead.  The  whole  was  kept  at  340° 
for  several  days.  After  cooling,  the  cyhnder  was  cut  into 
four  equal  lengths,  each  melted  and  hammered  into  foil,  and 
the  concentration  of  thorium-B  in  each  determined  by  alpha 
ray  measurements.  Values  for  the  diffusion  coefficient  between 
1-77  and  2-54  per  sq.  cm.  per  day,  with  a  mean  of  222  in 
seventeen  experiments,  were  obtained.  On  certain  theories 
of  physical  chemistry  this  corresponds  with  a  diameter  of  the 
lead  molecule  between  0-78  and  IIQ  x  10"^  cm.,  according  to 
the  formulae  used  to  connect  the  two  quantities.  The  value 
found  by  similar  theories  when  reduced  to  a  temperature  of 
18°  and  for  a  fluid  of  the  viscosity  of  water,  becomes  2-13. 
Since  the  value  for  lead  ions  diffusing  in  aqueous  solutions  is 
0-68,  this  indicates  that  the  molecular  diameter  in  the  case 

1 G.  Hevesy  and  L.  Zechmeister,  Ber.,  53B,  410,  1920 ;  Zeitsch. 
Elektrochem.  26,  151,     1920. 

2  J.  Groh  and  Hevesy,  Ann.  Physik.,  iv.,  63,  85,     1920. 


THE   RADIOACTIVE   ISOTOPES  21 

of  metallic  lead  is  only  a  third  of  that  in  the  case  of  the  ion, 
and  shows  that  the  latter  is  probably  hydrated.^ 

13.  Classification  of  the  radioactive  isotopes. — It  is 

clear  that  the  relations  between  isotopes  formed  by  radioactive 
disintegrations  need  not  necessarily  have  the  same  simple  form 
as  those  subsisting  between  isotopes  of  the  inactive  elements. 
Neubm'ger,^  using  the  nucleus  model  of  the  radioelements 
proposed  by  Lise  Meitner,^  suggests  that  the  radioactive  iso- 
topes may  be  divided  into  three  or  even  four  classes. 

(1)  Isotopes  of  the  first  class  are  those  which  possess  only 
the  same  nuclear  charge  and  the  same  arrangement  of  outer 
electrons  such  as  radium  and  mesothorium  I. 

(2)  Isotopes  of  the  second  class  have,  in  addition,  the  same 
nuclear  mass,  that  is  to  say  the  same  atomic  weight,  and  the 
same  total  number  of  nuclear  "  building  stones."  Examples 
of  this  class  are  ionium  and  uranium  Y. 

(3)  Isotopes  of  the  third  class  still  possess  the  same  number 
of  each  nuclear  building  stone,  but  they  have  a  different 
arrangement  of  these  in  the  atomic  nucleus,  and  thus  possess 
different  chances  of  disintegrating,  such  as  Radium  D  and 
Actinium  B. 

(4)  Isotopes  of  the  fourth  class  would  be  those  possessing 
the  same  arrangement  of  nuclear  building  stones  in  the  atomic 
nucleus,  and  thus  the  same  probabihty  of  disintegrating. 
Such  isotopes  actually  exist,  but  we  have  no  available  means 
of  distinguishing  between  them.  Hence  we  cannot  at  present 
designate  them  definitely  as  isotopes.  Examples  of  these  are 
radium  Cg  and  actinium  D. 

^  Soddy,  Ann.  Rep.  Chem.  Soc,  227,     1920. 

2  Neuburger,  Nature,  108,  180,     1921. 

^  Meitner,  Die  Naturwissenschaften,  9,  423,     1921. 


CHAPTER  III 
POSITIVE   RAYS 

14.  Nature  of  Positive  Rays.— Positive  rays  were  dis- 
covered by  Goldstein  in  1886  in  electrical  discharge  at  low 
pressure.  In  some  experiments  with  a  perforated  cathode  he 
noticed  streamers  of  Hght  behind  the  perforations.  This 
luminosity,  he  assumed,  was  due  to  rays  of  some  sort  which 
travelled  in  the  opposite  direction  to  the  cathode  rays  and 
so  passed  through  the  apertures  in  the  cathode,  these  he  called 
"  canalstrahlen."  ^  Subsequently  Wien  showed  that  they 
could  be  deflected  by  a  magnetic  field.^  They  have  been  very 
fully  investigated  in  this  country  by  Sir  J,  J.  Thomson,^  who 
called  them  Positive  Rays  on  account  of  the  fact  that  they 
normally  carry  a  charge  of  positive  electricity. 

The  conditions  for  the  development  of  the  rays  are,  briefly, 
ionisation  at  low  pressure  in  a  strong  electric  field.  lonisation, 
which  may  be  due  to  coUisions  or  radiation,  means  in  its 
simplest  case  the  detachment  of  one  electron  from  a  neutral 
atom.  The  two  resulting  fragments  carry  charges  of  electricity 
of  equal  quantity  but  of  opposite  sign.  The  negatively  charged 
one  is  the  electron,  the  atomic  unit  of  negative  electricity 
itself,*  and  is  the  same  whatever  the  atom  ionised.  It  is 
extremely  light  and  therefore  in  the  strong  electric  field  rapidly 
attains  a  high  velocity  and  becomes  a  cathode  ray.  The  remain- 
ing fragment  is  clearly  dependent  on  the  nature  of  the  atom 
ionised.     It  is  immensely  more  massive  than  the  electron,  for 

1  Goldstein,  Berl.  Ber.,  39,  691,     1886. 
=»Wien,  Verh.  d.  Phys.  Gesell,  17,     1898. 

^  J.  J.  Thomson,  Rays  of  Positive  Electricity  arid  their  Application 
to  Chemical  Analyses,  Longmans,  Green,  1913. 

*  R.  A.  Millikan,  The  Electron,  University  Chicago  Press,  1918. 

22 


POSITIVE  RAYS  23 

the  mass  of  the  Hghtest  atom,  that  of  hydrogen,  is  about  1845 
times  that  of  the  electron,  and  so  will  attain  a  much  lower 
velocity  under  the  action  of  the  electric  field.  However,  if 
the  field  is  strong  and  the  pressure  so  low  that  it  does  not 
colhde  with  other  atoms  too  frequently  it  will  ultimately  attain 
a  high  speed  in  a  direction  opposite  to  that  of  the  detached 
electron,  and  become  a  "positive  ray."  The  simplest  form 
of  positive  ray  is  therefore  an  atom  of  matter  carrying  a 
positive  charge  and  endowed,  as  a  result  of  faUing  through  a 
high  potential,  with  sufficient  energy  to  make  its  presence 
detectable.  Positive  rays  can  be  formed  from  molecules  as 
well  as  atoms,  so  that  it  will  at  once  be  seen  that  any  measure- 
ment of  their  mass  wiU  give  us  direct  information  as  to  the 
masses  of  atoms  of  elements  and  molecules  of  compounds,  and 
that  this  information  will  refer  to  the  atoms  or  molecules 
individually,  not,  as  in  chemistry,  to  the  mean  of  an  immense 
aggregate.  It  is  on  this  account  that  the  accurate  analysis  of 
positive  rays  is  of  such  importance. 

In  order  to  investigate  and  analyse  them  it  is  necessary 
to  obtain  intense  beams  of  the  rays.  This  can  be  done  in 
several  ways.  The  one  most  generally  available  is  by  the 
use  of  the  discharge  in  gases  at  low  pressure. 

15.  Mechanism  of  the  electric  discharge  in  gases  at 
low  pressure. — It  is  a  somewhat  striking  anomaly  that  while 
the  working  of  the  very  recently  invented  "  Coohdge  "  X  ray 
bulb  can  be  simply  described  and  explained,  this  is  far  from 
being  the  case  with  the  much  older  ordinary  "  gas  "  tube. 
Notwithstanding  the  immense  amount  of  research  work  done 
on  the  discharge  at  low  pressure  its  most  obvious  phenomena 
are  weU  nigh  entirely  lacking  explanation.  Modern  measure- 
ments and  other  data  have  merely  destroyed  the  older  theories, 
without,  as  yet,  giving  others  to  replace  them. 

For  the  purposes  of  describing  positive  rays  it  is  not  necessary 
to  consider  such  puzzles  as  the  "  striated  discharge  "  or  other 
phenomena  connected  with  the  anode  end  of  the  tube,  but 
some  ideas  as  to  what  is  going  on  near  the  cathode  will  be  a 
considerable  help  in  our  interpretation  of  the  results  of  positive 
ray  analysis,  and  vice  versa. 


24  ISOTOPES 

16.  The  Crookes  Dark  Space. — The  comparatively  dimly 
lit  space  in  front  of  the  cathode,  terminating  at  the  bright 
"  negative  glow  "  was  first  observed  by  Crookes.  Its  length 
is  roughly  inversely  proportional  to  the  pressure  of  the  gas  in 
the  tube.  Its  boundary  the  edge  of  the  negative  glow  is 
remarkably  sharp  in  most  gases,  quite  amazingly  so  in  pure 
oxygen.  If  large  plane  cathodes  are  used  so  that  the  effect 
of  the  glass  walls — up  to  now  a  complete  mystery — is  minimised 
very  accurate  and  consistent  measurements  can  be  obtained. 
Such  measurements  have  been  made  under  a  great  variety  of 
conditions  by  the  writer.  ^  The  distribution  of  electric  force 
in  the  dark  space  has  also  been  determined  for  large  plane 
electrodes  ^  but  no  theory  yet  put  forward  can  account  for 
the  numerical  relations  obtained  in  these  investigations,  nor 
for  others  obtained  later  with  perforated  electrodes.^ 

One  can,  however,  be  fairly  certain  that  ionisation  is  going 
on  at  aU  points  throughout  the  dark  space,  and  that  it  reaches 
a  very  high  intensity  in  the  negative  glow.  This  ionisation 
is  probably  caused  for  the  most  part  by  electrons  hberated 
from  the  surface  of  the  cathode  (Cathode  Rays).  These, 
when  they  reach  a  speed  sufficient  to  ionise  by  colhsion,  fiber- 
ate  more  free  electrons  which,  in  their  turn,  become  ionising 
agents,  so  that  the  intensity  of  ionisation  from  this  cause  wiU 
tend  to  increase  as  we  move  away  from  the  cathode.  The 
fiberation  of  the  original  electrons  from  the  surface  of  the 
cathode  is  generally  regarded  as  due  to  the  impact  of  positive 
ions  (Positive  Rays)  generated  in  the  negative  glow  and  the 
dark  space,  but  this  idea,  for  which  there  is  a  fair  amount  of 
definite  evidence,  is  now  called  in  question  by  some  recent 
experiments  of  Ratner.* 

In  addition  to  cathode  ray  ionisation  the  positive  rays 
travelling  towards  the  cathode  themselves  are  capable  of 
ionising  the  gas,  and  radiation  may  also  play  an  important 
part  in  the  same  process.     The  surface  of  the  cathode  will 

1  Aston,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  79A,  80,  1907;  Aston  and  Watson,  ibid. 
86A,  168,     1912  ;    Aston,  ibid.  87A,  428,  437,     1912. 

2  Aston,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  84A,  526,     1911. 

3  Aston,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  96A,  200,     1919. 
*  Ratner,  Phil  Mag.  40,  795,     1920. 


POSITIVE  RAYS  25 

therefore  be  under  a  continuous  hail  of  positively  charged 
particles.  Their  masses  may  be  expected  to  vary  from  that 
of  the  Ughtest  atom  to  that  of  the  heaviest  molecule  capable 
of  existence  in  the  discharge  tube,  and  their  energies  from  an 
indefinitely  small  value  to  a  maximum  expressed  by  the 
product  of  the  charge  they  carry  x  the  total  potential  appHed 
to  the  electrodes.  The  latter  is  practically  the  same  as  the 
fall  of  potential  across  the  dark  space.  If  the  cathode  be 
pierced  the  rays  pass  through  the  aperture  and  form  a  stream 
heterogeneous  both  in  mass  and  velocity  which  can  be  subjected 
to  examination  and  analysis. 

17.  Methods  of  detecting  positive  rays.— The  glow 
caused  by  the  passage  of  the  rays  through  rarefied  gas  led  to 
their  original  discovery  but  is  not  made  use  of  in  accurate  work. 
For  visual  effects  the  rays  are  best  detected  by  a  screen  made 
of  powdered  willemite,  which  glows  a  faint  green  when  bom- 
barded by  them.  When  permanent  effects  are  required  this 
screen  is  replaced  by  a  photographic  plate.  The  sensitivity 
of  the  plate  to  positive  rays  bears  no  particular  relation  to  its 
sensitivity  to  Hglit,  and  so  far  the  best  results  have  been 
obtained  from  comparatively  slow  "  process  "  plates  of  the 
type  known  as  "  HaK-Tone."  The  real  relative  intensities  of 
rays  of  different  mass  cannot  be  compared  by  screens  or 
photographic  plates,  except  in  the  possible  case  of  isotopes  of 
the  same  element ;  they  can  only  be  determined  rehably  by 
collecting  the  rays  in  a  Faraday  cyhnder  and  measuring  their 
total  electric  charge. 

18.  Sir  J.  J.  Thomson's  "  Parabola "  method  of 
analysis. — The  method  by  which  Sir  J.  J.  Thomson  made 
such  a  complete  investigation  into  the  properties  of  positive 
rays,  and  which  still  remains  pre-eminent  in  respect  to  the 
variety  of  information  it  suppHes,  consists  essentially  in  allow- 
ing the  rays  to  pass  through  a  very  narrow  tube  and  then 
analysing  the  fine  beam  so  produced  by  electric  and  magnetic 
fields. 

The  construction  of  one  of  the  types  of  apparatus  used  is 
indicated  in  Fig.  3.  The  discharge  by  which  the  rays  are 
made  takes  place  in  a  large  flask  A  similar  to  an  ordinary  X-ray 


26 


ISOTOPES 


bulb  of  about  1|  litres  capacity.  The  cathode  B  is  placed 
in  the  neck  of  the  bulb.  Its  face  is  made  of  aluminium,  and 
so  shaped  that  it  presents  to  the  bulb  a  hemispherical  front 
provided  in  the  centre  with  a  funnel-shaped  depression.  This 
hole  through  which  the  rays  pass  is  continued  as  an  extremely 
fine-bore  tube,  usually  of  brass,  about  7  cms.  long,  mounted 
in  a  thick  iron  tube  forming  the  continuation  of  the  cathode  as 
indicated.  The  finer  the  bore  of  this  tube  the  more  accurate 
are  the  results  obtained,  and  tubes  have  been  made  with  success 
as  narrow  as  one-tenth  of  a  millimetre,  but  as  the  intensity 
of  the  beam  of  rays  falls  off  with  the  inverse  fourth  power  of 
the  diameter  a  practical  Hmit  is  soon  reached.     The  cathode 


Fig.   3. — Positive  Ray  Apparatus 


is  kept  cool  during  the  discharge  by  means  of  the  water-jacket 
C. 

The  anode  is  an  aluminium  rod  D,  which  is  generally  placed 
for  convenience  in  a  side  tube.  In  order  to  ensure  a  supply 
of  the  gas  under  examination  a  steady  stream  is  allowed  to 
leak  in  through  an  exceedingly  fine  glass  capillary  tube  E,  and 
after  circulating  through  the  apparatus  is  pumped  off  at  F  by 
a  Gaede  rotating  mercury  pump.  By  varying  the  speed  of  the 
pump  and  the  pressure  in  the  gas-holder  communicating  with  E, 
the  pressure  in  the  discharge  tube  may  be  varied  at  will  and 
maintained  at  any  desired  value  for  considerable  lengths  of  time. 
The  pressure  is  usually  adjusted  so  that  the  discharge  potential 
is  30,000  to  50,000  volts.  During  the  discharge  all  the  conditions 
necessary  for  the  production  of  positive  rays  are  present  in  A. 
Under  the  influence  of  the  enormous  potentials  they  attain 


POSITIVE  RAYS  27 

high  speeds  as  they  fly  towards  the  cathode,  and  those  falling 
axiaUy  pass  right  through  the  fine  tube,  emerging  as  a  narrow- 
beam. 

This  beam  is  subjected  to  analysis  by  causing  it  to  pass 
between  the  pieces  of  soft  iron  P,  P'  which  are  placed  between 
the  poles  M,  M'  of  a  powerful  electromagnet,  P  and  P'  con- 
stitute the  pole  pieces  of  the  magnet,  but  are  electrically 
insulated  from  it  by  thin  sheets  of  mica  N,  N',  and  so  can  be 
raised  to  any  desired  potential  difference  by  means  of  the 
leads  shown  in  the  diagram.  The  rays  then  enter  the  highly 
exhausted  "  camera  "  G,  and  finally  impinge  upon  the  fluores- 
cent screen  or  photographic  plate  H.  In  order  that  the  stray 
magnetic  field  may  not  interfere  with  the  main  discharge  in 
A,  shields  of  soft  iron,  I,  I'  are  interposed  between  the  magnet 
and  the  bulb. 

If  there  is  no  field  between  the  plates  P,  P'  the  beam  of  rays 
will  strike  the  screen  at  a  point  in  fine  with  the  fine  tube  called 
the  undeflected  spot.  If  an  electric  field  of  strength  X  is 
now  appHed  between  the  plates  a  particle  of  mass  m,  charge  e, 
moving  with  velocity  v,  will  be  deflected  in  the  plane  of  the 
paper  and  will  no  longer  strike  the  screen  at  the  undeflected 
spot,  but  at  a  distance  x  from  it.  Simple  dynamics  show 
that  if  the  angle  of  deflection  is  small  x  =  kCKe/mv^).  In  the 
same  way,  if  the  electric  field  is  removed  and  a  magnetic  field 
of  strength  H  applied  between  P  and  P'  the  particle  will  be 
deflected  at  right  angles  to  the  plane  of  the  paper  and  strike 
the  screen  at  a  distance  y  from  the  undeflected  spot  where 
y  =  k'eKe/mv),  k  and  k'  being  constants  depending  solely  on 
the  dimensions  and  form  of  the  apparatus  used.  If  now,  with 
the  undeflected  spot  as  origin,  we  take  axes  of  co-ordinates 
OX,  OY  along  the  fines  of  electric  and  magnetic  deflection, 
when  both  fields  are  applied  simultaneously  the  particle  will 
strike  the  screen  at  the  point  (x,  y)  where  y/x  is  a  measure  of 
its  velocity  and  y^/x  is  a  measure  of  m/e  its  ratio  of  mass  to 
charge. 

Now  e  can  only  exist  as  the  electronic  charge  4-77  x  10"^" 
C.G.S.  or  a  simple  multiple  of  it.  Thus  if  we  have  a  beam  of 
positive  rays  of  constant  mass,  but  moving  with  velocities 
varying  over  a  considerable  range,  y^/x  will  be  constant  and 


28 


ISOTOPES 


Y 


the  locus  of  their  impact  with  the  screen  will  be  a  parabola 
pp'  (Fig.  4).  When  other  rays  having  a  larger  mass  m'  but 
the  same  charge  are  introduced  into  the  beam,  they  will  appear 
as  another  parabola  qq'  having  a  smaller  magnetic  displacement. 
If  any  straight  hne  p,  q,  n  be  drawn  parallel  to  the  magnetic 
axis  OY  cutting  the  two  parabolas  and  the  electric  axis  OX 
in  p,  q,  n  it  will  be  seen  at  once  that  m' /m  =  pn^/qn'^.  That 
is  to  say,  the  masses  of  two  or  more  particles  can  be  compared 
directly  by  merely  measuring  lengths  the  ratio  of  which  is 
entirely  independent  of  the  form  of  the  apparatus  and  the 
experimental  conditions. 

This  is  reaUy  the  fundamental  principle  upon  which  the 
method  is  based.     A  photographic  record  is  obtained  on  which 

we  can  identify  at  least  one 
parabola  as  being  associated 
with  atoms  or  molecules  of 
known  mass ;  all  the  other 
parabolas  can  then  be  measured 
and  compared  with  this  one  and 
their  masses  deduced.  With 
electric  and  magnetic  fields 
roughly  known  there  is  Httle 
difficulty  in  such  an  identifica- 
tion, and  to  make  quite  sure 
the  absolute  value  of  m/e  for 
the  hydrogen  atom  was  deter- 
mined and  found  to  agree  with  the  values  obtained  by 
other  methods.  In  actual  practice,  since  OX  is  an  imagin- 
ary hne  and  has  no  existence  on  the  photograph,  in  order 
that  the  measurements  may  be  made  with  greater  conveni- 
ence and  accuracy  the  magnetic  field  is  reversed  during 
the  second  half  of  the  exposure,  when — in  the  case  we  are 
considering — two  new  parabolas  will  appear  at  rr' ,  ss' ,  due  to 
w  and  m'  respectively  ;  the  masses  can  now  be  compared  by 
the  equation  m' /m  =  pr^/qs"^ :  p,  q,  r,  s  being  any  straight 
line  cutting  the  curves  approximately  parallel  to  the  magnetic 
axis.  The  measurement  of  these  lengths  is  independent  of  zero 
determination,  and  if  the  curves  are  sharp  can  be  carried  out 
with  considerable  accuracy. 


^V' 

**--., 

V 

/\^<J' 

"** 

0 

^ 

s 

y 

^v^ 

r 

^^r' 

X 


Fig.  4. — Positive  Ray  Parabolas. 


PLATE    I. 


C++ 


The  Parabolas  of 
Lithium. 


4.   The   Parabolas    of  Neon. 


POSITIVE  RAYS  29 

Some  of  the  photographic  results  obtained  by  this  method 
of  analysis  are  shown  in  Plate  I.  The  fact  that  the  streaks  are 
definite  sharp  parabolas,  and  not  mere  blurs,  was  the  first 
experimental  proof  that  the  atoms  of  the  same  element  had 
very  approximately  the  same  mass. 

It  has  been  shown  that  the  electrical  displacement  is  in 
inverse  proportion  to  the  energy  of  the  particle.  Since  this 
energy  is  simply  dependent  on  and  proportional  to  the  electrical 
potential  through  which  the  charged  particle  fell  before  it 
reached  the  cathode  and  not  upon  its  mass,  the  distribution 
of  intensity  along  the  parabolas  will  be  somewhat  similar. 
There  will  also  be  a  definite  maximum  energy  corresponding 
to  the  whole  drop  of  potential  across  the  discharge  tube,  with 
a  corresponding  minimum  displacement  on  the  plate  ;  so  that 
all  normal  parabolas  will  end  fairly  sharply  at  points  p,  q, 
etc.,  equidistant  from  the  magnetic  axis  OY.  As  the  ionisation 
is  a  maximum  in  the  negative  glow  the  parabolas  are  brightest 
at  or  near  these  points.  The  extension  of  the  curves  in  the 
other  direction  indicates  the  formation  of  ions  at  points  in  the 
discharge  nearer  the  cathode  which  will  so  have  fallen  through 
a  smaller  potential. 

19.  Secondary  Rays. — As  the  pressure  in  the  camera, 
though  as  low  as  possible,  is  never  entirely  negligible,  the 
particles  may  make  collisions,  and  so  gain  and  lose  electrons, 
while  passing  through  the  deflecting  fields.  This  results  in 
what  Sir  J.  J.  Thomson  calls  "  secondary  rays,"  ^  which  may 
be  of  a  great  many  types.  Some  appear  on  the  plate  as 
general  fog,  others  as  straight  beams  seeming  to  radiate  from 
the  undeflected  spot,  these  will  easily  be  recognised  on  the 
photographs  produced  in  Plate  I.  Secondary  rays  can  pro- 
duce parabolas  which  are  very  much  like  the  genuine  ones 
caused  by  particles  which  have  retained  their  charge  through 
both  fields,  and  which  may  easily  be  mistaken  for  them  unless 
special  precautions  are  taken. 

20.  Negatively  Charged  Rays. — As  there  is  intense 
ionisation  in  the  fine  tube  the  charged  particles  may  easily 
collide  with  and  capture  electrons  in  passing  through  it.     A 

^  J.  J.  Thomson,  Fays  of  Positive  Electricity,  p.  32. 


30  ISOTOPES 

singly  charged  particle  capturing  a  single  electron  will,  of 
course,  proceed  as  a  neutral  ray,  and  being  unafiEected  by  the 
fields  will  strike  the  screen  at  the  central  spot.  If,  however, 
it  makes  a  second  colhsion  and  capture  it  will  become  a  nega- 
tively charged  ray.  Rays  of  this  kind  will  suffer  deflection 
in  both  fields  in  the  opposite  direction  to  the  normal  ones,  and 
will  therefore  give  rise  to  parabolas  of  a  similar  nature  but  situa- 
ated  in  the  opposite  quadrants,  as  indicated  by  the  dotted 
Hnes  in  the  figure.  Such  negative  parabolas  are  always  less 
intense  than  the  corresponding  normal  ones,  and  are  usually 
associated  with  the  atoms  of  electronegative  elements  such  as 
carbon,  oxygen,  chlorine,  etc. 

The  negative  parabolas  of  H,  C  and  0  can  be  seen  in  the 
photographs.     Plate  I  (1)  and  (2). 

21.  Rays  with  Multiple  Charges. — If  diu-ing  ionisation 
more  than  one  electron  is  spht  off,  the  resulting  positive  ray 
will  have  a  double  or  multiple  charge.  Taking  the  case  of  a 
doubly  charged  particle  it  may  give  rise  to  two  distinct  effects. 
In  the  first  place,  if  it  retains  its  double  charge  while  passing 
through  the  analysing  fields  its  behaviour  will  be  quite  indis- 
tinguishable from  that  of  a  normal  ray  of  haff  its  mass.  Thus 
the  effective  mass  of  the  doubly  charged  oxygen  atom,  written^ 
0:^^,  will  be  8.  Parabolas  due  to  C^+  and  0  +  ^  can  be  seen 
in  Plate  I  (2).  In  the  second  place,  the  particle  may  retain 
its  double  charge  through  the  whole  potential  fall  of  the  dis- 
charge but  capture  an  electron  in  the  fine  tube.  It  will  then 
constitute  a  ray  of  normal  ratio  of  mass  to  charge  but  with 
double  the  normal  energy,  so  that  the  normal  end  of  the 
parabolas  will  be  extended  towards  the  axis  OY  to  a  point  half- 
way between  that  axis  and  the  hue  'pq.  Such  extensions  will 
be  seen  on  the  bright  parabolas  due  to  carbon  and  oxygen  in  the 
photographs  reproduced  in  Plate  I. 

Most  elements  are  capable  of  losing  two  electrons,  some, 
such  as  krypton,  three  or  more,  while  mercury  can  lose  no  less 
than  eight  at  a  time.  The  results  of  the  multiple  charge  on 
atoms  of  mercury  is  beautifully  illustrated  in  Plate  I  (3). 
The  parabola  a  corresponding  to  normal  single  charge  wiU 

^  In  the  normal  singly-charged  ray  the  plus  sign  is  omitted  for 
convenience. 


POSITIVE   RAYS 


31 


be  seen  extended  almost  to  the  origin  itself,  while  above  a  series 
of  parabolas  of  diminishing  intensity  ^,  y,  etc.,  indicate  the 
atoms  which  have  retained  two,  three  or  more  charges. 

22.  Dempster's   method   of  positive    ray   analysis.— 

It  is  clear  from  the  considerations  on  page  27  that  if  the  posi- 
tive particles  all  fell  through  the  same  potential  and  so  possessed 
the  same  energy,  a  magnetic  field  alone  would  suffice  to  perform 
their  analysis  with  regard  to  mass.  A  method  of  analysis 
based  on  this  idea  has  been  devised  by  Dempster  at  the  Ryer- 
son  Physical  Laboratory,  Chicago.^ 

The  method  is  essentially  identical  with  that  used  by  Classen 
in  his  determination  of  e/m  for  electrons  ^    The  charged  par- 


H!i!!i|l- 


FiG.  5. — Dempster's  Apparatus. 

tides  from  some  source  fall  through  a  definite  potential  differ- 
ence. A  narrow  bundle  is  separated  out  by  a  sUt  and  is  bent 
into  a  semicircle  by  a  strong  magnetic  field  ;  the  rays  then 
pass  through  a  second  sHt  and  fall  on  a  plate  connected  to  an 
electrometer.  The  potential  difference  P,  magnetic  field  H, 
and  radius  of  curvature  r  determine  the  ratio  of  the  charge  to 

e       2P. 
the  mass  of  the  particle  by  the  formula 


m 


HV2 


1  Dempster,  Phys.  Rev.  11,  3 1 6 ,     1918. 

■Classen,  Jahrb.  d.  Hamburg   Wiss.  AnsL,  Beiheft,  1907. 


32  ISOTOPES 

The  apparatus  consisted  of  a  glass  tube  G,  Fig.  5,  where  the 
positive  particles  fell  through  a  definite  potential  difference, 
and  the  analysing  chamber  A,  in  which  a  strong  magnetic  field 
was  produced  between  two  semicircular  iron  plates  2-8  cm. 
thick  and  13  cm.  in  diameter.  The  iron  plates  were  soldered 
into  half  of  a  heavy  brass  tube  B,  so  as  to  leave  a  passage  or 
slot  4  mm.  wide  between  the  plates.  A  brass  plate  C  closed 
this  slot  except  for  three  openings  into  which  short  brass  tubes 
were  soldered.  The  glass  tube  G  fitted  into  the  first  opening  and 
a  tube  for  exhausting  into  the  second.  The  electrometer 
connection  passed  to  a  receiving  plate  through  an  ebonite  plug 
E  which  formed  a  ground  conical  joint  with  the  third  brass 
tube.  The  two  openings  for  the  rays  had  adjustable  sHts  S  i,  S  2, 
and  a  screen  D  was  introduced  into  the  analysing  chamber  to 
prevent  reflected  rays  getting  into  the  second  sUt.  The  whole 
was  placed  between  the  poles  of  a  powerful  electromagnet. 

The  accelerating  potential  P  was  applied  by  means  of  a  large 
battery  and  was  from  500  to  1750  volts  or  thereabouts.  The 
experimental  procedure  consisted  in  maintaining  a  constant 
magnetic  field  and  plotting  the  ionic  current,  measured  by  the 
electrometer,  against  the  potential.  The  peaks  on  the  curve 
corresponded  to  definite  values  of  m/e,  measured  by  the  poten- 
tial, and  their  heights  to  the  relative  quantities  of  the  particles 
present  in  the  beam. 

The  method  is  limited  in  its  appHcation  by  the  fact  that  the 
ions  must  be  generated  with  a  velocity  neghgible  compared 
with  that  produced  by  the  accelerating  potential.  The  first 
results  were  obtained  from  ions  produced  by  heating  salts  on 
platinum  strips,  or  by  bombarding  them  with  electrons.  It 
was  shown  that  the  ions  given  off  from  heated  aluminium 
phosphate  consisted  for  the  most  part  of  sodium  and  potassium 
atoms,  and  that  these  had  masses  23  and  39  respectively.  The 
resolution  possible  with  the  first  apparatus  was  claimed  to 
be  about  1  in  100.  Dempster's  recent  successful  application 
of  this  method  to  the  analysis  of  magnesium  and  hthium  will 
be  described  in  a  later  chapter.  ^ 

1  V.  p.  80. 


CHAPTER  IV 

NEON 

23.  Positive  Ray  Analysis  of  Neon. — It  is  a  curious  and 
interesting  point  that  while  the  first  suggestion  of  the  possi- 
bility of  the  occurrence  of  isotopes  was  obtained  from  the 
rarest  of  all  substances  on  the  earth's  surface — the  radioactive 
elements  and  their  products  ;  so  the  first  result  indicating 
the  possibility  of  isotopes  among  the  stable  elements  was 
yielded  by  neon,  a  gas  of  which,  in  a  purified  state,  there  was 
probably  less  than  one  gramme  in  existence. 

Neon  is  one  of  the  inactive  constituents  of  the  atmosphere, 
in  which  it  occurs  to  the  extent  of  0-00123  per  cent,  by  volume. 
It  was  first  isolated  by  Ramsay  and  Travers  in  1898,  and  was 
accepted  as  an  elementary  monatomic  element  of  the  helium 
group.  Its  density  was  measured  with  extreme  care  by 
Watson  ^  and  found  to  correspond  with  an  atomic  weight 
20-200  (0  =  16),  so  that  it  is  the  lightest  element  whose  atomic 
weight  differs  from  a  whole  number  in  an  unmistakeable 
manner. 

In  the  summer  of  1912  there  had  been  constructed  in  the 
Cavendish  Laboratory  a  Positive  Ray  apparatus  which  was  a 
considerable  improvement  on  those  made  previously,  ^  The 
parabolas  corresponding  to  masses  differing  by  10  per  cent, 
could  be  clearly  resolved  and  distinguished  by  its  means. 
Many  gases  were  submitted  to  analysis  ;  but  no  results  were 
obtained  which  could  not  be  accounted  for  until  in  November 
of  that  year  a  sample  of  the  lighter  constituents  of  air  was 
introduced.     In  describing  the  results  obtained  one  cannot  do 

»  Watson,  J.C.S.  Trans.  1,  810,     1910. 

*  J.  J.  ThoToson^^Rays  of  Positive  EhctricUy,^.  20, 

33  D 


34  ISOTOPES 

better  than  quote  Sir  J.  J.  Thomson's  own  words  from  his 
address  to  the  Royal  Institution  on  Friday,  January  17, 
1913. 

"  I  now  turn  to  the  photograph  of  the  lighter  constituents  ; 
here  we  find  the  lines  of  heUum,  of  neon  (very  strong),  of 
argon,  and  in  addition  there  is  a  line  corresponding  to  an 
atomic  weight  22,  which  cannot  be  identified  with  the  line 
due  to  any  known  gas.  I  thought  at  first  that  this  line,  since 
its  atomic  weight  is  one-half  that  of  CO2,  must  be  due  to  a 
carbonic  acid  molecule  with  a  double  charge  of  electricity, 
and  on  some  of  the  plates  a  faint  line  at  44  could  be  detected. 
On  passing  the  gas  slowly  through  tubes  immersed  in  liquid 
air  the  line  at  44  completely  disappeared,  while  the  brightness 
of  the  one  at  22  was  not  affected. 

"  The  origin  of  this  line  presents  many  points  of  interest ; 
there  are  no  known  gaseous  compounds  of  any  of  the  recognised 
elements  which  have  this  molecular  weight.  Again,  if  we 
accept  Mendeleef's  Periodic  Law,  there  is  no  room  for  a  new 
element  with  this  atomic  weight.  The  fact  that  this  line  is 
bright  in  the  sample  when  the  neon  line  is  extraordinarily 
bright,  and  invisible  in  the  other  when  the  neon  is  compara- 
tively feeble,  suggests  that  it  may  possibly  be  a  compound  of 
neon  and  hydrogen,  NeHg,  though  no  direct  evidence  of  the 
combination  of  these  inert  gases  has  hitherto  been  found.  I 
have  two  photographs  of  the  discharge  through  heUum  in 
which  there  is  a  strong  line,  6,  which  could  be  explained  by 
the  compound  HeHg,  but,  as  I  have  never  again  been  able  to 
get  these  lines,  I  do  not  wish  to  lay  much  stress  on  this  point. 
There  is,  however,  the  possibility  that  we  may  be  interpreting 
Mendeleef's  law  too  rigidly,  and  that  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
the  atomic  weight  of  neon  there  may  be  a  group  of  two  or 
more  elements  with  similar  properties,  just  as  in  another  part 
of  the  table  we  have  the  group  iron,  nickel,  and  cobalt.  From 
the  relative  intensities  of  the  22  fine  and  the  neon  line  we  may 
conclude  that  the  quantity  of  the  gas  giving  the  22  line  is  only 
a  small  fraction  of  the  quantity  of  neon." 

Other  samples  of  gas  containing  neon  all  gave  similar  results. 
By  good  fortune  some  of  the  purest  neon  in  existence  was  also 
available  ;   this  had  been  employed  by  the  writer  and  Watson 


NEON 


35 


in  some  investigations  on  the  Crookes  Dark  Space  ^  and  was 
actually  a  part  of  that  by  which  the  atomic  weight  had  been 
determined.  This  sample  also  yielded  the  two  separate 
parabolas  with  the  same  relative  intensity  as  the  others.  One 
of  the  photographs  taken  with  neon  is  reproduced  in  Plate  1  (4) . 

The  last  result  proved  that  the  most  careful  purification  had 
not  appreciably  altered  the  intensity  ratio  between  the  lines 
and  might  at  first  sight  appear  a  strong  argument  for  the 
NeH2  explanation,  but  further  study  of  the  parabolas  only 
added  more  weight  to  the  chemical  objections  against  the 
existence  of  such  a  compound.  The  only  other  alternative 
was  a  novel  and  revolutionary  one,  namely  that  neon  could 
exist  in  two  forms  and  that  the  relation  between  these  was 
precisely  that  which  had  been  described  by  Soddy  a  short 
time  before  as  existing  between  the  chemically  inseparable 
radio  elements. 

These  considerations  led  the  author  to  undertake  a  search- 
ing investigation  on  the  constitution  of  the  gas  by  two  distinct 
lines  of  attack,  first  attempts  at  separation,  secondly  examina- 
tion by  positive  rays.^ 

24.  Apparatus  for  the  determination  of  density. — As 

neon  is  chemically  inactive  the  most  satisfactory  proof  of  a 
partial  separation  of  its  constituents  is  a  change  in  density. 


Fig.  6. — Microbalance. 

It  was  therefore  necessary  to  devise  some  means  of  deter- 
mining density  accurately,  quickly  and  with  the  minimum 

1  Aston  and  Watson,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc,  86A,     1912. 
^  The   neon  necessary  for  this  research  was  given  by  M.  Georges 
Claude  of  Paris. 


36  ISOTOPES 

quantity  of  gas.  All  these  desiderata  were  obtained  by  the 
construction  of  a  simple  quartz  micro-balance  shown  in  Fig.  6.^ 
The  principle  upon  which  this  works  is  that  if  a  sealed 
vacuous  quartz  bulb  is  equipoised  against  a  soUd  piece  of 
quartz  on  a  balance  the  system  can  only  be  exactly  balanced, 
at  any  predetermined  position,  when  it  is  immersed  in  a  fluid 
of  an  absolutely  definite  density  ;  if  the  density  is  too  high  the 
bulb  will  be  buoyed  up,  if  too  low  it  will  sink.  We  can  there- 
fore compare  the  densities  of  a  known  and  an  unknown  gas 
by  introducing  them  successively  into  the  balance  case  and 
determining  the  pressures  at  which  the  system  is  exactly 
balanced. 

The  moving  part  of  the  balance  is  made  entirely  of  fused 
quartz  (shown  black).  It  turns  upon  a  single  knife-edge  cut 
on  a  piece  of  quartz  rod  about  0-5  mm.  thick.  To  this  rod,  a 
few  millimetres  above  the  knife-edge,  are  fused  two  others 
about  the  same  thickness  forming  the  arms  of  the  beam.  To 
the  end  of  one  arm  is  fused  a  sealed  vacuous  quartz  bulb 
holding  about  0-3  c.c.  and  to  the  other  a  counterpoise  made  of 
a  piece  of  rod  about  2  mm.  thick.  The  beam  is  supported  by 
its  knife-edge  on  a  horizontal  quartz  plate  and  housed  in  a 
thick  glass  vacuum-tight  case  fitting  as  closely  as  possible  so 
that  its  volume  is  a  minimum.  The  case  is  connected  through 
the  capillary  tube  shown  to  a  gas  pipette  and  a  pump  for  the 
introduction  and  removal  of  gas  and  also  to  a  simple  form  of 
mercury  manometer.  The  beam  was  adjusted  during  its 
construction  so  that  it  balanced  in  air  at  about  85  mm. 
pressure.  In  the  process  of  adjustment  the  end  of  the  counter- 
poise was  drawn  out  into  a  fine  tail  ending  in  a  small  knob ; 
this  was  used  as  the  pointer  of  the  beam.  The  sensitivity  of 
"the  balance  is  about  10"^  mgrm.,  which  enables  the  manometer 
to  be  set  to  one-twentieth  of  a  millimetre  with  ease. 

25.  Method  of  using  the  density  balance. — About  the 
right  volume  of  gas,  generally  known  from  previous  experience, 
is  admitted  to  the  balance  case  and  the  mercury  level  in  the 
manometer  slowly  raised  (increasing  the  pressure  in  the  balance 
case)  until  the  bulb  rises  and  the  knob  at  the  extremity  of  the 

1  Aston,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc,  89A,  440,     1914. 


NEON 


37 


counterpoise  appears  on  the  field  of  a  fixed  reading  microscope. 
The  pressure  is  then  carefully  adjusted  until  the  knob  reaches 
some  definite  arbitrary  zero  point  and  shows  no  tendency  to 
move.  The  pressure  is  then  read  off.  The  gas  is  now  pumped 
off  and  the  same  operation  repeated  with  a  gas  of  known 
density  such  as  pure  oxygen.  The  ratio  of  the  densities  is 
clearly  the  inverse  of  the  pressures  read,  and  as  the  latter  are 
low  the  molecular  weight  is  given  direct  without  any  correc- 
tions being  required. 

Difficulties  connected  with  temperature,  so  serious  in  density 
determinations  on  the  usual  scale,  are  eliminated,  for  so  minute 
is  the  quantity  of  gas  (about  0-0005  grm.)  used  that  when  this 
is  compressed  inside  the  massive  walls  of  the  balance  case 
thermal  equilibrium  is  almost  instantaneous.  The  whole 
operation  of  determining  the  density  of  a  gas  to  0-1  per  cent, 
can  be  completed  in  ten  minutes.  Only  about  half  a  cubic 
centimetre  of  the  gas  is  required  for  the  operation. 

26.  Experiments  on  separation  by  distillation. — The 

first  attempt  at  separation  was  made  by  continual  fractionation 


\/      \/      \/      \/ 


Fia.   7. — Fractionation  Apparatus. 

over  charcoal  cooled  in  liquid  air.  The  apparatus  used  is 
illustrated  in  the  accompanying  figure  ;  the  method  of  working 
was  as  follows  : — 


38  ISOTOPES 

The  gas  was  admitted  in  a,  one  of  the  small  charcoal  bulbs 
a,  b,  c,  d,  all  cooled  in  liquid  air.  After  a  reasonable  time  had 
elapsed  the  first  fraction  was  pumped  off  by  lowering  mercury 
in  gas-holder  A  and  opening  the  connecting  stop-cock  between 
it  and  a.  After  another  interval  the  stopcock  was  turned,  the 
mercury  raised  in  A  and  the  gas  forced  into  bulb  b.  The 
mercury  was  next  lowered  in  both  A  and  B,  the  former  receiving 
the  second  fraction  from  a  while  the  latter  withdrew  the  first 
fraction  of  the  gas  now  in  b.  The  fundamental  assumption  on 
which  this  arrangement  was  made  was  that  at  this  stage,  if 
the  vapour-pressures  of  the  gases  are  nearly  the  same,  the  gas 
in  A  would  have  the  same  composition  as  that  left  in  b,  and 
that  they  therefore  might  be  mixed.  This  was  done  by  raising 
the  mercury,  which  not  only  drove  the  gas  from  A  into  b  but  also 
the  lightest  fraction  from  B  into  c,  where  it  again  fractionated, 
each  process  driving  the  lower  boiling  gas  forward  and  keeping 
the  higher  back. 

The  apparatus  may  contain  any  number  of  units,  the  whole 
system  being  made  cyclical  and  continuous  by  joining  the 
charcoal  bulb  at  one  end  with  the  gas-holder  at  the  other. 
Four  such  units  were  actually  employed,  and  after  four  opera- 
tions the  liquid  air  was  removed  from  a  and  the  residue  it 
contained  was  pumped  off  completely  with  an  AntropofE  pump 
as  the  first  contribution  to  the  heaviest  fraction  ;  in  the  same 
way  that  in  D  was  also  pumped  off  as  that  of  the  lightest.  The 
bulb  a  was  then  immersed  again  in  liquid  air  and  the  process 
continued. 

After  about  two-thirds  of  the  gas  had  been  collected  in  this 
way  as  light  and  heavy  fractions,  that  remaining  was  all 
pumped  out  as  the  middle  fraction.  The  process  was  next 
repeated  with  the  light  and  heavy  fractions  in  turn,  the  inter- 
mediate ones  being  combined  by  a  definite  rule. 

By  this  arrangement,  which  does  many  operations  at  once, 
the  small  quantity  of  helium  contained  in  the  original  gas  was 
removed  in  a  remarkably  short  time,  after  which  the  neon  was 
subjected  to  continual  fractionation  for  three  weeks.  The 
gas  had  now  been  through  about  3000  fractionations  and  was 
divided  into  seven  main  fractions  ;  the  densities  of  these  were 
determined  in  order  by  the  quartz  micro-balance  starting  with 


NEON  39 

the  lightest,  the  figures  for  the  pressures  giving  the  same  zero 
as  oxygen  at  76-35  were  as  follows : — 

(1)  (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  (6)  (7) 

121-05       120-95      121-05      120-90      121-00      121-05      12105 

The  mean  of  these,  121-00,  gives  a  molecular  weight  of  20-19, 
which  is  identical  within  experimental  error  with  the  accepted 
one  of  20-200  determined  by  Watson.  It  was  evident  that  no 
appreciable  separation  had  been  achieved. 

A  positive  ray  photograph  was  taken  of  the  two  extreme 
fractions  and  this  showed  no  appreciable  change  in  the  relative 
intensity  of  the  two  parabolas.  It  was  however  a  very  good 
one  for  the  purpose  of  measurement  and  a  careful  comparison 
of  their  displacements  Mdth  those  of  the  known  Unes  due  to 
CO  and  CO2  showed,  with  a  probabihty  almost  amounting  to 
certainty,  that  the  atomic  weight  of  the  lighter  was  not  as 
great  as  20-20. 

Encouraged  by  this  evidence  it  was  decided  to  make  a 
further  attempt  at  separation  by  the  method  of  fractional 
diffusion. 

27.  Experiments  on  separation  by  diffusion. — The  first 
apparatus  used  was  much  the  same  as  that  described  by 
Ramsay  and  CoUie  in  their  work  on  the  diffusion  of  argon  and 
helium.^  The  diffusion  was  carried  out  at  a  low  pressure  and 
the  plug  was  made  of  two  short  lengths  of  clay  pipe  in  series. 

The  method  of  fractionation  was  that  described  by  Travers.* 
About  100  c.c.  of  neon  was  divided  first  into  seven  and  later 
into  eight  fractions.  The  complete  series  of  fractionations 
was  repeated  fifteen  times,  after  which  the  two  extreme 
fractions  were  roughly  purified  over  charcoal  and  their  densities 
measured.  These  indicated  a  difference  of  about  a  half  per 
cent.,  a  very  hopeful  result — moreover  the  fighter  fraction 
showed  no  appreciable  quantity  of  heUum  even  when  analysed 
by  the  method  of  positive  rays  which  is  much  more  delicate 
than  the  spectroscope  for  this  purpose. 

The  extremely  laborious  process  was  again  taken  in  hand 

1  Ramsay  and  Collie,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  60A,  206,     1896. 
*  Travers,  A  Stvdy  of  Gases,  p.  289. 


40  ISOTOPES 

and  the  fractionation  repeated  another  twenty-one  times,  at 
the  end  of  which  the  whole  of  the  Hghtest  fraction  was  lost  by 
a  most  unfortunate  accident.  This  was  the  more  serious  as 
the  two  extreme  fractions  had  been  systematically  enlarged 
with  a  view  to  fractionating  each  separately. 

Despite  this  setback  the  fractionation  of  the  heaviest  20  c.c. 
was  proceeded  with.  This  was  divided  into  five  fractions  and 
fractionated  ten  times.  The  next  lightest  fraction  to  the  one 
lost  was  taken,  divided  into  five  parts  and  fractionated  twelve 
times.  These  very  tedious  operations  were  now  brought  to  a 
close  and  the  two  extreme  fractions  of  2  to  3  c.c.  each  were 
purified  over  charcoal  with  the  greatest  possible  care. 

The  final  densities  which  further  purification  failed  to  alter 
were  20-15  and  20-28  (Oxygen  =32).  This  change  in  density 
is  small  but  it  is  much  too  marked  to  be  ascribed  to  con- 
tamination or  to  experimental  error.  Looked  at  in  the  fight 
of  modern  knowledge  there  can  be  no  reasonable  doubt  that 
partial  separation  had  been  actually  achieved.  The  extent  of 
the  separation  is  about  that  to  be  expected  from  the  theoretical 
considerations  of  separation  by  diffusion  given  on  page  127. 
A  spectroscopic  examination  of  these  two  fractions  showed  no 
appreciable  difference  between  them. 

These  results  were  announced  at  the  meeting  of  the  British 
Association  at  Birmingham  in  1913  and  at  the  same  time  the 
evidence  afforded  by  the  positive  ray  photographs  discussed. 
This  is  available  from  three  distinct  considerations :  the 
character  of  the  fines,  their  position  and  their  intensity. 
A  careful  examination  of  the  plates  showed,  when  proper 
aUowance  had  been  made  for  difference  of  intensity,  that  the 
two  parabolas  had  characteristics  identical  with  one  another. 
Both  were  prolonged  towards  the  vertical  axis  showing  that 
the  particles  causing  them  were  equaUy  capable  of  carrying 
more  than  one  charge.^  Now  up  to  that  time  no  cases  of 
multiple  charges  had  been  found  to  occur  on  molecules,  but 
only  on  atoms.  One  was  therefore  led  to  infer  that  both 
lines  were  due  to  elements. 

Measurements  of  the  position  of  the  parabolas  relative  to 
those  of  CO  and  other  known  bodies  in  the  discharge  tube  gave 

1  V.  p.  30. 


NEON  41 

consistent  results,  indicating  that  the  lighter  of  the  two  corre- 
sponded with  an  atomic  weight  less  than  20-2,  but  the  accuracy- 
was  not  sufficient  to  make  this  certain.  The  relative  intensity 
of  the  parabolas  was  estimated  by  three  independent  observers 
as  about  10  to  1.  Its  apparent  invariability  was  valuable 
corroborative  evidence  against  the  possibility  of  the  22  Hne 
being  due  to  the  presence  of  other  gases  in  the  discharge  tube. 

28.  Second   attempt  at   separation   by   diffusion. — In 

order  to  carry  out  further  diffusion  experiments  an  elaborate 
automatic  diffusion  apparatus  was  devised  so  as  to  avoid  the 
excessive  labour  of  working  by  hand.  This  worked  on  the 
see-saw  principle  and  dealt  with  300  c.c.  of  neon  at  a  time. 
It  was  started  in  1914,  but  as  it  had  little  success  in  its  object 
there  is  no  need  to  describe  it  in  detail.  It  will  be  enough  to 
say  that  although  it  performed  the  mechanical  operations  of 
diffusion  many  thousands  of  times  in  a  satisfactory  manner  the 
separation  achieved  was  exceedingly  poor — -actually  only 
about  half  that  attained  previously.  This  disappointing  result 
was  undoubtedly  due  to  the  mistake  made  in  designing  it  to 
carry  out  the  diffusion  at  atmospheric  pressure,  for  under  these 
conditions  the   "  mixing  "  is  very  bad.^ 

When  the  work  was  interrupted  by  the  war  it  could  be  said 
that  although  the  presence  of  two  isotopes  in  neon  was  indicated 
by  several  hues  of  reasoning,  none  of  these  could  be  said  to 
carry  absolute  conviction. 

29.  The  analysis  of  neon  by  the  Mass-spectrograph. — 

By  the  time  the  work  was  resumed  in  1919  the  existence  of 
isotopes  among  the  products  of  radioactivity  had  been  put 
beyond  aU  reasonable  doubt  by  the  work  on  the  atomic  weight 
of  lead  2  and  was  accepted  generally.  This  fact  automatically 
increased  both  the  value  of  the  evidence  of  the  complex  nature 
of  neon  and  the  urgency  of  its  definite  confirmation.  It  was 
realised  that  separation  could  only  be  very  partial  at  the  best 
and  that  the  most  satisfactory  proof  would  be  afforded  by 
measurements  of  atomic  weight  by  the  method  of  positive 
rays.     These  would  have  to  be  so  accurate  as  to  prove  beyond 

1  F.  p.  127. 
«  F.  p.  16. 


42  ISOTOPES 

dispute  that  the  accepted  atomic  weight  lay  between  the  real 
atomic  weights  of  the  constituents,  but  corresponded  with 
neither  of  them. 

A  new  method  of  positive  ray  analysis  was  therefore  worked 
out  which  will  be  described  in  the  next  chapter.  This  proved 
amply  accurate  enough  for  the  purpose  and  the  results  obtained 
from  neon,  which  are  given  in  detail  on  page  64,  show  beyond 
any  doubt  that  this  gas  is  a  mixture  of  two  isotopes  of  atomic 
weights  20-00  and  22-00  respectively. 


CHAPTER  V 
THE   MASS-SPECTROGRAPH 

30.  Limitations  of  the  parabola  method. — ^The  parabola 
method  of  analysis  of  positive  rays  described  in  Chapter  III, 
though  almost  ideal  for  a  general  survey  of  masses  and  velocities, 
has  objections  as  a  method  of  precision,  many  rays  are  lost  by 
colUsion  in  the  narrow  canal-ray  tube  ;  the  mean  pressure  in 
which  must  be  at  least  half  that  in  the  discharge-bulb  ;  very 
fine  tubes  silt  up  by  disintegration  under  bombardment ;  the 
total  energy  available  for  photography  falls  off  as  the  fourth 
power  of  the  diameter  of  the  canal-ray  tube. 

The  first  two  objections  can  be  overcome,  as  will  be  described 
below,  by  replacing  the  brass  or  copper  tube  by  fine  apertures 
made  in  aluminium,  a  metal  which  appears  to  suffer  Httle 
disintegration,  and  by  exhausting  the  space  between  these 
apertures  to  the  highest  degree  by  means  of  a  subsidiary 
charcoal  tube  or  pump.  The  faUing  off  in  intensity  of  the 
parabolas  as  one  attempts  to  make  them  finer  is  a  very  serious 
difficulty,  as  the  accuracy  and  resolving  power  depend  on  the 
ratio  of  the  thickness  to  the  total  magnetic  deflexion  ;  and 
if  we  increase  the  latter  the  electric  deflexion  must  be  increased 
to  correspond  and  the  parabolas  are  drawn  out,  resulting  again 
in  loss  of  mtensity. 

Also  the  nature  of  the  patch  thrown  on  the  plate  by  the  use 
of  a  long  circular  tube  will  clearly  be  the  same  as  that  caused 
by  the  fight  from  an  evenly  illuminated  disc  passing  through  a 
circular  aperture  of  the  same  diameter,  that  is  to  say  it  will 
have  a  penumbra.  Similarly  the  parabolic  streak  produced 
by  an  infinite  series  of  such  patches  will  not  be  particularly 
suitable  for  accurate  measurements  as  it  has  no  definite  edges. 

43 


44  ISOTOPES 

31.  Methods  of  increasing  the  intensity  of  the  spot. — 

The  concentration  of  the  stream  of  positive  rays  down  the  axis  of 
the  discharge-bulb  is  very  marked,  but  there  is  good  evidence 
for  assuming  that  the  intense  part  of  the  stream  occupies 
a  considerable  soUd  angle.  This  suggests  the  possibihty 
of  an  increase  of  intensity  by  means  of  a  device  which 
should  select  the  rays  aimed  at  a  particular  spot  on  the  plate, 
whatever  direction  they  come  from.  For  example,  a  thin  gap 
between  two  coaxial  equiangular  cones  would  allow  the  rays 
to  be  concentrated  at  the  vertex.  The  dimensions  of  the 
patch  formed  would  be  roughly  those  of  one  given  by  a  cylin- 
drical canal-ray  tube  of  diameter  equal  to  the  width  of  the  gap. 
The  increase  of  intensity  would  therefore  be  considerable  ; 
but  the  method  is  not  easy  to  put  into  practice,  and,  in  the 
case  of  deflexions  through  large  angles,  would  necessitate  a 
curved  photographic  surface. 

Clearly  the  simplest  way  of  increasing  the  intensity  of  the 
spot  without  increasing  its  dimensions,  at  any  rate  in  one 
direction,  is  to  use  two  parallel  straight  slits.  In  the  case  of 
the  parabola  method  this  device  would  only  be  of  use  in  a 
special  case  such  as  the  resolution  of  a  close  double,  as  the 
parabolas  will  only  be  sharp  at  points  where  they  are  parallel 
to  the  slit. 

Such  a  slit  system  eliminates  the  difficulty  of  the  penumbra 
mentioned  above,  at  any  rate  so  far  as  measurements  at  right 
angles  to  the  line  image  are  concerned. 

32.  Possibilities  of  "focussing." — Beams  of  charged 
particles  which  are  homogeneous  electrically  (constant  mv'^/e) 
or  magnetically  (constant  mv/e)  can  be  focussed  Uke  rays  of 
light  by  special  devices.^  The  method  of  Dempster,  described 
in  the  previous  Chapter,  makes  use  of  a  form  of  magnetic 
focussing.  But  the  rays  generated  by  the  ordinary  discharge 
bulb  are  heterogeneous  both  in  mv^  and  mv  so  that  what  is 
required  is  an  arrangement  which  will  focus  aU  rays  of  constant 
mass,  even  though  their  velocity  may  vary  over  an  appreciable 
range. 

33.  Principle  of  the  Mass-spectrograph. — This  purpose 

1  Aston,  Phil.  Mag.,  38,  709,      1919. 


THE  MASS-SPECTROGRAPH 


45 


is  achieved  by  the  arrangement  illustrated  diagrammatically 
in  Fig.  8.  The  exact  mathematical  analysis  has  now  been 
worked  out  by  R.  H.  Fowler,'-  but  it  is  proposed  to  give  only 
the  approximate  theory  here  for  the  sake  of  simpUcity. 

The  rays  after  arriving  at  the  cathode  face  pass  through 
two  very  narrow  parallel  sUts  of  special  construction  Si  S3, 
and  the  resulting  thin  ribbon  is  spread  out  into  an  electric 
spectrum  by  means  of  the  parallel  plates  Pi,  P2.  After 
emerging  from  the  electric  field  the  rays  may  be  taken,  to  a 
first   order   of   approximation,    as   radiating  from   a   virtual 


Si 


Fig.  8. — Diagram  of  Mass-Spectograph. 

source  Z  half  way  through  the  field  on  the  line  Si  S2.  A  group 
of  these  rays  is  now  selected  by  means  of  the  diaphragm  D, 
and  allowed  to  pass  between  the  parallel  poles  of  a  magnet. 
For  simplicity  the  poles  are  taken  as  circular,  the  field  between 
them  uniform  and  of  such  sign  as  to  bend  the  rays  in  the 
opposite  direction  to  the  foregoing  electric  field. 

If  d  and  (p  be  the  angles  (taken  algebraically)  through  which 
the  selected  beam  of  rays  is  bent  by  passing  through  fields 
of  strength  X  and  H,  then 

Bv^  =  ZX—  (1),     and    wv  =  LH—  (2), 
m  m 

1  Aston  and  Fowler,  PM.  Mag.,  1922. 


46  ISOTOPES 

where  I,  L  are  the  lengths  of  the  paths  of  the  rays  in  the  fields. 
Equation  (1)  is  only  true  for  small  angles,  but  exact  enough 
for  practice.  It  follows  that  over  the  small  range  of  d  selected 
by  the  diaphragm  Bv  and  q)V  are  constant  for  all  rays  of  given 
e/m,  therefore 

-^  +  =  0,     and     -^  +  —  =0, 

U  V  cp  V 

so  that  66  _  26(p 

T  ~  'y 

when  the  velocity  varies  in  a  group  of  rays  of  given  e/m. 

In  order  to  illustrate  in  the  simplest  possible  way  how  this 
relation  may  be  used  to  obtain  focussing,  let  us  suppose  the 
angles  (exaggerated  in  the  diagram)  small  and  the  magnetic 
field  acting  as  if  concentrated  at  the  centre  0  of  the  pole- 
pieces.  If  the  breadth  ZO  =  b,  the  group  selected  will  be 
spread  out  to  a  breadth  b6d  at  0,  and  at  a  further  distance  r 
the  breadth  will  be 

b6d  +  r[6d  +  6(p)  or  6e\b  +  r{l  +  ~)1  .       .       (3) 

Now  as  the  electric  and  magnetic  deflexions  are  in  opposite 
directions,  0  is  a  negative  angle.  Say  B  =  —  B' .  Then  if 
97>20',  the  quantity  (3)  will  vanish  at  a  value  of  r  given  by 

r{(p  —  26')  =  b  .  26', 

This  equation  appears  correct  within  practical  limits  for  large 
circular  pole-pieces. 

Referred  to  axes  OX,  OY  the  focus  is  at  r  cos  ( (p—  26'), 
r  sin  (9?  —  26'),  or  r,  b.26'  ;  so  that  to  a  first-order  approxima- 
tion, whatever  the  fields,  so  long  as  the  position  of  the  diaphragm 
is  fixed,  the  foci  will  all  lie  on  the  straight  line  ZF  drawn 
through  Z  parallel  to  OX.  For  purposes  of  construction  G 
the  image  of  Z  in  OY  is  a  convenient  reference  point,  (p  being 
here  equal  to  40'.  It  is  clear  that  a  photographic  plate,  indi- 
cated by  the  thick  fine,  will  be  in  fair  focus  for  values  of  e/m 
over  a  range  large  enough  for  accurate  comparison  of  masses. 

34.  Optical  analogue. — It  may  be  a  help  to  form  an 
understanding  of  the  principle  of  the  apparatus  if  we  suppose 
that  the  beam  is  one  of  white  light  and  the  electric  and  magnetic 


PLATE    II. 


=-  r 


Photograph    of   tlie    Original    Mass-Spectrograph    set    up   in    the    Cavendish 
Laboratory  in   1919. 

B,  Dischargp  Tube.  A.  Anode  connected  to  high  potential  terminal  of  induction  coil  below 
table.  C.  Reservoir  containing  gas  to  be  analysed.  I,,  lo.  Charcoal-liquid  air  tubes  exhausting 
slit-system  and  camera.  .S'.  Soft  iron  plates  to  shield  discharge  from  stray  magnetic  field.  L. 
Leads  from  high  tension  battery  to  electric  plates.  .1/.  ])u  liois  electromagnet.  T,  Pea  lamp 
for  i)hotographing  fiducial  spot.  V,  Vacuum-tight  and  light-tight  control  for  moving  photo- 
graphic jilate.  W.  Camera  showing  light-tight  cap  on  the  left.  H,  Magnet  circuit  ammeter. 
O,  Magnet  ( inuit  control  resistances.  {;.  Gaede  rotating  mercury  pump  connected  to  the  camera 
and  the  discharge  tube  by  glass  tubes  and  stopcocks. 


THE  MASS-SPECTROGRAPH 


47 


fields  are  glass  prisms  deflecting  the  light  in  opposite  directions. 
The  slit  system  acts  as  a  collimator.  If  the  glass  of  the  first 
prism  has  a  coefficient  of  dispersion  double  that  of  the  second 
the  heterogeneity  of  the  rays  of  light  will  cause  a  spreading 
of  the  beam  identical  with  that  caused  by  heterogeneity  (in 
respect  to  velocity)  in  the  case  of  the  positive  rays.  It  will  be 
clear  that  if  we  make  the  angle  of  refraction  of  the  second  prism 
more  than  double  that  of  the  first  an  achromatic  image  will 
appear  at  F. 

Since  it  is  a  close  analogue  of  the  ordinary  spectrograph  and 
gives  a  "  spectrum  "  depending  upon  mass  alone  the  instrument 
is  called  a  "  mass-spectrograph  "  and  the  spectrum  it  produces 
a  "  mass-spectrum."  It  possesses  one  notable  advantage 
over  the  optical  spectrograph  for,  although  we  can  never 
change  the  ratio  of  the  dispersions,  we  can  make  the  refractions 
whatever  we  will  by  the  control  of  X  and  H,  and  so  bring  any 
desired  range  of  the  spectrum  on  to  the  plate. 

35.  The  Discharge  Tube. — Fig.  9  is  a  rough  diagram  of  the 
arrangement  of  the  mass-spectrograph  when  used  for  analysing 
positive  rays  generated  by  the  ordinary  discharge  tube  method. 
The  discharge-tube  B  is  an  ordinary  X-ray  bulb  20  cm.  in 
T 


Fig.  9. — Mass-Spectrograph. 

diameter.  The  anode  A  is  of  aluminium  wire  3  mm.  thick 
surrounded  concentrically  by  an  insulated  aluminium  tube  7 
mm.  wide  to  protect  the  glass  walls,  as  in  the  Lodge  valve. 

The  aluminium  cathode  C,  2-5  cm.  wide,  is  concave,  about 
8  cm.  radius  of  curvature,  and  is  placed  just  in  the  neck  of  the 
bulb — this  shape  and  position  having  been  adopted  after  a 
short  preliminary  research.^     In  order  to  protect  the  opposite 

1  Aston,  Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc,  19,  317.     1919. 


48 


ISOTOPES 


end  of  the  bulb,  which  would  be  immediately  melted  by  the 
very  concentrated  beam  of  cathode  rays,  a  silica  bulb  D  about 
12  mm.  diameter  is  mounted  as  indicated.  The  use  of  silica 
as  an  anticathode  has  the  great  advantage  of  cutting  down 
the  production  of  undesirable  X-rays  to  a  minimum.  The 
cathode  is  earthed. 

The  discharge  is  maintained  by  means  of  a  large  induction- 
coil  actuated  by  a  mercury  coal-gas  break  ;  about  100  to  150 
watts  are  passed  through  the  primary,  and  the  bulb  is  arranged 
to  take  from  0-5  to  1  milUampere  at  potentials  ranging  from 
20,000  to  50,000  volts.  Owing  to  the  particular  shape  and 
position  of  the  electrodes,  especially  those  of  the  anode,  the 
bulb  acts  perfectly  as  its  own  rectifier. 

The  method  of  mounting  the  cathode  will  be  readily  seen 
from  Fig.   10,  which  shows  part  of  the  apparatus  in  greater 


Fig    10. — Mounting  of  Cathode  of  Mass-Spectrograph. 


detail.  The  neck  of  the  bulb  is  ground  off  short  and  cemented 
with  wax  to  the  flat  brass  collar  E,  which  forms  the  mouth  of 
an  annular  space  between  a  wide  outer  tube  F  and  the  inner 
tube  carrying  the  cathode.  The  concentric  position  of  the 
neck  is  assured  by  three  small  ears  of  brass  not  shown.  The 
wax  joint  is  kept  cool  by  circulating  water  through  the  copper 
pipe  shown  in  section  at  G. 

The  gas  to  be  analysed  is  admitted  from  the  fine  leak  into 
the  annular  space  and  so  to  the  discharge  by  means  of  the 
side-tube  attached  to  F  shown  in  dotted  section  at  Q.  Ex- 
haustion is  performed  by  a  Gaede  mercury-pump  through  a 
similar  tube  on  the  opposite  side.  The  reason  for  this  arrange- 
ment is  that  the  space  behind  the  cathode  is  the  only  part  of 
the  discharge  bulb  in  which  the  gas  is  not  raised  to  an  extremely 
high  potential.     If  the  inlet  or  outlet  is  anywhere  in  front  of 


THE  MASS-SPECTROGRAPH  49 

the  cathode,  faUing  special  guards,  the  discharge  is  certain 
to  strike  to  the  pump  or  the  gas  reservoir.  Such  special  guards 
have  been  made  in  the  past  by  means  of  dummy  cathodes  in 
the  bore  of  the  tubes,  but,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  the 
gas  can  only  reach  the  bulb  by  diffusion,  the  present  arrange- 
ment is  far  more  satisfactory  and  has  the  additional  advantage 
of  enabling  the  bulb  to  be  dismounted  by  breaking  one  joint 
only. 

36.  The  Slit  System. — The  very  fine  slits  used  in  this  appar- 
atus were  made  with  comparative  ease  as  follows : — A  cylinder  of 
pure  aluminium  about  10  mm.  long  by  5  mm.  wide  is  carefully 
bored  with  a  hole  1  mm.  diameter.  The  resulting  thick-walled 
tube  is  then  cleaned  and  crushed  with  a  hammer  on  an  anvil  until 
the  circular  hole  becomes  a  slit  about  -3  mm.  wide.  Continuation 
of  this  treatment  would  result  in  a  slit  as  fine  as  required  giving 
the  maximum  resistance  to  the  passage  of  gas,  but  its  great 
depth  would  make  the  lining  up  of  a  pair  a  matter  of  extreme 
difficulty.  The  crushed  tube  is  therefore  now  placed  between 
two  V-shaped  pieces  of  steel  and  further  crushed  between 
the  points  of  the  V's  at  about  its  middle  point  until  the  required 
fineness  is  attained.  Practice  shows  that  the  best  way  of 
doing  this  is  to  crush  until  the  walls  just  touch,  and  then  to 
open  the  sHt  to  the  required  width  by  judicious  tapping  at 
right  angles  to  that  previously  employed.  With  a  little  care 
it  is  possible  to  make  sHts  with  beautifully  parallel  sides  to 
almost  any  degree  of  fineness,  -01  mm.  being  easily  attainable. 
At  this  stage  the  irregularly  shaped  piece  of  aluminium  is  not 
suited  to  accurate  gas-tight  fitting  ;  it  is  therefore  filled 
with  hard  paraffin  to  protect  it  from  small  particles  of  metal, 
etc.,  which  if  entering  cannot  be  dislodged  owing  to  its 
shape,  and  turned  up  taper  to  fit  the  standard  mountings. 
After  turning,  the  paraffin  is  easily  removed  by  heat  and 
solvents.  The  centre  of  the  cathode  is  pierced  with  a  3  mm. 
hole,  the  back  of  which  is  coned  out  to  fit  one  of  the  stan- 
dard slits  Si.  The  back  of  the  cathode  is  turned  a  gas- 
tight  fit  in  the  brass  tube  2  cm.  diameter  carrying  it,  the 
other  end  of  which  bears  the  brass  plug  H  which  is  also  coned 
and  fitted  with  the  second  slit  Sa-     The  two  sHts,  which  are 

E 


60  ISOTOPES 

roughly  -05  mm.  wide  by  2  mm.  long,  can  be  accurately 
adjusted  parallel  by  means  of  their  diffraction  patterns.  The 
space  between  the  sUts,  which  are  about  10  cm.  apart,  is  kept 
exhausted  to  the  highest  degree  by  the  charcoal  tube  Ii. 
By  this  arrangement  it  will  be  seen  that  not  only  is  loss  of 
rays  by  collision  and  neutraUsation  reduced  to  a  minimum 
but  any  serious  leak  of  gas  from  the  bulb  to  the  camera  is 
eliminated  altogether. 

37.  The  Electric  Field. — The  spreading  of  the  hetero- 
geneous ribbon  of  rays  formed  by  the  slits  into  an  electric 
spectrum  takes  place  between  two  parallel  flat  brass  surfaces, 
Ji,  Ja,  5  cm.  long,  held  2-8  mm.  apart  by  glass  distance-pieces, 
the  whole  system  being  wedged  immovably  in  the  brass  con- 
taining-tube  in  the  position  shown.  The  lower  surface  is 
cut  from  a  solid  cyUnder  fitting  the  tube  and  connected  to  it 
and  earth.  The  upper  surface  is  a  thick  brass  plate,  which 
can  be  raised  to  the  desired  potential,  200-500  volts,  by  means 
of  a  set  of  small  storage-cells.  In  order  to  have  the  plates 
as  near  together  as  possible,  they  are  sloped  at  1  in  20 — i.e. 
half  the  angle  of  slope  of  the  mean  ray  of  the  part  of  the 
spectrum  which  is  to  be  selected  by  the  diaphragms.  Of  these 
there  are  two  :  one,  Kj,  an  oblong  aperture  in  a  clean  brass 
plate,  is  fixed  just  in  front  of  the  second  movable  one,  Ka, 
which  is  mounted  in  the  bore  of  a  carefully  ground  stopcock  L. 
The  function  of  the  first  diaphragm  is  to  prevent  any  possibility 
of  charged  rays  striking  the  greasy  surface  of  the  plug  of  the 
stopcock  when  the  latter  is  in  any  working  position.  The 
variable  diaphragm  is  in  effect  two  square  apertures  shding 
past  each  other  as  the  plug  of  the  stopcock  is  turned,  the  fact 
that  they  are  not  in  the  same  plane  being  irrelevant.  When 
the  stopcock  is  fully  open  as  sketched  in  Fig.  10  the  angle  of 
rays  passing  is  a  maximum,  and  it  may  be  stopped  down  to 
any  desired  extent  by  rotation  of  the  plug,  becoming  zero  before 
any  greasy  surface  is  exposed  to  the  rays.  Incidentally  the 
stopcock  serves  another  and  very  convenient  use,  which  is  to 
cut  off  the  camera  from  the  discharge  tube,  so  that  the  latter 
need  not  be  filled  with  air  each  time  the  former  is  opened  to 
change  the  plate. 


THE  MASS-SPECTROGRAPH 


61 


38.  The  Magnetic  Field. — After  leaving  the  diaphragms 
the  rays  pass  between  the  pole-pieces  M  of  a  large  Du  Bois 
magnet  of  2500  turns.  The  faces  of  these  are  circular,  8  cm. 
diameter,  and  held  3  mm.  apart  by  brass  distance-pieces. 
The  cylindrical  pole-pieces  themselves  are  soldered  into  a  brass 
tube  0,  which  forms  part  of  the  camera  N.  When  the  latter  is 
built  into  position,  the  pole-pieces  are  drawn  by  screwed 
bolts  into  the  arms  of  the  magnet,  and  so  form  a  structure 
of  great  weight  and  rigidity  and  provide  an  admirable  founda- 
tion for  the  whole  apparatus.  Current  for  the  magnet  is 
provided  by  a  special  set  of  large  accumulators.  With  a 
potential  of  300  volts  on  the  electric  plates  the  hydrogen  lines 
are  brought  on  to  the  scale  at  about  0-2  ampere,  and  an  increase 
to  5  amperes,  which  gives  practical  saturation,  only  just  brings 
the  singly-charged  mercury  lines  into  view.  The  discharge 
is  protected  from  the  stray  field  of  the  magnet  by  the  usual 
soft  iron  plates,  not  shown. 


39.  The  Camera. — The  main  body  of  the  camera  N  is 
made  of  stout  brass  tube  6-4  cm.  diameter,  shaped  to  fit  on  to 
the  transverse  tube  0  containing 
the  pole-pieces.  The  construc- 
tion of  the  plate-holder  is  indi- 
cated by  the  side  view  in  Fig.  9 
and  an  end-on  view  in  Fig.  11. 
The  rays  after  being  magnetically 
deflected  pass  between  two  verti- 
cal earthed  brass  plates  Z,  Z 
about  3  mm.  apart,  and  finally 
reach  the  photographic  plate 
through  a  narrow  slot  2  mm. 
wide,  11-8  cm.  long,  cut  in  the 
horizontal  metal  plate  X,  X. 
The    three   brass  plates   forming 

a  T-shaped  girder  are  adjusted  and  locked  in  position  by  a 
set  of  three  leveUing-screws,  at  each  end  ;  the  right-hand 
upper  one  is  omitted  in  Fig.  11.  The  plates  Z,  Z  serve  to 
protect  the  rays  completely  from  any  stray  electric  field, 
even  that  caused  by  the  photographic  plate  itself  becoming 


Fig.   11.— The  Plateholder  of 
the  Camera. 


62  ISOTOPES 

charged  until  within  a  few  millimetres  of  their  point  of 
impact. 

The  photographic  plate  W,  which  is  a  2  cm.  strip  cut  length- 
wise from  a  5  X  4  plate,  is  supported  at  its  ends  on  two  narrow 
transverse  rails  which  raise  it  just  clear  of  the  plate  X,  X. 
Normally  it  lies  to  the  right  of  the  slot  as  indicated,  and  to  make 
an  exposure  it  is  moved  parallel  to  itself  over  the  slot  by  means 
of  a  sort  of  double  lazy-tongs  carrying  wire  claws  which  bracket 
the  ends  of  the  plate  as  shown.  This  mechanism,  which  is  not 
shown  in  detail  is  operated  by  means  of  a  torque  rod  V  working 
through  a  ground  glass  joint.     Y  is  a  small  willemite  screen. 

The  adjustment  of  the  plate-holder  so  that  the  sensitised 
surface  should  be  at  the  best  focal  plane  was  done  by  taking 
a  series  of  exposures  of  the  bright  hydrogen  lines  with  different 
magnetic  fields  on  a  large  plate  placed  in  the  empty  camera 
at  a  small  inclination  to  the  vertical.  On  developing  this, 
the  actual  track  of  the  rays  could  be  seen  and  the  locus  of  points 
of  maximum  concentration  determined.  The  final  adjustment 
was  made  by  trial  and  error  and  was  exceedingly  tedious,  as 
air  had  to  be  admitted  and  a  new  plate  inserted  after  each 
tentative  small  alteration  of  the  leveUing-screws. 

40.  Experimental  procedure. — The  plate  having  been 
dried  in  a  high  vacuum  overnight,  the  whole  apparatus  is 
exhausted  as  completely  as  possible  by  the  pump  with  the 
stopcock  L  open.  Ii  and  I2  are  then  cut  off  from  the  pump  by 
stopcocks  and  immersed  in  hquid  air  for  an  hour  or  so.  The 
electric  field,  which  may  range  from  200  to  500  volts,  is  then 
applied  and  a  small  current  passed  through  the  magnet  sufficient 
to  bring  the  bright  hydrogen  molecule  spot  on  to  the  willemite 
screen  Y,  where  it  can  be  inspected  through  the  plate-glass 
back  of  the  cap  P,  In  the  meantime  the  leak,  pump,  and  coil, 
have  all  been  started  to  get  the  bulb  into  the  desired  state. 

When  this  has  become  steady,  Jj  is  earthed  to  prevent  any 
rays  reaching  the  camera  when  the  plate  is  moved  over  the  slot 
to  its  first  position,  which  is  judged  by  inspection  through  P 
with  a  non-actinic  lamp.  The  magnet  current  having  been  set 
to  the  particular  value  desired  and  the  diaphragm  adjusted, 
the  coil  is  momentarily  interrupted  while  Jj  is  raised  to  the 


THE  MASS-SPECTROGRAPH  53 

desired  potential,  after  which  the  exposure  starts.  During  this, 
preferably  both  at  the  beginning  and  the  end,  light  from  a  lamp 
T  is  admitted  for  a  few  seconds  down  the  tube  R  (Fig.  9)  the 
ends  of  which  are  pierced  with  two  tiny  circular  holes.  The 
lower  hole  is  very  close  to  the  plate,  so  that  a  circular  dot  or 
fiducial  spot  is  formed  from  which  the  measurements  of  the 
lines  may  be  made. 

The  exposures  may  range  from  20  seconds  in  the  case  of 
hydrogen  lines  to  30  minutes  or  more,  15  minutes  being  usually 
enough.  As  soon  as  it  is  complete  the  above  procedure  is 
repeated,  and  the  plate  moved  into  the  second  position.  In  this 
way  as  many  as  six  spectra  can  be  taken  on  one  plate,  after 
which  L  is  shut,  I2  warmed  up,  and  air  admitted  to  the  camera. 
The  cap  P,  which  is  on  a  ground  joint,  can  now  be  removed, 
and  the  exposed  plate  seized  and  taken  out  with  a  special  pair 
of  forceps.  A  fresh  plate  is  now  immediately  put  in,  P  replaced 
and  the  camera  again  exhausted,  in  which  state  it  is  left  till 
the  next  operation. 

41.  Form  of  the  Spectrum  Lines. — Owing  to  the  form  of 
the  slits  used,  the  shape  of  the  spot  formed  when  undeflected 
rays  from  such  a  sht  system  strike  a  photograph  surface 
normally,  is  somewhat  as  indicated  at  a  (Fig.  12).  When  they 
strike  the  plate  obliquely  the  image  would  be  spread  out  in  one 
direction,  as  in  b.     This  would  be  the  actual  form  in  the 

a  b  c 

A 


Fia.   12. — Form  of  the  Spectrum  Lines. 

apparatus,  if  the  deflexions  of  the  mean  and  extreme  rays  (i.e., 
the  rays  forming  the  centre  and  the  tips)  were  identical.  This  is 
true  of  the  magnetic  field  since  each  cuts  the  same  number 
of  lines  of  force  ;  but  it  is  not  so  in  the  case  of  the  electric 
deflexion.  Owing  in  part  to  the  fact  that  the  plates  Ji,  J2  are 
rectangular  and  in  part  to  the  stray  field  between  the  charged 
plate  Ji  and  the  earthed  tube  in  which  it  is  mounted,  the 


54  ISOTOPES 

extreme  rays  passing  diagonally  will  be  deflected  more  than 
the  mean  rays  and  the  spot  bent  into  the  form  shown  at  c. 
The  convex  side  will  be  in  the  direction  of  the  magnetic  de- 
flexion, as  this  is  opposed  to  the  deflexion  causing  the  bend. 
The  image  on  the  plate  will  therefore  be  the  part  of  this  figure 
falling  on  the  narrow  slot  in  X,  X  ;  and  as  the  apparatus  is  not 
exactly  symmetrical,  its  shape  in  the  spectra  is  the  figure  lying 
between  the  lines  X,  X  in  Fig.  12,  c. 

42.  The  distribution  of  the  mass -spectrum  over  the 
photographic  plate. — In  order  to  study  the  positions  of  the 
focus  F  (Fig  8)  on  the  plate  corresponding  to  different  values 
of  the  effective  mass  m  when  X  and  H  are  constant,  we  may 
assume  perfect  focussing  and  only  consider  a  single  median 
ray.  If  R  is  the  radius  of  curvature  of  the  path  of  a  ray  of 
effective  mass  m  while  in  the  magnetic  field,  and  d  the  radius 
of  the  field,  clearly  tan  ^  9?  =  c//R.  But  X  and  B  are  constant, 
hence  mv"^  must  be  constant  so  that  the  radius  of  curvature 
in  the  magnetic  field  varies  as  ^/m.  We  may  therefore  write 
tan  I  (p  =  ■\/{mo/m)       .  .  •       (4) 

where  Wg  is  a  constant  and  can  be  interpreted  as  that  mass 
which  under  the  conditions  of  the  experiment  is  bent  through 
a  right  angle  in  the  magnetic  field. 

Again  if  ON  the  length  of  the  perpendicular  dropped  from 
the  centre  of  the  magnetic  field  upon  ZF  =  i?  (a  constant) 
then 

NF  =  :p  cot  {(p  —  2d).         .         .      (5) 

By  combining  (4)  and  (5)  we  get  an  expression  for  'NF/p  in 
terms  of  Mq  and  m.  This  is  complicated, ^  but  its  differential 
can  be  shown  to  vanish  when  tan  |  9?  =  tan  2d.  Thus  the 
mass-scale  is  approximately  Hnear  near  9?  =  40. 

This  linear  law  was  observed  experimentally  at  the  very 
outset  and  though  at  the  time  it  was  unexplained  it  added 
greatly  to  the  ease  and  accuracy  of  the  determinations  of  m. 

The  quantity  actually  measured  is  the  distance  between  a 
fixed  point  on  the  photographic  place  called  the  ' '  fiducial 
spot  "  2  and  the  focussed  image  F.  Let  us  call  this  distance 
D.     D  and  NF  differ  by  a  constant  k — about  5-4  cm.  in  the 

1  Loc.  cit.  «  V.  p.  53. 


THE  MASS-SPECTROGRAPH  55 

present  apparatus — ^so  that  the  relation  between  D  and  m  has 
the  form  D  =  /  (m/mo)  where  /  is  a  function  in  which  all  the 
coefficients  p,  k,  and  tan  26  are  geometrical  constants,  the 
fields  only  affect  ttIq.  It  follows  directly  that  so  long  as  the 
apparatus  is  rigid  : — If  Di  and  D  2  are  the  distances  from  the 
fiducial  spot  of  any  two  points  on  the  plate  and  mi  and  m, 
the  corresponding  masses  for  given  values  of  Di  and  Dg,  the 
ratio  mi/ma  will  be  the  same  in  every  photograph. 

43,  Practical  method  of  deducing  the  effective  mass  of 
a  particle  from  the  position  of  its  line  on  the  photograph. 

— The  mathematical  investigation  described  above  is  of  interest 
as  it  explains  the  results  obtained,  but  the  actual  determination 
of  masses  from  mass-spectra  is  a  purely  empirical  process,  and 
consists  in  the  comparison  of  the  positions  of  the  Unes  caused 
by  the  masses  in  question  with  the  positions  of  known  reference 
lines.  The  only  assumption  made  was  that  given  at  the  end 
of  the  previous  paragraph  and  even  this  was  capable  of  verifica- 
tion by  experiment,  using  such  methods  as  that  described  on 
p.  57,  or  even  more  fundamentally,  in  the  special  case  of  the 
ratio  2/1,  by  the  known  identity  of  the  mass  ratios  Og/O, 
0/0+ +  ,  and  C/C+^ 

The  reference  fines  used  at  the  outset  of  the  work  were 
lines  given  by  particles  of  elements  and  compounds  the  relative 
masses  of  which  were  known  to  at  least  the  order  of  accuracy 
aimed  for.  The  procedure  was  somewhat  as  follows.  A  series 
of  spectra  were  taken  with  say  a  mixture  of  CO  2  and  CH4 
in  the  discharge  tube.  Previous  experience  with  the  parabola 
method  of  analysis  led  to  the  expectation  that  lines  at  6-C  +  + , 
8-0+ +,  12-C,  16-0,  28-CO,  32-O2,  44-CO2  would  certainly  be 
present,  there  would  also  be  a  series  of  hydrocarbon  lines 
between  12  and  16,  CH,  CH2,  CH3  which  could  be  regarded  as 
known.  A  spectrum  was  selected  containing  as  many  as 
possible  of  these  known  lines  and  their  masses  mi,  m^,  m^, — 
were  plotted  against  the  distances  of  the  lines  from  the  fixed 
fiducial  spot  and  a  curve  drawn  through  the  points  so  obtained. 
This  is  our  first  calibration  curve — of  necessity  inaccurate  owing 
to  the  gaps  between  the  points.  A  second  spectrum  was  now 
taken  in  which  the  same  fines  appeared  in  a  different  place, 


56  ISOTOPES 

for  by  altering  the  magnetic  field  we  can  place  them  wherever 
we  please,  and  the  new  set  of  distances  from  the  fiducial  spot 
measured.  These  distances  were  now  transformed  into  masses 
(no  longer  integral)  m'i,m'2,  m'3, — by  means  of  the  curve  pre- 
viously drawn.     Supposing  the  curve  to  be  accurate  and  the 

fyv)  /yyi  /lyi 

ratio  law  to  hold   — -  =  — ?  =  — -  =  r  where  r  is  clearlv  a 

measure  of  the  change  in  Wq  in  the  mathematical  discussion 
above.  In  practice  these  ratios  were  found  to  be  very  nearly 
the  same,  so  that  a  mean  value  of  r  could  be  taken  with 
confidence.  The  known  masses  multiplied  by  that  mean  now 
gave  a  new  set  of  points  on  the  original  curve.  By  carrying 
on  this  process  all  the  serious  gaps  in  the  curve  could  be 
bridged  and  its  accuracy  brought  up  to  the  required  standard. 

The  calibration  curve  so  formed  renders  the  identification  of 
one  fine  sufficient  to  deduce  the  masses  corresponding  to  all 
the  other  lines  on  the  plate,  and  as  in  general  many  lines  are 
known  on  each  spectrum,  its  accuracy  is  continually  subject 
to  fresh  test.  In  practice  it  was  found  perfectly  reliable  so 
long  as  none  of  the  geometrical  constants  of  the  apparatus 
were  altered. 

Owing  to  the  linear  relation  at  9?  =  40  the  actual  curve  was 
very  nearly  straight  for  a  considerable  portion  of  its  length. 
This  allowed  the  following  alternative  procedure  to  be  adopted 
if  desired.  A  linear  relation  was  assumed  and  a  table  of 
corrections  made  by  means  of  reference  lines,  and  these  correc- 
tions when  subtracted  from  the  observed  displacements  gave 
an  exactly  linear  relation  with  mass.  A  correction-curve 
(apparently  paraboHc)  was  drawn,  from  which  the  appropriate 
correction  for  any  displacement  could  be  written  down  and 
the  mass  corresponding  to  this  displacement  obtained  by 
simple  proportion. 

In  connection  with  the  use  of  reference  lines  it  might  be 
thought  difficult  to  know  which  of  the  lines  on  a  plate  corre- 
sponds to  a  known  mass,  since  they  are  not  labelled  in  any 
way.  A  little  consideration  will  show  that  the  same  difficulty 
is  raised  in  the  case  of  the  standard  lines  of  the  iron  arc  and 
the  stars  in  the  sky,  yet  neither  the  spectroscopist  nor  the 
astronomer  have  the  least  difficulty  in  recognising  enough  for 


THE   MASS-SPECTROGRAPH  57 

their  purpose,  indeed  a  mistake  in  identity  would  lead  in 
most  cases  to  an  error  so  gross  as  to  compel  immediate  atten- 
tion. This  comparison  is  perhaps  a  Uttle  flattering  to  the 
lines  on  a  mass-spectrum  as  these  alter  their  relative  intensity 
to  some  extent,  but  in  particular  cases,  such  as  those  of  the 
hydrocarbons  and  mercury,  identification  is,  after  a  little 
experience,  as  easy  as  that  of  the  Pole  Star  or  of  the  D  lines  in 
the  spectrum  of  sodium. 

44.  Comparison  of  masses  by  the  method  of  "  coin- 
cidence."—The  method  of  deducing  the  masses  of  particles 
from  the  position  of  their  lines  described  in  the  foregoing 
paragraph  is  simple  and  straightforward.  It  also  has  the 
great  advantage  of  not  requiring  an  accurate  knowledge  of 
the  numerical  values  of  the  electric  and  magnetic  fields.  The 
only  requisite  is  that  these  should  be  constant  during  the 
exposure,  and  even  if  this  constancy  is  not  quite  perfect  the 
shift  in  position  wiU  affect  all  the  lines  known  and  unknown 
alike  and  therefore  introduce  no  serious  error  into  the  results 
obtained.  There  is,  however,  another  method  of  comparing 
masses  which  requires  no  knowledge,  either  theoretical  or 
empirical,  of  the  relation  between  effective  mass  and  measured 
displacement.  This  is  independent  of  the  calibration  curve 
and  therefore  constitutes  a  valuable  check  on  results  obtained 
by  its  use.  It  depends  upon  the  following  considerations  : — 
Suppose  we  wish  to  compare  an  unknown  mass  m'  with  a 
known  mass  m.  A  mass-spectrum  is  taken  with  fields  X  and 
H  such  that  the  mass  m  gives  a  fine  at  a  certain  position  on 
the  plate.  The  fields  are  now  altered  until  the  line  caused 
by  the  unknown  mass  m!  is  brought  to  the  identical  position 
on  the  plate  previously  occupied  by  the  fine  due  to  m.  The 
paths  of  the  rays  in  the  two  cases  must  be  identical,  hence  if 
X',  H'  are  the  new  values  of  the  fields  it  foUows  at  once  from 
equations  (1)  and  (2)  i  that  m' /m  =  X/X'  x  (HVH)^.  Now 
it  is  only  necessary  to  measure  one  of  the  fields  if  we  keep  the 
other  constant  and  therefore  H,  which  cannot  be  measured  or 
reproduced  accurately,  is  kept  constant,  and  X  is  measured. 
For  the  latter  purpose  it  is  only  necessary  to  measure  the 

1  F.  p.  45. 


58  ISOTOPES 

potentials  applied  to  the  plates  Pi,  Pa,  which  can  be  done  with 
the  greatest  ease  and  accuracy. 

Thus,  to  take  a  numerical  illustration,  the  position  occupied 
by  the  line  due  to  carbon  (12)  with  a  potential  on  the  plates 
of  320  volts  should  be  exactly  coincident  with  that  occupied 
by  the  line  due  to  Oxygen  (16)  with  240  volts  when  the  mag- 
netic field  is  kept  constant.  All  such  coincidences  have  so 
far  been  found  to  occur  within  the  error  of  experiment,  what- 
ever the  position  on  the  plate. 

Methods  depending  on  the  measured  variation  of  X  with  H 
constant  have  some  practical  disadvantages.  The  first  and 
most  obvious  of  these  is  that  any  small  change  in  the  value 
of  the  magnetic  field  between  the  two  exposures  will  lead  to 
a  definite  error,  this  error  will  be  double  the  percentage  change 
in  the  field,  since  the  square  of  the  latter  is  involved.  The 
second  objection  is  founded  on  considerations  of  intensity. 
If  the  parabola  method  of  analysis  is  compared  with  the 
mass-spectrograph  it  will  readily  be  observed  that,  in  effect, 
the  latter  focusses  at  a  point  all  the  rays  which  in  the  former 
method  form  a  short  element  of  arc  on  a  parabola.  The 
length  of  the  element  of  arc  is  determined  by  the  angle  of 
the  electric  spectrum  allowed  to  pass,  i.e.  the  width  of  the 
diaphragm.  Its  position  on  the  parabola  is  at  our  disposal, 
for,  referring  to  Fig.  4,  p.  28,  it  wiU  be  seen  that  the  higher  we 
make  X,  that  is  to  say  the  higher  the  energy  of  the  beam  of 
rays  we  select  at  constants,  the  nearer  the  element  of  arc  will 
approach  the  axis  OY,  in  fact  its  distance  from  that  axis  will 
simply  be  inversely  proportional  to  X.  Also,  however  many 
parabolas  we  consider  and  however  much  we  move  them  about 
by  changing  H,  so  long  as  X  is  constant  the  elements  of  arc 
selected  will  all  he  on  a  line  parallel  to  OY.  Now  it  has 
already  been  pointed  out  ^  that  the  intensity  of  normal  para- 
bolas is  a  maximum  near  the  head  p,  where  the  energy  corre- 
sponds to  the  full  fall  of  potential  across  the  discharge  tube, 
and  fades  away  rapidly,  in  some  cases  very  rapidly  indeed, 
at  points  more  distant  from  the  origin.  In  order  to  get  the 
greatest  intensity  at  the  focussed  spot  we  must  therefore 
choose  X  so  that  the  element  of  arc  selected  will  be  near  the 

1  P.  29. 


THE   MASS-SPECTROGRAPH  59 

head  of  the  parabola.  This  is  done  in  practice  by  observing 
visually,  by  means  of  a  willemite  screen,  the  very  bright  Une 
given  by  the  hydrogen  molecule  while  different  potentials  are 
apphed  to  the  plates.  The  best  value  of  X  so  determined 
must  also  be  the  best  value  for  all  the  other  normal  hnes,  so 
that  in  the  ordinary  calibration  curve  method,  when  X  is  kept 
constant,  it  is  possible  to  use  conditions  in  which  all  the  normal 
Hnes  on  the  mass-spectra  will  be  at  their  brightest  together, 
whatever  range  we  bring  on  to  the  plate  by  altering  the 
magnetic  field. 

In  the  coincidence  method  this  very  fortunate  circumstance 
cannot  be  taken  advantage  of,  for  with  H  constant  the  selected 
elements  of  arc  will  now  lie  on  a  line  parallel  to  OX.  We 
can  only  arrange  matters  for  one,  the  Hghter,  of  the  two 
masses  to  be  compared,  to  be  at  its  optimum.  In  the  case 
of  the  heavier  the  selected  arc  must  he  at  a  greater  distance 
from  the  origin  and  therefore  provide  a  much  feebler  intensity. 
The  disparity  in  brightness,  due  to  this  effect  will  be  the  greater 
the  greater  the  ratio  of  the  masses  considered  ;  it  can  be 
corrected  to  some  degree  by  softening  the  discharge  tube 
while  the  heavier  mass  is  being  photographed. 

In  spite  of  these  drawbacks  the  principle  underlying  the 
coincidence  method  is  probably  the  most  suitable  for  mass- 
ratio  measurements  of  the  highest  accuracy.  The  fact  that 
the  paths  of  the  rays  is  the  same  in  the  case  of  both  masses 
eliminates  all  errors  due  to  non-uniformity  of  the  fields  and 
the  results  are  independent  of  any  assumptions  as  regards 
the  ratios  of  the  reference  hnes  themselves.  It  is  the  only 
method  at  present  available  in  the  case  of  elements  far  removed, 
on  the  mass-scale,  from  the  reference  Hnes,  and  a  modification 
of  it  caUed  the  method  of  "  bracketing  "  has  been  successfuUy 
used  to  evaluate  the  masses  of  helium  and  hydrogen.^ 

45.  The  measurement  of  the  lines. — The  accurate 
determination  of  the  distance  of  the  lines  from  the  fiducial 
spot  is  a  physical  problem  of  considerable  interest.  The 
image  itself  is  due  to  a  caustic  of  rays,  the  edge  of  which  will 
be  sharp  on  the  side  of  maximum  magnetic  displacement,  so 

^  V.  p.  69. 


60  ISOTOPES 

that  this,  the  left  side  in  the  Plates,  may  be  expected  to  main- 
tain its  sharpness  when  a  large  diaphragm  is  in  use,  while  the 
other  wiU  fade  away  gradually.  Hence  very  bright  lines  will 
be  broadened  to  the  right  by  this  effect  (which  is  analogous 
to  spherical  astigmatism  in  ordinary  lenses),  but  to  the  left 
the  only  broadening  will  be  that  due  to  ordinary  halation. 
The  relative  importance  of  these  two  forms  of  spreading  can 
be  gauged  by  taking  photographs  with  a  very  small  diaphragm, 
for  then  the  first  will  be  ehminated  and  the  second  can  be 
estimated  by  comparing  lines  of  different  intensity.  It  is 
found  that  for  ordinary  diaphragm  apertures  the  halation 
effect  is  much  the  smaller  ;  it  can  also  be  minimised  by  using 
lines  of  approximately  equal  intensity  so  that  the  most  reliable 
measurements  of  Hnes  for  position  are  obtained  from  their 
left-hand  edges.  This  is  well  illustrated  in  the  "  bracketed  " 
lines  of  hydrogen  a  and  c,  Plate  III.  In  {a)  measurements 
of  the  left  hand  side  of  the  three  lines  shows  this  bracket  to 
be  really  symmetrical  though  it  does  not  appear  so  to  the  eye, 
on  account  of  the  astigmatic  spreading  of  the  middle  line 
caused  by  the  use  of  an  open  diaphragm  and  rather  too  long 
an  exposure.  In  (c)  the  diaphragm  was  almost  closed  and 
the  exposures  more  carefully  adjusted,  so  that  both  sides  of 
the  hnes  are  sharp  and  their  breadths  practically  identical. 

The  most  accurate  measurements  were  made  on  a  compara- 
tor. The  spectrum  was  set  as  closely  as  possible  parallel  to 
the  axis  of  the  instrument,  and  the  distances  between  the 
left-hand  edge  of  the  hnes  and  the  fiducial  spot  read  off  on  a 
Zeiss  standard  scale.  For  faint  hnes  it  was  necessary  to  use 
a  very  low  power  eyepiece  of  the  reading  microscope,  and  in 
the  case  of  the  faintest  lines  of  all,  the  best  results  could  be 
obtained  by  laying  a  miUimetre  scale  on  the  plate  and  estimat- 
ing the  distance  from  the  fiducial  spot  to  the  optical  centre  of 
the  lines,  by  the  unaided  eye. 

46.  Resolving  power  and  accuracy  of  mass  deter- 
mination.— ^Taking  the  width  of  the  slits  as  1/25  mm.  and 
putting  in  the  dimensions  of  the  present  apparatus  the  theory 
shows  that  in  the  region  9?  =  40  hnes  differing  by  a  httle  less 
than  1  per  cent,  should  be  just  separated.     In  actual  practice 


THE  MASS-SPECTROGRAPH  61 

a  better  result  was  obtained,  for  the  instrument  is  capable  of 
separating  the  Unes  of  xenon,  which  differ  by  1  in  130  ;  this 
is  probably  because  the  part  of  the  hne  which  faUs  on  the  strip 
of  plate  exposed  is  due  to  the  narrower  edges  of  the  shts. 

The  numerical  relation  between  mass  and  position  in  this 
part  of  the  spectrum  corresponds  to  a  shift  of  1-39  mm.  for 
a  change  of  mass  of  1  per  cent.,  so  that  even  with  the  unaided 
eye  an  accuracy  of  1  part  in  1,000  can  be  approached.  Although 
it  is  sufficient  in  theory  to  know  the  mass  of  one  Hne  only  to 
determine,  with  the  cahbration  curve,  the  masses  of  aU  the 
others,  in  practice  every  effort  is  made  to  bracket  any  unknown 
hne  by  reference  Unes  and  only  to  trust  comparative  measure- 
ments when  the  Hnes  are  fairly  close  together.  Under  these 
conditions  an  accuracy  of  1  in  1,000  is  claimed  and  there  is 
httle  doubt  that  in  favourable  cases  it  is  exceeded. 

47.  Order     of     results     and     nomenclature. — In    the 

descriptions  of  the  results  obtained  with  the  mass-spectrograph 
contained  in  the  following  chapters  the  order  of  the  elements 
given  is,  when  possible,  that  in  which  the  experiments  were 
made.  There  is  a  practical  reason  for  this  procedure,  as  in 
most  cases  it  was  impossible  to  ehminate  any  element  used 
before  the  following  one  was  introduced.  Evacuation  and 
washing  have  httle  effect,  as  the  gases  appear  to  get  embedded 
in  the  surface  of  the  discharge  bulb  and  are  only  released  very 
gradually  by  subsequent  discharge. 

The  problem  of  nomenclature  of  the  isotopes  became  serious 
when  the  very  complex  nature  of  the  heavy  elements  was 
apparent.  It  has  been  decided  for  the  present  to  adopt  the 
rather  clumsy  but  definite  and  elastic  one  of  using  the  chemical 
symbol  of  the  complex  element,  with  an  index  corresponding 
to  its  mass  :  e.g.  Ne^^^  Rb8^  This  system  is  made  reasonable 
by  the  fact  that  the  constituents  of  complex  elements  have 
all  so  far  proved  to  have  masses  expressible  in  whole  nimabers. 

48.  Lines  of  the  First,  Second  and  higher  Orders. — 

It  was  shown  on  page  30  that  particles  having  two  charges 
gave  a  parabola  corresponding  to  an  effective  mass  of  one 
hah  the  normal  mass.  In  the  same  way  a  particle  with  three 
charges  wiU  have  an  effective  mass  of  one  third,  and  so  on. 


62  ISOTOPES 

These  apparent  masses  will  duly  make  their  appearance  on 
mass-spectra  as  lines  corresponding  to  simple  fractions  of  the 
real  mass  causing  them.  It  is  convenient  in  these  cases  to 
borrow  the  nomenclature  of  optics  and  refer  to  the  Unes  given 
by  singly,  doubly,  and  multiply  charged  particles  respectively 
as  Unes  of  the  first,  second,  and  higher  orders.  Thus  the 
molecule  of  oxygen  gives  a  first  order  fine  at  32,  and  its  atom 
first  and  second  order  lines  at  16  and  8. 

The  empirical  rule  that  molecules  only  give  first  order  lines  ^ 
is  very  useful  in  helping  to  differentiate  between  atoms  and 
compound  molecules  of  the  same  apparent  mass.  Some 
results  given  below, ^  however,  show  that  in  certain  cases  it 
breaks  down,  so  that  inferences  made  from  it  must  not  be  taken 
as  absolutely  conclusive. 

49.  Negative  mass -spectra. — It  has  been  mentioned 
that  positive  rays  could  become  negatively  charged  by  the 
capture  of  electrons  by  colhsions  in  the  narrow  canal-ray  tube 
of  the  Thomson  apparatus,  and  so  produce  parabolas  in  the 
quadrant  opposite  to  that  containing  the  normal  ones.  The 
sHt  system  of  the  mass-spectrograph  is  specially  designed  to 
eliminate  such  collisions  as  far  as  possible  by  exhausting  the 
space  between  the  slits.  If  the  means  of  exhaustion  of  this 
space  is  dehberately  cut  off,  and  the  normal  electric  and 
magnetic  fields  both  reversed  in  sign  it  is  possible,  at  a  small 
cost  in  definition  of  the  fines,  to  photograph  the  mass-spectra 
of  negatively  charged  particles.  Such  negatively  charged 
particles  are  only  formed  by  elements  or  compounds  having 
marked  electronegative  properties.  Very  little  work  has  been 
done  in  this  interesting  field,  but  certain  ambiguities  in  the 
interpretation  of  the  chlorine  results  have  been  satisfactorily 
cleared  up  by  its  means. 

^  J.  J.  Thomson,  Rays  of  Positive  Electricity,  p.  64. 
»  V.  p.  75. 


CHAPTER  VI 
ANALYSIS  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

50.  Arrangement  of  results. — In  this  Chapter  and  the 
one  following  it  are  given  the  experimental  results  obtained 
from  a  large  number  of  elements  which  have  been  subjected 
to  analysis  with  a  view  to  determining  their  constitution. 
This  Chapter  deals  with  those  elements  which,  by  reason  of 
their  volatiUty  or  properties  of  forming  volatile  compounds, 
can  be  treated  by  the  ordinary  discharge- tube  method.  The 
analysis  given  in  all  these  cases  is  that  obtained  by  means  of 
the  mass-spectrograph. 

In  Chapter  VII  will  be  found  the  results  obtained  by  the 
analysis  of  those  elements,  all  metals,  whose  positive  rays  must 
be  generated  by  special  devices.  Here  the  analyses  are 
efifected  by  several  different  methods. 

The  sequence  of  the  elements  in  the  two  Chapters  is  that  in 
which  the  results  were  obtained  ;  with  the  exception  of  nickel, 
which  is  included  in  the  first  group  although  its  mass-spectrum 
was  not  obtained  until  after  the  other  metals  had  been  under 
observation. 

51.  Oxygen  (At.  Wt.  16  00)  and  Carbon  (At.  Wt.  12  00). 
— On  a  mass-spectrum  all  measurements  are  relative,  and  so 
any  known  element  could  be  taken  as  a  standard.  Oxygen 
is  naturally  selected.  Its  molecule,  singly-charged  atom,  and 
doubly-charged  atom  give  reference  lines  at  32,  16,  and  8 
respectively.  The  extremely  exact  integral  relation  between 
the  atomic  weights  of  oxygen  and  carbon  is  itself  strong 
evidence  that  both  are  "  simple  "  elements,  and  so  far  no 
evidence  appears  to  have  arisen  to  throw  any  doubt  on  this 
point.  Direct  comparison  of  the  C  line  (12)  and  the  CO  hne 
(28)  with  the  above  standards  shows  that  the  whole  number 
relation  and  additive  law  hold  to  the  limit  of  accuracy,  i.e.  one 

63 


64  ISOTOPES 

part  in  a  thousand;    and  this  provides  standards  C^^    (6) 
C  (12),  CO  (28),  and  CO2  (44). 

Many  of  these  hnes  will  be  recognised  on  the  spectra  repro- 
duced on  Plate  III.  The  compounds  of  carbon  and  hydrogen 
provide  two  valuable  and  easily  distinguishable  groups  of 
reference  lines.  The  first,  which  may  be  called  the  Ci  group, 
contains  five :— 12-C,  13-CH,  I4-CH2,  I5-CH3,  I6-CH4 
(or  0).  It  is  very  well  shown  on  Spectrum  V,  Plate  III. 
When  water  vapour  is  present,  and  particularly  when  a  fresh 
discharge-tube  is  used  for  the  first  time,  it  is  followed  by 
17-011,  I8-OH2,  and  sometimes  by  19  presumably  OH3 
but  always  very  faint.  The  second  hydrocarbon  or  C2  group 
contains  seven  lines  : — 24,  25,  26,  27,  28,  29,  30,  which  include 
the  very  strong  and  particularly  valuable  reference  line  28  CO 
or  C2H4.  This  group  is  well  illustrated  in  Spectra  I  and  II, 
Plate  III.  AU  the  above  lines  may  be  expected  on  spectra 
obtained  by  the  ordinary  discharge-tube  method ;  for  an 
addition  of  CO  or  CO2  is  usually  made  to  the  gases  or  vapours 
under  consideration  and  assists  the  smooth  running  of  the 
discharge.  The  hydrocarbons  are  derived  from  the  wax  and 
grease  used  in  the  joints  of  the  apparatus. 

52.  Neon  (At.  Wt.  20-20). — As  soon  as  the  instrument  was 
found  to  work  satisfactorily  and  enough  mass-spectra  contain- 
ing reference  Unes  had  been  obtained,  neon  was  introduced 
into  the  discharge  tube.  The  best  results  were  obtained  with 
a  mixture  of  carbon  monoxide  and  neon,  containing  about  20 
per  cent,  of  the  latter  gas. 

The  two  first  order  and  two  second  order  lines  due  to  neon 
were  all  four  available  and  well  placed  for  measurement  on 
the  mass  spectra  obtained.  The  following  figures  are  taken 
from  the  original  paper  ;i  they  are  the  results  of  the  measure- 
ments made  on  two  different  plates,  using  six  different  spectra. 

Plate  1. 
First  order.  Second  order. 

20-00  22-00  9-98  11-00 

19-95  22-01  10-02  10-99 


19-97(5)         22-00(5)  10-00  10-99(6) 


1  Aston,  Phil.  Mag.,  39,  454,     1920. 


ANALYSIS   OF  THE   ELEMENTS  65 


Plate 

2. 

20-00 

21-90 

10-01 

11-06 

19-98 

22-10 

9-98 

10-98 

20-00 

22-03 

9-98 

11-01 

19-90 

21-98 

—  • 

— 

19-97  22-00(5)  9-99  11-01 

The  method  of  measuring  the  position  of  the  lines  then  in 
use,  combined  with  a  photographic  halation  effect/  tended  to 
decrease  the  masses  given  by  very  bright  lines.  This  is  enough 
to  account  for  the  reading  of  the  intense  20  Hne  giving  a  mass  a 
Uttle  too  low.  The  above  figures  therefore  can  be  accepted  as 
conclusive  evidence  that  neon  is  a  mixture  of  two  isotopes  of 
atomic  weights  20-00  and  22-00  (0  =  16)  respectively,  to  an 
accuracy  of  about  one- tenth  per  cent.^ 

The  two  first  order  lines  of  neon  are  shown  in  Spectrum  I, 
Plate  III,  but,  of  course,  their  relative  intensities  must  not  be 
judged  from  such  a  half-tone  reproduction.  On  the  original 
negatives  the  intensities  are  in  good  agreement  with  the 
expected  ratio  9  to  1  which  is  necessary  to  yield  the  accepted 
atomic  weight  20-20. 

53.  Possibility  of  a  third  isotope  of  neon. — On  some  of 
the  clearest  spectra  obtained  with  neon  present  there  is  a 
distinct  indication  of  a  line  corresponding  to  a  mass  21.  This 
is  an  exceedingly  faint  line  and,  at  first,  was  thought  to  indicate 
the  presence  of  a  third  isotope.  It  is  now  considered  more 
probably  due  to  an  abnormal  hydride  of  the  kind  discussed  on 
page  98. 

54.  Chlorine  (At.  Wt.  35-46). — Spectra  indicating  that  this 
element  was  a  mixture  of  isotopes  were  first  obtained  by  the 
use  of  hydrochloric  acid  gas,  but  as  this  was  objectionable  on 
account  of  its  action  on  mercury,  phosgene  (COCI2)  was  sub- 
stituted. Spectra  II,  III,  and  IV,  Plate  III,  are  reproduced 
from  one  of  the  plates  taken  with  this  gas.  Spectrum  I  is 
reproduced  for  comparison,  it  shows  the  state  of  the  tube 
before  chlorine  compounds  were  introduced.     It  will  be  seen 

1  V.  p.  60. 

« Aston,  Nature,  Nov.  27,    1919  ;  Phil.  Mag.  39,  464,      1920. 

F 


66  ISOTOPES 

that  chlorine  is  characterised  by  the  appearance  of  four  very 
definite  lines  in  the  previously  unoccupied  space  to  the  right 
of  O2  (32)  :  measurement  shows  these  lines  to  correspond 
exactly  to  masses  35,  36,  37,  and  38.  On  Spectrum  II,  Plate 
III,  taken  with  a  small  magnetic  field,  faint  lines  wiU  be  seen 
at  17-5  and  18-5.  These  only  appeared  when  chlorine  was 
introduced,  and  are  certainly  second  order  lines  corresponding 
to  35  and  37.  Chlorine  is  therefore  a  mixture  of  isotopes,  and 
two  of  these  have  masses  35  and  37.  Evidence  that  CP^  and 
CP^  are  the  main  if  not  the  only  constituents  is  given  by  the 
strong  lines  63  and  65  (Spectrum  IV,  Plate  III),  due  to  COCP"^ 
and  COCP^.  The  lines  36  and  38  were  naturally  ascribed  to 
the  hydrochloric  acids  corresponding  to  CP^  and  CP^^  That 
this  surmise  is  correct  was  definitely  proved  about  a  year  later 
when  the  mass  spectra  of  negatively  charged  rays  of  chlorine 
were  successfully  obtained  in  the  manner  described  on  p.  62, 
On  the  negative  mass  spectra  produced  in  this  way  only  the 
two  chlorine  lines  35  and  37  could  be  distinguished.  The 
property  of  forming  negatively  charged  ions  is  a  purely  chemical 
characteristic  ;  that  isotopes  of  the  same  element  should  differ 
radically  in  it  is  quite  out  of  the  question.  It  is  therefore 
perfectly  certain  that  the  lines  36  and  38  are  not,  to  any 
sensible  extent,  due  to  isotopes  of  chlorine. 

On  many  of  the  spectra  obtained  from  chlorine  compounds 
a  very  faint  line  is  distinguishable  at  39.  This  was  regarded 
as  a  possible  third  isotope  (which  would  then  be  an  isobare  of 
potassium.  No  decision  on  this  point  has  been  obtained  from 
the  negative  mass  spectra,  for  these  have,  so  far,  been  too 
faint  for  the  39  line  to  be  visible,  even  if  it  was  present.  A 
careful  comparison  between  the  intensity  of  this  Hne  and  those 
at  35  and  37  on  a  large  number  of  plates  discloses  an  apparent 
variation  which  tells  rather  decidedly  against  the  idea  that  a 
third  isotope  is  present.  More  evidence,  however,  will  be 
necessary  to  clear  this  point, 

55.  Argon  (At.  Wt.  39-88  Ramsay,  39  91  Leduc).— The 

tube  was  run  with  a  mixture  of  CO2  and  CII4,  and  then  about 
20  per  cent,  of  argon  added.     The  main  constituent  of  the 

1  Aston,  Nature,  Dec.  18,      1919  ;  Phil.  Mag.,  39,  611,     1920. 


PLATE    III. 


I 


«fc-4o 


■^8 


^ 


I 


-28 


-32 


•>  -36 


b 


-40 


fci-  44 


.  (2 


»-i6 


te-:20 


-32 


35 


-13-3         ^-37 
■14 


-44 


**■  He 


33 


-32 


««>  -58 


It -63 
I"? 


|-«* 


P 


P 


;v^ 

1 

1 

j;:     i 

^^ 

-13 

p~- 

*•  — /v 

p  -'6 

*-.  -/^ 

«»-/i- 

-  '8 

fc-^6 

•lil  -;* 

~'y-s 

~'as 

—  2Z 

-H 

fe. 

—  :s 

^ 

-26 

¥*   —2y 

%-" 

*..    —3(f 

•■> 

-30 

Ik 

-7B      \ 

i 

-32 

1 

-3S 

—40 

1 

-36 

^ 

Mass  Spectra. 

{Bi/  kind  pcrmusion  of  the  Editors  of  The  Philnxophicfd  Mii;/(izi»e.^ 


ANALYSIS   OF  THE   ELEMENTS  67 

element  was  at  once  evident  from  a  very  strong  line  at  40 
(Spectrum  VI,  Plate  III),  reproduced  in  the  second  and  third 
orders  at  20  and  13-33  (Spectrum  V).  The  third  order  line  is 
exceedingly  well  placed  for  measurement,  and  from  it  the  mass 
of  the  singly-charged  atom  is  found  to  be  40-00  i  "02.  At 
first  this  was  thought  to  be  the  only  constituent,  but  later  a 
faint  companion  was  seen  at  36,  which  further  spectra  showed 
to  bear  a  very  definite  intensity  relation  to  the  40  line.  No 
evidence  drawn  from  multiple  charges  was  available  in  this 
case  owing  to  the  probable  presence  of  OH2  and  C  ;  but  the 
above  intensity  relation  and  the  absence  of  the  line  from 
spectra  taken  just  before  argon  was  introduced,  made  it 
extremely  likely  that  it  was  a  true  isotope. 

Any  doubt  on  this  point  has  been  removed  for  all  practical 
purposes  by  results  obtained  during  the  later  work  on  krypton 
and  xenon.  Argon  was  always  present  to  more  or  less  extent 
during  these  experiments  and  the  invariable  association  of  a 
line  at  36,  of  appropriate  intensity,  with  the  stronger  one  at 
40  may  be  regarded  as  confirming  the  original  conclusion  in  a 
satisfactory  manner.  The  presence  of  3  per  cent,  of  this 
lighter  isotope  is  sufficient  to  reduce  the  mean  atomic  weight 
from  40  to  39-9. 

56.  Nitrogen  (At.  Wt.  14-01). — This  element  shows  no 
abnormal  characteristics  :  its  atom  cannot  be  distinguished, 
on  the  present  apparatus,  from  CH2  nor  its  molecule  from  CO. 
Its  second  order  line  on  careful  measurement  appears  to  be 
exactly  7,  so  it  is  evidently  a  simple  element,  as  its  chemical 
combining  weight  would  lead  one  to  expect. 

57.  Hydrogen  (At.  Wt.  1  008)  and  Helium  (At.  Wt. 
3-99). — In  connection  with  the  analysis  of  positive  rays  the 
element  hydrogen  is  of  pecuHar  interest  in  many  ways.  Its 
invariable  presence  in  rays  generated  by  the  ordinary  dis- 
charge-tube method,  no  matter  what  gas  is  being  employed,  is 
itself  a  very  striking  phenomenon,  even  when  due  allowance 
has  been  made  for  its  abnormal  power  in  affecting  screens  and 
plates. 

The  ease  with  which  its  brilliant  lines,  the  molecular  one  in 
particular,  can  be  generated  and  observed  visually  is  of  an 


68  ISOTOPES 

importance  hardly  to  be  exaggerated  in  the  development  and 
technique  of  the  mass-spectrograph.  The  advantage  of  the 
visible  presence  of  the  H2  line  has  already  been  referred  to  ^ 
and  was  realised  very  keenly  in  the  investigation  of  the  alkali 
metals  when  the  method  precluded  the  use  of  this  line  to 
indicate  when  suitable  conditions  for  exposure  had  been 
obtained.^ 

The  hydrogen  atom  is  the  lightest  particle  ever  observed  to 
carry  a  positive  charge,  which  agrees  very  well  with  the 
generally  accepted  idea  that  the  true  Moseley  number  of  this 
element  is  1.  This  implies  that  the  neutral  atom  of  hydrogen 
only  contains  one  electron  and  therefore  can  only  acquire  a 
single  positive  charge  in  losing  it.  The  singly  charged  par- 
ticle so  formed  is  therefore  the  "  proton  "  or  ultimate  atom 
of  positive  electricity  itself. 

HeUum,  on  the  other  hand,  can  lose  two  electrons  and 
acquire  a  double  charge,  indeed  its  atoms  are  invariably  in 
this  state  when  ejected  from  the  nuclei  of  radioactive  elements 
as  alpha  rays.  Nevertheless,  in  spite  of  every  effort  to  obtain 
the  second  order  Une  of  helium — for  direct  comparison  with 
the  hydrogen  molecule — not  the  faintest  indication  of  it  has 
yet  been  observed  on  a  mass  spectrum,  although  there  is  not 
the  least  difficulty  in  obtaining  its  first  order  Une  to  any 
intensity  required. 

The  explanation  of  this  is  probably  to  be  found  in  the  very 
high  ionisation  potential — about  80  volts  ^ — associated  with 
the  detachment  of  both  electrons.  If  doubly  charged  hehum 
atoms  are  formed  in  the  discharge  tube — and  we  have  every 
reason  to  consider  this  probable — ^their  chance  of  passing 
through  the  slit  system  and  the  deflecting  fields  without 
picking  up  a  single  electron  may  be  practically  nil.  This  is 
made  the  more  likely  by  the  fact  that  hehum  is  not  absorbed 
by  charcoal  and  liquid  air,  so  that  when  it  is  present  the  pressure 
in  the  apparatus  tends  to  become  undesirably  high. 

1  V.  p.  52. 

«  F.  p.  87. 

3  Franck  and  Knipping,  Phys.  Zeit.,  20,  481,  1919;  Ver.  Deut. 
Phys.  Qes.  20,  181,  1919  ;  and  Horton  and  Da  vies,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc. 
95A,  408,     1919  ;   Phil.  Mag.  39,  692,     1920. 


ANALYSIS   OF  THE  ELEMENTS  69 

58.  The   determination  of  the   masses  of  atoms   of 
hydrogen  and  helium  by  the  method  of  "  Bracketing."  ^ — 

The  determination  of  masses  so  far  removed  as  these  from 
the  ordinary  reference  lines  offers  peculiar  difficulties,  but> 
as  the  lines  were  expected  to  approximate  to  the  terms  of  the 
geometrical  progression  1,  2,  4,  8,  etc.,  the  higher  terms  of 
which  are  known,  a  special  method  was  adopted  by  which  a 
two  to  one  relation  could  be  tested  with  some  exactness.  Two 
sets  of  accumulators  were  selected,  each  giving  very  nearly 
the  same  potential  of  about  250  volts.  The  potentials  were 
then  made  exactly  equal  by  means  of  a  subsidiary  cell  and  a 
current-divider,  the  equality  being  tested  to  well  within  1  in 
1000  by  means  of  a  null  instrument.  If  exposures  are  made 
with  such  potentials  appUed  to  the  electric  plates  first  in 
parallel  and  then  in  series,  the  magnetic  field  being  kept 
constant,  all  masses  having  an  exact  two  to  one  relation  will 
be  brought  into  coincidence  on  the  plate.^  Such  coincidences 
cannot  be  detected  on  the  same  spectrum  photographically  ; 
but  if  we  first  add  and  then  subtract  a  small  potential  from 
one  of  the  large  potentials,  two  lines  will  be  obtained  which 
closely  bracket  the  third.  To  take  an  actual  instance — using 
a  gas  containing  hydrogen  and  hehum,  with  a  constant  current 
in  the  magnet  of  02  ampere,  three  exposures  were  made 
with  electric  fields  of  250,  500  +  12,  and  500  —  12  volts 
respectively.  The  hydrogen  molecule  line  was  found  sym- 
metrically bracketed  by  a  pair  of  atomic  fines  (Plate  III, 
Spectrum  VII,  a  and  c),  showing  within  experimental  error 
that  the  mass  of  the  molecule  is  exactly  double  the  mass  of 
the  atom.  When  after  a  suitable  increase  of  the  magnetic 
field  the  same  procedure  was  appfied  to  the  hehum  line  and 
that  of  the  hydrogen  molecule,  the  bracket  was  no  longer 
symmetrical  (Spectrum  VII,  6),  nor  was  it  when  the  hydrogen 
molecule  was  bracketed  by  two  helium  fines  {d).  Both  results 
show  in  an  unmistakable  manner  that  the  mass  of  He  is  less 
than  twice  that  of  H  g.  In  the  same  way  He  was  compared  with 
0"^  "^j  and  H3.3  The  method  is  discussed  on  p.  57.  The  values 
obtained  by  its  use  can  be  checked  in  the  ordinary  way  by 

1  Aston,  Phil  Mag.  39,  621,     1920. 
»  V.  p.  57.  «  V.  p.  70. 


70 


ISOTOPES 


comparing  He  with  C"^"^  and  H3  with  He,  these  pairs  being 
close  enough  together  for  the  purpose.  The  following  table 
gives  the  range  of  values  obtained  from  the  most  reliable 
plates  : — 


Line. 

Method. 

Mass  assumed. 

Mass  deduced. 

He       .      .      . 

H3.      .      .      . 
H,.      .      .      . 

f  Bracket 
\  Direct 
j  Bracket 
\  Direct 
Bracket 

0  +  +   =8 
C++    =  6 
C++    =  6 
He      =4 
He      =4 

3-994-3-996 
4-005-4-010 
3-025-3-027 
3-021-3-030 
2-012-2-018 

From  these  figures  it  is  safe  to  conclude  that  hydrogen  is  a 
simple  element  and  that  its  atomic  weight,  determined  with 
such  consistency  and  accuracy  by  chemical  methods,  is  the  true 
mass  of  its  atom. 

This  result  leads  to  theoretical  consideration  of  the  greatest 
importance,  which  will  be  discussed  later.  ^ 

59.  Triatomic  Hydrogen  H3. — The  occurrence  of  a 
parabola  corresponding  to  a  mass  3  was  first  observed  and 
investigated  by  Sir  J.  J,  Thomson. 2  He  came  to  the  conclusion 
that  it  was  probably  due  to  triatomic  hydrogen.  The  simplest 
way  of  obtaining  this  substance  is  to  bombard  KOH  with 
cathode  rays  and  pump  off  the  gases  so  produced.  The  H3 
used  for  the  above  measurements  was  obtained  in  this  way. 
The  mass  deduced  proves  in  a  conclusive  manner  that  the 
particle  causing  it  is  a  molecule  of  three  hydrogen  atoms,  a 
result  independently  established  about  the  same  time  by  the 
chemical  work  of  Wendt  and  Landauer.^ 

60.  Krypton  (At.  Wt.  82  92)  and  Xenon  (At.  Wt.  130  2). 
— The  results  with  these  elements  were  particularly  interesting. 
The  first  source  available,  was  the  remains  of  two  small  samples 
of  gas  from  evaporated  liquid  air.  Both  contained  nitrogen, 
oxygen,  argon,  and  krypton,  but  xenon  was  only  detected 
spectroscopically  in  one  and  its  percentage  in  that  must  have 
been  quite  minute.     Kj:ypton  is  characterised  by  a  remarkable 

1  V.  p.  100. 

*  J.  J,  Thomson,  Rays  of  Positive  Electricity,  p.  116,     1913. 

^  Wendt  and  Landauer,  Jotir.  Am.  Chem.  Soc,  42,  930,    1920. 


ANALYSIS  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  71 

group  of  five  strong  Knes  at  80,  82,  83,  84,  86,  and  a  faint  sixth 
at  78.  This  cluster  of  isotopes  is  beautifully  reproduced  with 
the  same  relative  values  of  intensity  in  the  second,  and  fainter 
still  in  the  third  order.  These  multiply-charged  clusters  give 
most  rehable  values  of  mass,  as  the  second  order  can  be  com- 
pared with  A  (40)  and  the  third  with  CO  or  Ng  (28)  with  the 
highest  accuracy.  It  will  be  noted  that  one  member  of  each 
group  is  obliterated  by  the  reference  Une,  but  not  the  same 
one.  The  singly  and  doubly  charged  krypton  clusters  can  be 
seen  to  the  right  and  left  of  Spectrum  VIII,  Plate  III.  It  will 
be  noticed  that  krypton  is  the  first  element  examined  which 
shows  unmistakable  isotopes  differing  by  one  unit  only. 

On  the  krypton  plates  taken  with  the  greatest  magnetic 
field  faint,  but  unmistakable  indications  of  fines  in  the 
region  of  130  could  just  be  detected.  The  richest  sample  was 
therefore  fractionated  over  liquid  air,  and  the  last  fraction,  a 
few  cubic  miUimetres,  was  just  sufficient  to  produce  the 
xenon  fines  in  an  unmistakable  manner.  Five  could  be  dis- 
tinguished, but  owing  to  difficulties  in  the  way  of  accurate 
measurement  the  provisional  values  first  pubfished  were  one 
unit  too  low. 

Later  on  in  March,  1921,  a  sample  of  gas  was  obtained  which 
contained  a  large  proportion  of  xenon,  though  it  was  by  no 
means  free  from  krypton.  This  yielded  some  excellent  mass 
spectra,  which  not  only  served  to  correct  the  figures  given  for 
the  five  isotopes  discovered  previously,  but  also  indicated 
the  possibility  of  two  additional  ones. 

The  absolute  position  of  the  group  on  the  mass  scale  was 
satisfactorily  fixed  by  means  of  the  second  order  line  of  the 
strongest  member,  which  fortunately  fies  outside  the  third 
order  mercury  group.  This  gave  constant  and  accurate 
values  corresponding  to  64-5.  The  five  strong  fines  of  xenon 
are  therefore  129,  131,  132,  134,  136.  On  the  left  of  the  first 
there  was  to  be  seen  on  many  of  the  plates  distinct  indications 
of  a  faint  component  128.  Also  the  darkening  between  the 
lines  129  and  131  appears  decidedly  greater  than  that  to  be 
expected  from  ordinary  halation  and  suggests  the  possibility 
of  a  seventh  isotope  130.  The  relative  intensity  of  the  lines 
of  krypton  and  xenon  is  best  indicated  in  Fig  17,  p.  109. 


72  ISOTOPES 

61.  Mercury  (At.  Wt.  200-6). — As  this  element  is  em- 
ployed both  in  the  apparatus  for  the  admission  of  gas  and 
in  the  Gaede  vacuum  pump,  it  would  be  very  difficult  to 
eliminate  it  entirely  from  the  discharge.  This  is  fortunately 
neither  necessary  nor  desirable  in  most  cases,  for  it  provides 
a  valuable  reference  scale  and,  for  some  reason  unknown, 
its  presence  is  definitely  beneficial  to  the  smooth  running 
of  the  discharge  tube. 

Mercury  is  abnormal  in  its  capacity  for  forming  multiply- 
charged  particles.  A  study  of  its  remarkable  parabolas  ^ 
enabled  Sir  J.  J,  Thompson  to  show  that  the  atom  of  mercury 
can  carry  no  less  than  eight  charges,  that  is  lose  eight  electrons. 
He  gives  reasons  for  considering  that  it  loses  aU  eight  at  once 
and  then  recaptures  them  one  at  a  time,  so  giving  rise  to  a 
series  of  parabolas  200/1,  200/2,  200/3,  etc.  The  brightest  is 
the  first,  which  is  due  to  atoms  which  have  recaptured  all  but 
one  electron  ;    the  others  are  progressively  fainter. 

Subjected  to  the  greater  resolving  power  of  the  mass  spectro- 
graph it  was  seen  at  once  that  mercury  was  a  complex  element. 
Its  first,  second,  third,  and  higher  order  fines  appeared  as  a 
series  of  characteristic  groups  around  positions  corresponding 
to  masses  200,  100,  66f,  etc.  Some  of  these  will  be  easily 
distinguished  on  the  spectra  reproduced.  The  second,  third 
and  fourth  order  groups  are  well  shown  in  Spectrum  VIII, 
Plate  IV.  Careful  study  of  the  group  shows  that  it  consists 
of  a  strong  line  202,  a  weak  one  204  and  a  strong  group  197-200 
which  cannot  be  resolved  on  the  present  instrument,  but 
which  in  aU  probability  contains  aU  the  four  integers  in  that 
range. 

62.  Boron  (At.  W.  10-90).  Fluorine  (At.  W.  19  00). 
Silicon  (At.  W.  28-3). — It  wiU  be  convenient  to  treat  of 
these  three  elements  together.  The  atomic  weights  of  boron 
and  fluorine  have  both  been  recently  redetermined  by  Smith 
and  Van  Haagen^  with  the  above  results.  On  the  atomic 
weight  of  sificon  there  is  some  divergence  of  opuiion.     The 

1  V.  Plate  I  (3). 

*  Smith  and  Van  Haagen,  Carnegie  Inst.  Washington  Pvhl.  No.  267, 
1918. 


PLATE    IV. 


^ 


28- f 

32-*' 
3^-" 


< 

gs 

n  i-i 

"  -6 

.    . 

C    i 

24  5-  ^  fc 

-16 

1 

«. 

-3S 

26-^  '■ 

9  5-  - 

"»  * 

-19 

/a--     -^ 

32—  " 

-20 

//-*'-5- 

•^ 

•-/Z 

12- -       '^ 

^ 

-23- S 

«• 

-24-5 

■40-' 


fe-75 
''^-78 


M 


76- 


44-*    • 


-/4-5 


44-  »  «  -28 


47-1 

-/o         48- 1 
49- 1 


i6- 


-7S 
S/ 


-/9 


-9  5 


/9- 


-^J' 


20 


40 


^3- 


M 


>-"> 

Co 

03 

c.^ 

^~^ 

c>1 

^ 

"1 

Mass  Spectra. 

(liij  Mnd  2><'i'i>ii'<><io)i  (if  the  ?j(litors  of  The  Philofrophical  Maqazine. 


CD 


ANALYSIS  OF  THE   ELEMENTS  73 

international  value  is  quoted  above,  but  Baxter,  Weatherell, 
and  Holmes  make  it  nearer  28*  1.^ 

After  a  failure  to  obtain  the  boron  lines  with  some  very 
impure  boron  hydride,  a  sample  of  boron  trifluoride  was  pre- 
pared from  boric  acid  and  potassium  borofluoride,  and  this 
gave  good  results.  Following  the  usual  practice,  it  was  mixed 
with  a  considerable  quantity  of  CO  3  before  introduction  into 
the  discharge-tube.  Very  complex  and  interesting  spectra 
were  at  once  obtained,  and  it  was  remarked  that  this  gas 
possessed  an  extraordinary  power  of  resurrecting  the  spectra 
of  gases  previously  used  in  the  apparatus.  Thus  the  char- 
acteristic, first  and  second  order  lines  of  krypton  were  plainly 
visible,  although  the  tube  had  been  washed  out  and  run  many 
times  since  that  gas  had  been  used.  This  property  of  hberating 
gases  which  have  been  driven  into  the  surface  of  the  discharge- 
bulb  is  doubtless  due  to  the  chemical  action  of  the  fluorine, 
hberated  during  the  discharge,  on  the  siUca  anticathode  and 
the  glass  walls.  After  running  some  time  the  corrosion  of 
the  anticathode  was  indeed  quite  visible  as  a  white  frost  over 
the  hottest  part. 

After  several  successful  series  of  spectra  had  been  secured, 
the  percentage  of  boron  trifluoride  in  the  gas  admitted  was 
increased  as  far  as  possible,  until  the  discharge  became  quite 
unmanageable  and  the  tube  ceased  to  work.  Just  before  it 
did,  however,  it  yielded  two  very  valuable  spectra  which 
confirmed  the  isotopic  nature  of  boron.  These  are  reproduced 
side  by  side  as  they  were  taken  (Spectra  I  &  II)  Plate  IV.  The 
fines  at  10  and  11  are  undoubtedly  both  first-order  lines  of 
boron.  The  hjrpothesis  that  these  might  be  due  to  neon 
liberated  by  the  action  mentioned  is  not  tenable,  both  on 
account  of  their  relative  intensities  and  the  absence  of  strong 
neon  first-order  lines.  Even  if  it  were,  it  could  not  explain 
the  presence  of  the  well-defined  lines  at  5  and  5-5  which  had 
never  been  obtained  before  at  aU,  and  which  must  be  second* 
order  lines  of  boron.  This  element  therefore  has  at  least  two 
isotopes  10  and  11.     The  relative  photographic  intensity  of 

^Baxter,  Weatherell  and  Holmes,  Joum.  Am,  Chem.  Soc,  42,  1194, 
1920. 


74  ISOTOPES 

the  lines  5  and  5-5  does  not  agree  well  with  an  atomic  weight 
as  high  as  10-9,  and  the  discrepancy  might  be  explained  by 
the  presence  of  a  third  isotope  at  12  ;  which  would  be  masked 
by  carbon,  for  it  has  not  yet  been  found  practicable  to  eliminate 
carbon  from  the  discharge.  But  Plate  IV,  Spectrum  IV, 
contradicts  this  suggestion  for,  as  will  be  shown  later,  the 
line  at  49  is  mainly  if  not  wholly  due  to  B^^Fj,  so  that  there 
should  also  be  a  Une  at  50  for  B^^j^^  ^he  line  at  49  is  very 
strong,  but  at  50  any  small  effect  there  may  be  can  safely 
be  ascribed  to  the  fourth  order  of  mercury.  The  evidence 
is  clearly  against  the  presence  of  a  third  isotope  of  boron. 

The  exceedingly  accurate  whole-number  value  for  the 
atomic  weight  of  fluorine  suggests  the  probabihty  of  this 
element  being  simple.  This  conclusion  is  borne  out  by  the 
strong  line  at  19-00  with  second-order  line  at  9-50.  The 
accompanying  line  at  20,  very  faint  in  Spectrum  II,  Plate 
IV,  is  no  doubt  HF.  As  there  is  no  evidence  whatever  to 
the  contrary,  fluorine  is  taken  to  be  a  simple  element  with 
an  atomic  weight  19. 

Having  adopted  these  values  for  boron  and  fluorine,  we 
may  now  apply  them  to  Spectra  III  and  IV,  Plate  IV,  taken 
with  boron  trifluoride.  Consider  first  the  group  of  three  very 
strong  lines  47,  48,  and  49.  The  last  two  are  to  be  expected 
as  being  due  to  B^'^Fa  and  B^^Fg  respectively,  but  since  there 
is  no  evidence  of  a  boron  9  or  a  fluorine  18,  line  47  cannot 
be  due  to  a  compound  of  these  elements.  But  line  47  only 
appeared  when  BF3  was  introduced,  and  so  must  be  due  to 
silicon  fluoride  formed  by  the  action  of  the  fluorine  on  the 
glass  walls  and  the  silica  anticathode. 

To  test  this  the  BF3  was  washed  out  and  replaced  by  SiF,, 
which  had  been  made  by  the  action  of  sulphuric  acid  on  cal- 
cium fluoride  and  silica  in  the  usual  way.  This  greatly  reduced 
the  lines  48  and  49,  and  so  they  must  be  attributed  to  boron 
compounds.  At  the  same  time  line  47  remained  very  strong, 
and  was  evidently  due  to  a  compound  Si^^F,  so  that  silicon 
has  a  predominant  constituent  28.  This  conclusion  is  further 
supported  by  the  presence  of  very  strong  lines  at  66,  Si^^Fa 
and  85,  Si^^Fg. 

The  chemical  atomic  weight  shows  that  this  cannot  be  its 


ANALYSIS   OF  THE   ELEMENTS  75 

only  constituent.  Lines  at  29,  48,  67,  and  86  all  suggest  a 
silicon  of  atomic  weight  29.  Practically  conclusive  proof  of 
this  is  given  in  Spectrum  V,  Plate  IV,  which  shows  its  second- 
order  line  unmistakably  at  14-50.  The  only  other  reasonable 
origin  of  this  line,  namely  second-order  B^'^F,  is  eliminated 
by  the  fact  that  there  is  no  trace  of  a  line  at  10  in  this  spectrum. 
The  evidence  of  a  silicon  of  atomic  weight  30  is  of  a  much 
more  doubtful  character.  Its  presence  is  suggested  by  the 
lines  30,  49,  68,  and  87,  but  the  possibility  of  hydrogen  com- 
pounds makes  this  evidence  somewhat  untrustworthy,  and 
no  proof  can  be  drawn  from  a  second-order  line  15,  as  this  is 
normally  present  and  is  due  to  CHg.  On  the  other  hand,  if 
we  accept  a  mean  atomic  weight  as  high  as  28-3,  the  relative 
intensity  of  the  lines  due  to  compounds  of  Si^^  and  Si^^ 
indicates  the  probable  presence  of  an  isotope  of  higher  mass. 
These  considerations  taken  with  the  complete  absence  of  any 
definite  evidence  to  the  contrary  make  the  possibiUty  of 
Si3o  worth  taking  into  account. 

63.  Molecular  lines  of  the  Second  Order. — ^The  work  of 
Sir  J.  J.  Thomson  on  multiply -charged  positive  rays  showed 
very  definitely  that  molecules  carrying  more  than  one  charge 
were  at  least  exceedingly  rare,^  for  not  a  single  case  was 
observed  which  could  not  be  explained  on  other  grounds. 
Up  to  the  time  of  the  experiments  with  the  fluorine  compounds 
the  same  could  be  said  of  the  results  with  the  mass-spectrograph. 
This  absence  of  multiply-charged  molecular  fines,  though 
there  is  no  particular  theoretical  reason  for  it,  has  been  used 
as  confirmatory  evidence  on  the  elementary  nature  of  doubtful 
fines. 

The  spectra  obtained  with  BF3  show  lines  for  which  there 
appears  no  possibility  of  explanation  except  that  of  doubly- 
charged  compound  molecules.  The  two  most  obvious  of  these 
may  be  seen  on  Plate  IV,  Spectrum  III,  and  at  the  extreme 
left-hand  end  of  Spectrum  IV.  They  correspond  to  masses 
23-50  and  24-50,  the  first  being  quite  a  strong  fine.  Were 
there  no  fines  of  lower  order  corresponding  to  these,  the  whole- 
number  rule  might  be  in  question  ;    but  aU  doubt  is  removed 

^  J.  J.  Thomson,  Rays  of  Positive  Electricity,  p.  64. 


76  ISOTOPES 

by  the  fact  that  the  lines  47  and  49  are  two  of  the  strongest 
on  the  plate.  A  comparison  of  several  spectra  upon  which 
these  Unes  occur  shows  a  definite  intensity  relation  which 
practically  confirms  the  conclusion  that  the  first  pair  of  lines 
are  true  second-order  lines  corresponding  to  the  first  order 
lines  of  the  second  pair.  Now  fines  47  and  49  cannot  by 
any  reasonable  argument  be  elementary,  they  must  in  fact 
be  due  to  compounds  of  fluorine  with  boron  B^Tj  or  sificon 
Si^^F,  or  due  to  both.  Further  evidence  of  the  capabifity 
of  fluorine  compounds  to  carry  two  charges  is  offered  by  fine 
33-50,  which  is  undoubtedly  the  second-order  fine  corresponding 
to  67,  i.e.  B^^Fa  or  Si^^Fg.  So  far  as  results  go,  fluorine 
appears  to  be  unique  in  its  power  of  yielding  doubly- charged 
molecules  in  sufficient  number  to  produce  second-order  fines 
of  considerable  strength. 

64.  Bromine  (At.  Wt.  79-92).— The  results  with  this 
element  were  definite  and  easy  to  interpret.  Its  chemical 
combining  weight  is  known  with  great  certainty,  and  is  very 
nearly  the  whole  number  80.  It  was  rather  a  surprise,  there- 
fore, that  it  should  give  a  mass-spectrum  which  showed  it  to 
consist  of  a  mixture  of  two  isotopes  in  practicaUy  equal  pro- 
portions. Methyl  bromide  was  used  for  the  experiments,  and 
one  of  the  results  is  reproduced  in  Plate  IV,  Spectrum  VI. 
The  characteristic  group  consists  of  four  fines  at  79,  80,  81, 
and  82.  79  and  81,  apparently  of  equal  intensity,  are  much 
the  stronger  pair,  and  are  obviously  due  to  elementary  bro- 
mines. This  result  is  practically  confirmed  by  second-order 
fines  at  39-5  and  40-5  too  faint  to  reproduce,  but  easily  seen 
and  measured  on  the  original  negative.  The  fainter  pair,  80 
and  82,  are  the  expected  Unes  of  the  two  corresponding  hydro- 
bromic  acids. 

65.  Sulphur  (At.  Wt.  32-06).— Spectra  VII  and  VIII, 
Plate  IV,  show  the  effect  of  the  addition  of  sulphur  dioxide 
to  the  gas  in  the  discharge-tube.  Above  each  is  a  comparison 
spectrum  taken  immediately  before  the  gas  was  admitted,  on 
the  same  plate  with  approximately  the  same  fields.  The  very 
marked  strengthening  of  fines  32  and  44  is  no  doubt  due  to  S 
and  CS.     New  fines  appear  at  33  SH,  34  SH^,  60  COS,  64  S0« 


ANALYSIS  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       77 

or  Sa,  and  76  CS2.  It  may  be  noticed  that  lines  32,  60  and  76 
are  accompanied  by  a  faint  line  one  unit  higher  and  a  rather 
stronger  line  two  units  higher.  In  the  first  case  it  is  certain 
and  in  the  others  probable  that  these  are,  at  least  partly,  due 
to  hydrogen  addition  compounds.  If  a  higher  isotope  of 
sulphur  exists,  as  is  suggested  by  the  chemical  atomic  weight, 
it  seems  unlikely  that  this  should  have  mass  33,  for  this  would 
have  to  be  present  to  the  amount  of  6  per  cent.,  and  should 
give  a  line  at  35  one-thirteenth  the  strength  of  34  (normal 
SH2).  No  such  Une  is  visible.  A  sulphur  of  atomic  weight  34 
present  to  the  extent  of  3  per  cent,  is  more  Hkely,  but  there 
is  hardly  enough  evidence  as  yet  to  warrant  its  serious  con- 
sideration. 

66.  Phosphorus  (At.  Wt.  31  04).  Arsenic  (At.  Wt. 
74-96). — The  gases  phosphine  PH3  and  arsine  AsHg  were  used 
in  the  experiments  on  these  elements,  and  the  results  were  of 
notable  similarity.  The  mass-spectrum  of  each  gas  was 
characterised  by  a  group  of  four  lines.  The  first  and  strongest 
doubtless  due  to  the  element  itself,  the  second  rather  weaker 
due  to  the  monohydride,  the  third  very  faint  to  the  dihydride, 
and  the  fourth  fairly  strong  to  the  trihydride.  The  spectrum 
of  AsHs  is  shown  in  Spectrum  IX,  Plate  IV  ;  that  of  phos- 
phorus is  similar  but  its  lines  are  weak,  and  therefore  unsuited 
to  reproduction.  Both  elements  appear  to  have  no  isotopes, 
and  neither  give  visible  second-order  Unes. 

67.  Selenium  (At.  Wt.  79  2).  Tellurium  (At.  Wt. 
127-5). — The  compounds  used  in  the  experiments  on  these 
elements  were  selenium  hydride,  made  by  passing  a  stream  of 
hydrogen  through  boihng  selenium,  and  telliu-ium  methyl. 
Complete  failure  resulted  in  both  cases.  There  was,  indeed, 
on  one  spectrum  an  exceedingly  faint  line  at  79,  but  no  shred 
of  reliable  evidence  could  be  found  to  ascribe  it  to  an  isotope 
of  Se.  In  the  case  of  tellurium  no  trace  of  any  fine  near  127 
could  be  discovered.  The  failure  is  unfortunate  in  the  case 
of  Te  on  account  of  its  weU-known  anomalous  position  in  the 
periodic  table  ;  in  the  case  of  Se  particularly  so  for  the  follow- 
ing reasons  : — If  the  accepted  atomic  weight  is  even  approxi- 
mately correct  this  element  must  have  one  isotope,  at  least, 


78  ISOTOPES 

of  atomic  weight  greater  than  78.  But  the  numbers  79,  80, 
81,  82,  83,  84,  are  already  filled  by  isotopes  of  Br  and  Kr, 
so  that  it  is  extremely  probable  that  one  of  the  isotopes  of  Se 
has  an  atomic  weight  identical  with  one  of  an  element  having 
a  different  atomic  number,  i.e.  is  an  Isobare.  The  latter  are 
known  to  exist  among  radioactive  elements,  but  none  have  so 
far  been  discovered  during  the  work  on  mass  spectra. 

68.  Iodine  (At.  Wt.  126-92).— The  results  with  this 
element  were  fortunately  both  definite  and  conclusive.  Methyl 
iodide  was  employed,  its  vapour  being  introduced  mixed  with 
CO  8  and  CH4.  It  gave  one  strong  line  at  127  satisfactorily 
confirmed  by  another  single  line  at  142  due  to  CH3I. 

This  proves  iodine  to  be  a  simple  element  in  an  unequivocal 
manner,  a  rather  unexpected  result  since  all  the  speculative 
theories  of  element  evolution,  by  Van  den  Broek  and  others, 
predict  a  complex  iodine. 

69.  Antimony  (At.  Wt.  120-2).— Antimony  hydride  SbH, 
was  used.  This  was  made  by  dissolving  antimony  magnesium 
aUoy  in  dilute  acid.  Unlike  the  corresponding  arsenic  com- 
pound it  gave  an  entirely  negative  result,  no  fine  whatever 
being  distinguishable  in  the  region  expected  from  the  atomic 
weight.  This  failure  is  probably  to  be  ascribed  to  the  exceed- 
ingly unstable  nature  of  the  antimony  compound. 

70.  Tin  (At.  Wt.  118-7).- Tin  tetrachloride  was  employed 
in  the  investigation  of  this  element.  The  vapour  of  this 
compound  attacks  the  tap  grease  used  in  the  apparatus,  which 
makes  it  extremely  difficult  to  deal  with.  The  results  were 
entirely  negative  except  in  one  case.  On  this  occasion  a 
second  attempt  to  get  the  selenium  fine  from  selenium  hydride 
was  actually  in  progress,  but  a  good  deal  of  SnCli  vapour  had 
been  introduced  previously,  and  the  chlorine  lines  were  so 
intense  that  some  "  resurrected  "  compound  of  chlorine  must 
have  been  the  principal  factor  in  the  discharge.  For  some 
unknown  reason  the  discharge  tube  was  working  abnormally 
well.  On  one  of  the  spectra  then  obtained.  Spectrum  II,  a 
group  of  lines  of  even  integral  mass  116,  118,  120,  122,  124 
(followed  by  iodine  127)  could  be  distinguished  and  some  of 


ANALYSIS   OF  THE   ELEMENTS  79 

these  may  possibly  have  been  due  to  isotopes  of  tin.  This 
supposition  is  slightly  strengthened  by  the  appearance  of  a 
still  fainter  group  of  odd  integral  mass  containing  the  lines 
155,  157,  etc.,  which  might  be  isotopic  tin  monochlorides.  It 
has  not  been  found  possible  to  repeat  this  result,  so  that  no 
reUance  is  to  be  put  upon  it. 

71.  Nickel  (At.  Wt.  58-68). — Nickel  received  attention 
early  in  the  history  of  positive  rays  as  it  is  one  of  the  elements 
whose  atomic  weight  is  out  of  order  in  the  periodic  table  ; 
it  should  be  heavier,  not  lighter  than  cobalt  (58-97).  It  is 
amenable  to  treatment  in  the  ordinary  discharge  tube  for  it 
forms  an  easily  vaporisable  carbonyl  compound  Ni(C0)4. 
Unfortunately  this  is  very  rapidly  decomposed  by  the  electric 
discharge,  so  that  in  the  early  experiments  made  by  Sir  J.  J. 
Thomson  the  walls  of  the  discharge  bulb  became  coated  with 
a  black  deposit  of  the  metal,  it  was  impossible  to  maintain  a 
steady  discharge  for  a  sufficient  time,  and  no  satisfactory 
parabola  corresponding  to  the  element  could  be  obtained. 

Quite  recently  ^  by  the  use  of  abnormally  high  current 
intensities  in  the  discharge  it  has  been  found  possible  to  over- 
come these  difficulties  to  some  extent  and  to  obtain  a  satis- 
factory mass  spectrum  from  a  mixture  of  nickel  carbonyl  and 
carbon  dioxide.  This  consists  of  two  lines,  the  stronger  at  58 
and  the  weaker  at  60.  They  are  most  conveniently  placed 
between  the  mercury  groups  of  the  third  and  fourth  order, 
with  which  they  can  be  compared  with  an  accuracy  of  one- 
tenth  per  cent.  The  results  were  also  checked  by  comparison 
with  the  CO  2  hne  at  44,  and  appear  to  be  integral  within  the 
above  error.  Nickel  therefore  consists  of  at  least  two  isotopes. 
The  intensities  of  the  lines  are  about  in  the  ratio  2:1,  and 
this  agrees  with  the  accepted  atomic  weight.  It  may  be 
noticed  that  had  the  heavier  isotope  preponderated  the  atomic 
weight  of  the  element  would  have  appeared  normally  placed 
in  the  periodic  table. 

^Nature,  June  23,  1921,  p.  520. 


CHAPTER  VII 
ANALYSIS    OF   THE    ELEMENTS    (Continued) 

72.  Positive  Rays  of  Metallic  Elements. — Positive  rays 
of  most  of  the  metallic  elements  cannot  be  obtained  by  the 
ordinary  discharge-tube  method,  since  in  general  they  have 
extremely  low  vapom'-pressures  and  are  incapable  of  forming 
stable  volatile  compounds.  Mercury  is  a  notable  exception  to 
this  rule,  and  its  rays  are  exceedingly  easy  to  produce. 

Positively  charged  rays  which  appeared  to  be  atoms  of  the 
alkali  metals  were  first  observed  by  Gehrcke  and  Reichen- 
heim.  ^  They  obtained  them  by  two  distinct  methods  :  the 
first,  which  may  be  conveniently  called  the  "  Hot  Anode  " 
method,  consisted  in  using  as  anode  of  the  discharge-tube  a 
platinum  strip  coated  with  a  salt  of  the  metal  and  electrically 
heated  by  an  external  battery.  The  second  device,  with  which 
they  performed  most  of  their  pioneer  work  on  Anode  Rays, 
was  to  use  a  composite  anode  of  special  construction  which 
worked  without  the  need  of  external  heating. 

73.  Dempster's  analysis  of  Magnesium  (At.  Wt. 
24-32). — The  experiments  of  Dempster  with  the  "  hot  anode  " 
method  of  generating  positive  rays  have  already  been  noted,  ^ 
Later,  3  he  announced  the  very  important  discovery  of  the 
three  isotopes  of  magnesium,  and  subsequently  published  an 
account  of  the  experimental  details,*  The  magnesium  rays 
were  obtained  from  a  piece  of  the  metal  which  was  heated 
electrically  by  a  coil  of  wire,  and  at  the  same  time  bombarded 
by  electrons  from  a  Wehnelt  cathode.     The  occluded  gases 

^  Gehrcke  and  Reichenheim,  Ver.  d.  Phys.  OeselL,  8,  659,  1906 ; 
9,  76,  200,  376,     1907  ;    10,  217,     1908. 

"P,  31,  »  Dempster,  Science,  Dec,  10,     1920. 

*  Dempster,  Proc.  Nat.  Ac.  Sci.,  7,  45,     1921. 

80 


ANALYSIS   OF  THE  ELEMENTS 


81 


were  first  driven  off,  and  then  the  heating  current  was  increased 
till  the  metal  was  slightly  vaporised  and  the  magnesium  lines 
appeared.  The  following  description  of  the  analysis  and  the 
curves  obtained  are  taken  direct  from  Dempster's  paper  : — 


/ 

\    1 

\ 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\J 

V 

Vj 

/ 

\ 

22  23  24    .         25  Z6  Z7 

Atomic  Weight. 
Fig.  13. — Curve  for  Magnesium. 


22 


28 


29 


r 

I 

I 

~^         / 

■>) 

</ 

/ 

1/ 

V 

V 

\ 

23 


27 


24  25  26 

Axomic  Wei^^ht, 

Fig.  14. — Curve  for  Magnesium 


28 


29 


82  ISOTOPES 

' '  The  charged  atoms  of  different  atomic  weights  are  succes- 
sively brought  on  to  the  detecting  electrode  by  keeping  the 
magnetic  field  constant  and  varying  the  potential  which  accele- 
rates the  rays,  the  potential  required  being  inversely  propor- 
tional to  the  mass  of  the  particles.  Thus,  if  one  atomic  weight 
is  known  the  others  may  be  found.  Due  to  the  finite  width 
of  the  slits,  each  element  gives  a  curve,  on  the  atomic  weight 
scale,  which  is  theoretically  a  linear  increase  to  a  maximum 
and  then  a  Unear  decrease.     The  width  half  way  to  the  maxi- 

2  Sf 
mum  is  given  by  m.    —  where  m  is  the  atomic  weight,  S  the 

CL 

slit  width  and  d  the  diameter  of  the  circle  in  which  the  rays 
travel.  Under  good  vacuum  conditions  this  theoretical 
sharpness  is  practically  obtained.  For  1  mm.  slits  this  width 
of  the  curves  should  thus  be  one-haK  a  unit  on  the  atomic 
weight  scale.  The  former  measurement  with  the  apparatus 
and  the  magnetic  field  determinations  sufficed  to  locate  elements 
between  20  and  30  within  one  unit,  and  identified  the  strong 
nitrogen  rays  (possible  carbon  monoxide)  of  molecular  weight 
28  which  are  given  off  when  the  metal  is  first  heated. 

"  One  series  of  experiments  was  as  follows.  After  heating 
the  magnesium  shghtly  and  pumping,  till  a  MacLeod  gauge 
gave  no  pressure  indication,  the  nitrogen  molecule  was  the 
only  particle  present.  The  heating  current  was  then  increased 
by  steps  to  vaporise  the  magnesium.  With  0*7  ampere,  28 
alone  was  present,  with  075  ampere  an  arc  apparently  struck 
as  the  cathode-anode  current  jumped  suddenly  to  five  times 
its  value.  The  electron  current  was  decreased  to  its  former 
value  by  cooling  the  cathode  and  the  rays  were  measured. 
It  was  found  that  three  strong  new  lines  had  appeared.  The 
new  lines  which  are  undoubtedly  due  to  magnesium  were  com- 
pared with  the  nitrogen  rays  which  were  still  faintly  present 
and  found  to  have  atomic  weights,  24,  25  and  26.  The  obser- 
vations are  illustrated  in  Fig.  13,  which  gives  the  current  or 
number  of  particles  for  different  atomic  weights.  The  nitrogen 
line  had  its  maximum  at  817  volts,  and  the  atomic  weight 
abscissae  are  28  x  817  divided  by  the  volts  appHed.  The 
ordinates  of  the  28  line  are  multiplied  by  10  in  plotting  to 
make   them    comparable   with   the   other   three   lines.     The 


ANALYSIS   OF  THE   ELEMENTS  83 

dotted  continuation  to  the  axis  indicates  the  sUght  overlapping 
of  the  Hnes.  We  conclude  that  magnesium  consists  of  three 
isotopes  of  atomic  weights  24,  25  and  26. 

"  Later  curves  made  with  steadier  discharge  conditions  are 
more  suitable  than  Fig.  13  for  measuring  the  relative  strengths 
of  the  components.  In  Fig.  13  there  appears  to  have  been  a 
drop  in  intensity  just  before  24  was  reached,  in  the  measure- 
ment from  high  to  low  atomic  weights.  The  curve  is  of  interest 
as  still  containing  28  faintly  and  so  serving  accurately  to 
locate  the  weights  which  otherwise  would  have  been  uncertain 
to  a  fraction  of  a  unit. 

"  Fig.  14  is  one  of  several  later  curves  taken  under  steadier 
conditions.  These  all  have  very  closely  the  same  appearance. 
The  components  25  and  26  are  present  very  nearly  in  equal 
amounts  ;  in  some  measurements  25  was  found  about  nine- 
tenths  the  intensity  of  26.  The  component  at  24  is  approxi- 
mately 6  times  as  strong  as  the  one  at  26.  The  ratio  of  1  :  1 :  6 
gives  an  average  atomic  weight  24-375,  which  is  in  as  good 
agreement  with  the  accepted  atomic  weight  for  magnesium 
as  could  be  expected  with  the  wide  slits  used  in  these  first 
experiments." 

74.  The  mass -spectra  of  the  alkali  metals. — In  order 
to  analyse  the  metals  of  this  group  a  modification  of  Gehrcke 
and  Reichenheim's  hot  anode  method  was  employed  by  the 
writer  to  generate  the  positive  rays.  After  a  certain  amount 
of  initial  difficulty  in  technique  had  been  overcome  this  gave 
satisfactory  results.  ^ 

The  apparatus  for  producing  the  rays  was  very  simple,  and  will 
be  readily  understood  from  the  figure  (Fig.  15).  The  hot 
anode  A  is  a  strip  of  platinum  foil  "03  mm.  thick,  about  2  mm. 
wide  by  7  mm.  long,  welded  to  the  two  stout  platinum  leads 
which  are  fused  through  the  glass  at  C.  It  was  raised  to  the 
required  temperature  by  current  from  one  large  storage-cell 
connected  through  a  rheostat  as  shown.  As  the  anode  is  of 
necessity  the  high-potential  pole  of  a  discharge -tube  arranged 
to  give  positive  rays,  this  heating  arrangement  had  to  be  very 
carefully  insulated.     The  anode  was  mounted  on  a  ground 

1  Aston,  Phil.  Mag.,  42,  436,     1921. 


84  ISOTOPES 

joint  as  indicated  so  that  it  could  be  easily  removed  and 
replaced.  The  discharge-tube  was  cylindrical,  about  4  cm. 
in  diameter,  mounted  concentric  to  the  axis  of  the  perforated 
cathode  K.  A  side  tube  was  fitted  at  B  which  could  be  cooled 
in  Hquid  air  ;  in  some  of  the  experiments  this  was  charged 
with  charcoal. 


I.p   \ ^=^  I   (Eh^ 


HW\M 
Fig.  15. — Hot  Anode  Discharge  Tube. 


The  anode  was  placed  immediately  opposite  the  perfora- 
tion of  the  cathode  and  about  1  cm.  away  from  it.  The 
platinum  strip  was  bent  at  one  end  into  a  U-shaped  channel 
into  which  the  salts  could  be  melted.  The  discharge  was 
maintained  by  a  large  induction-coil  used  in  the  previous 
work  on  mass  spectra  and  rectified  by  means  of  a  valve  V. 

75.  Experiments  with  the  Parabola  method  of 
analysis. — In  the  preUminary  experiments  the  analysis  of 
the  rays  was  performed  by  Sir  J.  J.  Thomson's  "  parabola  " 
method,  since  this  gives  the  maximum  general  information, 
and  it  was  only  when  suitable  conditions  and  technique  had 
been  ascertained  that  the  mass  spectrograph  was  applied. 

The  general  procedure  was  to  pump  out  the  discharge-tube 
to  the  lowest  possible  pressure,  far  lower  than  that  necessary 
to  prevent  all  discharge  with  the  anode  cold,  and  then  to 
heat  up  the  anode  until  the  discharge  started.  This  usually 
happened  at  dull  red  heat,  and  by  very  careful  adjustment  of 
the  temperature  and  of  the  primary  current  in  the  coil  it  was 
possible,  under  favourable  conditions,  to  maintain  a  fairly 
steady  current  of  1  to  2  miUiamperes  at  a  potential  of  about 
20,000  volts. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  arrangement  resembles  that  of  a 
Coolidge  X-ray  tube  reversed  pole  for  pole,  and  it  was  hoped 
that  it  might  share  the  outstanding  controllability  of  that 
device  ;   but  that  expectation  was  only  very  partially  realised, 


ANALYSIS  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       85 

The  mechanism  of  the  discharge  is  extremely  obscm-e,  for  the 
current  intensity  is,  of  course,  enormously  in  excess  of  that 
to  be  expected  from  the  ordinary  thermionic  release  of  positive 
ions  from  the  hot  anode.  ^  There  was  very  little  visible  glow 
in  the  tube,  the  X-radiation  was  small  and,  although  a  faint 
cloud  of  sodium  Ught  nearly  always  appeared  in  front  of  the 
red-hot  anode,  the  pressure  was  too  low  for  the  anode  rays 
to  be  visible  ;  their  point  of  impact  with  the  cathode  could, 
however,  be  inferred  from  the  scintillations  on  its  surface. 

Observations  of  this  effect  lead  to  the  conjecture  that  the 
bulk  of  the  rays  originate  not  from  the  surface  of  the  salt 
itself  but  from  that  of  the  heated  platinum,  and  also  that  some 
points  on  this  are  much  more  active  than  others,  giving  rise 
to  jets  of  rays.  The  direction  of  these  jets  seemed  to  depend 
on  the  local  configuration  of  the  strip  and  was  beyond  prac- 
tical control.  The  obvious  device  of  moving  the  anode  about 
by  means  of  the  ground  joint  to  get  a  radiant  point  in  the 
required  place  could  not  be  applied,  for  the  parabolas  were 
never  bright  enough  to  be  visible  on  the  willemite  screen. 
To  add  to  these  difficulties  the  salt  disappeared  very  rapidly, 
in  some  cases  in  a  few  minutes.  Consequently  exposures 
were  very  limited  in  duration,  and  even  in  the  most  favourable 
cases  the  results  rarely  had  a  satisfactory  intensity. 

The  preliminary  experiments  were  done  with  sodium  phos- 
phate, and  before  long  encouraging  results  were  obtained. 
In  all  the  successful  exposures  only  a  single  parabola  appeared, 
and  this  showed  that — although  the  method  on  account  of 
the  number  of  inevitable  failures  is  an  exasperating  one  to 
use — as  a  means  of  identifying  isotopes  it  has  the  great  merit 
of  producing  the  positive  rays  of  the  metals  and  no  others. 
This  characteristic  seems  to  be  due  to  the  very  low  pressure 
employed  and  also  possibly  to  the  position  of  the  anode  itself, 
which  prevents  any  positive  rays  generated  in  more  distant 
parts  of  the  tube  from  ever  reaching  the  perforation  in  the 
cathode  in  the  necessary  axial  direction. 

Such  a  selective  action  has  two  very  important  results. 
In  the  first  place,  it  eliminates  the  many  ambiguities  of  the 

1  Richardson,  The  Emission  oj  Electricity  from  Hot  Bodies,  p.  234  et 
8eq.,  Longmans,  1916. 


86  ISOTOPES 

ordinary  mass  spectrum  due  to  multiply-charged  rays,  or  to 
hydrogen  and  other  addition  products  ;  but,  in  the  second,  it 
prevents  the  use  of  the  oxygen  line  as  a  comparison  standard. 
As  soon  as  it  was  demonstrated  beyond  any  reasonable  doubt 
that  sodium  was  a  simple  element  (and  its  chemical  atomic 
weight  is  so  exactly  integral  on  the  oxygen  scale  as  to  be 
conclusive  corroboration)  it  was  taken  as  standard  at  23. 

76.  Lithium  (At.  Wt.  6-94). — The  most  successful  experi- 
ment done  with  the  parabola  method  of  analysis  was  one  in 
which  a  mixture  of  sodium  and  lithium  phosphates  was  em- 
ployed (this  contained  traces  of  potassium  salts).  By  great 
good  fortune  a  very  strong  jet  of  rays  must  have  been  directed 
along  the  axis  and  three  satisfactory  exposures  were  obtained 
before  the  anode  dried  up.  One  of  these  is  reproduced  in 
Plate  I  (5)  A  strong  parabola  at  7  and  a  weak  one  at  6  demon- 
strate clearly  that  lithium  is  a  complex  element,  as  its  chemical 
atomic  weight  6-94  leads  one  to  expect.  This  result,  which 
was  announced  by  the  writer  and  G.  P.  Thomson  in  Nature, 
February  24th,  was  confirmed  independently  by  Dempster  ^ 
using  the  method  described  for  magnesium.  The  several 
photographs  here  considered  all  gave  approximately  the  same 
ratio  of  intensities,  and  they  corresponded  as  well  as  was  to 
be  expected  with  the  accepted  atomic  weight.  On  the  other 
hand,  G.  P.  Thomson's  parabolas  (which  were  obtained  with 
a  composite  anode)  and  Dempster's  electrical  measurements 
suggest  a  more  nearly  equal  intensity  ratio  and  this  ratio 
appears  to  vary. 

77.  Sodium  (At.  Wt.  23-00). — Sodium  gave  the  brightest 
effects,  and  its  single  line  was  obtained  so  intense  that  the 
presence  of  another  constituent  to  the  extent  of  even  less  than 
1  per  cent,  could  probably  have  been  detected.  It  may  there- 
fore be  safely  regarded  as  a  simple  element. 

The  parabola  method  of  analysis  is  perfectly  satisfactory 
in  the  case  of  so  Hght  an  element  as  lithium,  but  cannot  be 
used  for  the  critical  examination  of  the  heavier  members 
of  the  group  ;   and  so  the  apparatus  for  the  production  of  the 

^Dempster,  Science,  April  15,  1921. 


ANALYSIS   OF  THE   ELEMENTS  87 

rays  was  fitted,  to  the  mass  spectrograph  ah-eady  described.  ^ 
The  experimental  difficulties  became  now  very  serious  indeed, 
for,  in  addition  to  those  already  indicated,  there  was  no  means 
of  finding  the  most  suitable  voltage  to  apply  to  the  electro- 
static plates.  In  normal  cases  this  is  done  by  visual  inspection 
of  the  hydrogen  lines,  but  here  it  could  only  be  guessed  at. 
Under  these  conditions  it  is  not  a  matter  for  surprise  that 
the  photographs,  though  sufficient  for  the  purpose  of  detecting 
isotopes,  only  gave  very  faint  lines  and  so  cannot  be  reproduced 
as  illustrations. 

78.  Potassium  (At.  Wt.  39-10). — A  mixture  of  potassium 
sulphate,  potassium  bromide,  and  a  Httle  sodium  phosphate 
was  now  used  on  the  anode,  and  after  several  unsuccessful 
attempts  some  fairly  satisfactory  spectra  were  obtained  which 
contained  both  sodimn  and  potassium  lines.  Using  the 
former  as  standard  the  latter  consisted  of  a  bright  component 
at  39,  and  a  very  faint  component  at  41. 

79.  Rubidium  (At.  Wt.  85-45). — Rubidium  chloride  was 
now  added  to  a  Httle  of  the  mixture  used  in  the  potassium 
experiments  and  spectra  containing  the  potassium  and  rubi- 
dium hnes  were  obtained.  Rubidium  is  very  definitely  double. 
Its  components  are  more  nearly  equal  in  intensity  than  those 
of  Hthium  or  potassium.  Measured  against  the  potassium 
line  39  its  stronger  component  is  85  and  the  weaker  87.  The 
intensity  ratio  agrees  reasonably  well  with  the  accepted 
atomic  weight  85-45. 

80.  Caesium  (At.  Wt.  132-81).— When  a  mixture  of 
rubidium  chloride  and  caesium  chloride  was  used  evidence  of 
a  Une  at  133,  measured  against  the  two  rubidium  lines,  was 
soon  obtained.  Pure  caesium  chloride  was  then  substituted 
and  the  utmost  possible  exposure  given  to  search  for  a  Hghter 
component,  which  was  to  be  expected  from  the  fractional 
chemical  atomic  weight  132-81,  Although  by  this  means  the 
intensity  of  the  line  133  was  increased  to  a  satisfactory  pitch 
no  other  neighbouring  line  was  found.  If,  therefore,  a  fighter 
isotope  of  caesium   exists  it   must  differ  from   133  by  many 

1  V.  Chap.  V. 


88  ISOTOPES 

units — which  seems  very  unlikely — or  it  cannot  be  present  in 
proportion  sufficient  to  account  for  the  fractional  atomic 
weight  obtained  by  chemical  means. 

81.  Thompson's  work  on  Beryllium  (At.  Wt.  91). — 
G.  P.  Thomson  ^  has  recently  investigated  the  Anode  rays 
obtained  from  a  composite  anode  similar  to  that  devised  by 
Gehrcke  and  Reichenheim  ^  and  has  subjected  them  to  analysis 
by  the  parabola  method.  After  the  parabolas  of  the  isotopes 
of  lithium  had  been  successfully  obtained  ^  he  went  on  to 
investigate  the  element  beryllium.  The  best  results  were 
obtained  from  a  mixture  of  sodium  bromide  and  berylhum 
fluoride.  This  gave  a  single  strong  parabola  corresponding 
to  an  atomic  weight  9  (Na  =  23).  The  accepted  chemical 
atomic  weight  is  rather  higher,  so  a  careful  examination  was 
made  to  discern  any  possible  faint  companions  at  10  or  11. 
He  concludes  that  neither  of  these  can  be  present  to  any  sen- 
sible extent,  and  therefore  that  beryUium  is  probably  a  simple 
element. 

82.  Calcium  (At.  Wt.  4007)  and  Strontium  (At.  Wt. 
87-63). — Thomson  also  obtained  by  the  same  method  para- 
bolas due  to  these  elements,  the  latter  very  faint,  but  the 
resolution  at  his  disposal  was  too  low  to  decide  their  constitution. 
From  the  position  of  the  strong  parabola  of  calcium  he  con- 
cludes that  one  or  more  of  the  atomic  weights  39,  40,  41  were 
present ;  and  as  all  these  are  already  known  to  exist  as  isotopes 
of  either  potassium  or  argon,  it  follows  that  calcium  must  be 
an  isobare  of  one  or  other  of  these  elements.^ 

83.  Table  of  Elements  and  Isotopes. — The  following  Hst 
tabulates  the  results  contained  in  this  and  the  previous  Chapter. 
The  isotopes  of  complex  elements  are  given  in  the  order  of  the 
proportions  present.  Brackets  indicate  that  the  figures  are 
provisional  only. 

^  G.  P.  Thomson,  Phil.  Mag.,  42,  857,     1921. 

2  V.  p.  80. 

3  F.  p.  86. 

*  F.  p.   148. 


ANALYSIS   OF  THE  ELEMENTS 


89 


Table  of  Elements  and  Isotopes 


Element. 

Atomic 
number. 

Atomic 
weight. 

Minimum 

number  of 

isotopes. 

Masses  of  isotopes  in  order  of 
intensity. 

H      .      . 

1 

1-008 

1 

1-008 

He    .      . 

2 

4-00 

1 

4 

Li      .      . 

3 

6-94 

2 

7.  6 

Be     .      . 

4 

9-1 

1 

9 

B      .      . 

5 

10-9 

2 

11,  10 

C       .      . 

6 

12-00 

1 

12 

N      .      . 

7 

14-01 

1 

14 

0      .      . 

8 

16-00 

1 

16 

F       .      . 

9 

19-00 

1 

19 

Ne     .      . 

10 

20-20 

2 

20,  22,  (21) 

Na    .      . 

11 

23-00 

1 

23 

Mg    .      . 

12 

24-32 

3 

24,  25,  26 

Si      .      . 

14 

28-3 

2 

28,  29,  (30) 

P       .      . 

15 

31-04 

1 

31 

S.      .      . 

16 

32-06 

1 

32 

CI     .      . 

17 

35-46 

2 

35,  37,  (39) 

A      .      . 

18 

39-88 

2 

40,  36 

K      .      . 

19 

39-10 

2 

39,  41 

Ni     .      . 

28 

58-68 

2 

58,  60 

As     .      . 

33 

74-96 

1 

75 

Br     .      . 

35 

79-92 

2 

79,  81 

Kr     .      . 

36 

82-92 

6 

84,  86,  82,  83,  80,  78 

Rb    .      . 

37 

85-45 

2 

85,  87 

I        .      . 

53 

126-92 

1 

127 

X      .      . 

54 

130-2 

5,  (7) 

129,    132,    131,    134,    136, 

(128,  130  7) 

Cs      .      . 

55 

132-81 

1 

133 

Hg    .      . 

80 

200-6 

(6) 

(197-200),  202,  204 

Ca 
Zn 


Dempster's  later  results  (F.  p.   148) 
20  40-07  (2)  (40,   44   ?) 

30  65-37  (4)  (64,   66,   68, 


70) 


CHAPTER  VIU 
THE  ELECTRICAL  THEORY  OF  MATTER 

84.  The  Whole  Number  rule. — By  far  the  most  important 
result  of  the  measurements  detailed  in  the  foregoing  chapters  is 
that,  with  the  exception  of  hydrogen,  the  weights  of  the  atoms 
of  all  the  elements  measured,  and  therefore  almost  certainly 
of  all  elements,  are  whole  numbers  to  the  accuracy  of  experi- 
ment, in  most  cases  about  one  part  in  a  thousand.  Of  course, 
the  error  expressed  in  fractions  of  a  unit  increases  with  the 
weight  measured,  but  with  the  lighter  elements  the  divergence 
from  the  whole  number  rule  is  extremely  small. 

This  enables  the  most  sweeping  simplifications  to  be  made  in 
our  ideas  of  mass,  and  removes  the  only  serious  objection  to  a 
unitary  theory  of  matter. 

85.  The  Unitary  Theory  of  the  constitution  of  matter. — 

From  the  very  earhest  times  it  has  been  a  favourite  hj'pothesis 
that  all  matter  is  really  composed  of  one  primordial  substance, 
Air,  Fire,  Earth  and  Water  have  all  been  suggested  in  the  past. 
The  first  definite  theory  of  the  constitution  of  the  atoms  of 
the  elements  out  of  atoms  of  a  primordial  element  (Protyle, 
Urstoff,  etc.)  was  made  by  Prout  in  1815.  ProuVs  Hypothesis 
was  that  the  atoms  of  the  elements  were  different  aggregations 
of  atoms  of  hydrogen .  On  this  view  it  is  obvious  that  the  atomic 
weights  should  all  be  expressed  by  whole  numbers  when  the 
atomic  weight  of  hydrogen  itself  is  taken  as  unity.  Owing  to 
the  roughness  of  the  methods  available  and  the  considerable 
inaccuracies  of  the  atomic  weight  determinations  made  at  that 
time  there  was  fittle  to  disprove  the  hypothesis,  and  its  marked 
simplicity  gained  it  many  adherents.  But  as  time  went  on 
chemical  methods  grew  more  precise  and  it  became  more  and 
more  impossible  to  reconcile  experimental  results  with  integral 

90 


THE   ELECTRICAL  THEORY  OF  MATTER       91 

combining  weights  until  the  evidence  against  it  was  strong 
enough  to  cause  J.  S.  Stas  (1860-1865)  to  state:  "  I  have 
arrived  at  the  absolute  conviction,  the  complete  certainty,  so 
far  as  it  is  possible  for  a  human  being  to  attain  to  certainty  in 
such  matters,  that  the  law  of  Prout  is  nothing  but  an  illusion,  a 
mere  speculation  definitely  contradicted  by  experience." 

Nevertheless,  though  abandoned  temporarily  by  the  chemist 
as  impracticable,  the  idea  of  primordial  atoms  appealed  strongly 
to  the  mind  of  the  philosopher  and  the  physicist.  Herbert 
Spencer,  in  his  hypothesis  of  the  constitution  of  matter,  says : 
"  All  material  substances  are  divisible  into  so-called  elementary 
substances  composed  of  molecular  particles  of  the  same  nature 
as  themselves  ;  but  these  molecular  particles  are  complicated 
structures  consisting  of  congregations  of  truly  elementary 
atoms,  identical  in  nature  and  differing  only  in  position, 
arrangement,  motion,  etc,  and  the  molecules  or  chemical  atoms 
are  produced  from  the  true  or  physical  atoms  by  processes  of 
evolution  under  conditions  which  chemistry  has  not  been  able 
to  reproduce." 

The  discovery  of  the  electron,  the  proof  that  it  was  the  same 
whatever  the  atom  from  which  it  was  detached  and,  most 
important  of  all,  the  demonstration  by  Sir  J.  J.  Thomson  and 
others  that  electricity  could  simulate  the  known  properties 
of  matter,  gave  us  the  key  to  the  riddle  of  what  these  primordial 
atoms  really  are.  The  only  serious  obstacle,  the  fractional 
atomic  weights,  has  now  been  removed  so  that  there  is  nothing 
to  prevent  us  accepting  the  simple  and  fundamental  conclusion : 
— The  atoms  of  the  elements  are  aggregations  of  atoms  of 
positive  and  negative  electricity. 

86.  The  Atom  of  Negative  Electricity,  or  Electron. — 

The  fundamental  unit  of  negative  electricity  makes  its  appear- 
ance in  physical  phenomena  in  many  guises,  such  as  the  cathode 
ray  of  electrical  discharge,  the  beta  ray  of  radioactive  change, 
the  thermion  of  the  wireless  valve.  A  very  complete  account  of 
it  has  recently  been  published  by  Millikan^  so  that  it  is  not 
proposed  to  describe  its  history  and  properties  at  any  length 

^  The  Electron,  by  R.  A.  Millikan,  University  of  Chicago  Press,  1917. 


92  ISOTOPES 

here.  It  will  be  sufficient  to  note  a  few  of  its  more  important 
constants. 

Its  charge  e  is  given  by  Millikan  as  4-774  X  10  "  lo  E.S.U. 
The  most  reliable  measurements  of  e/m  for  the  electron,  at  low 
velocity,  give  the  value  5-30  x  10"  E.S.U.  Hence  its  mass  is 
almost  exactly  9*00  X  10~  ^s  grg,^  i845  times  less  than  the  mass 
of  the  hydrogen  atom,  or  0-00054  on  the  ordinary  scale  of  atomic 
weights  (Oxygen  =16). 

87.  The  atom  of  Positive  Electricity,  or  Proton. — Our 

physical  knowledge  of  this  body  is  not  nearly  so  complete  as 
that  of  its  counterpart  the  electron.  It  is  very  significant  that 
in  no  analysis  of  positive  rays  so  far  performed  have  we  been 
able  to  discover  a  particle  of  mass  less  than  that  of  the  hydrogen 
atom.  This  direct  result,  supported  as  it  is  by  many  less  direct 
lines  of  evidence,  leads  logically  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
hydrogen  positive  ray,  i.e.  the  positively  charged  part  remain- 
ing when  an  electron  is  detached  from  a  neutral  hydrogen  atom, 
is  the  atom  of  positive  electricity  itself.  The  name  "  proton  "  ^ 
was  suggested  for  it  by  Sir  Ernest  Rutherford  at  the  Cardiff 
meeting  of  the  British  Association  in  1920.  The  charge  on  a 
proton  is,  of  course,  equal  and  of  opposite  sign  to  that  on  the 
electron.  Its  mass  in  the  free  state  has  been  measured  directly  ^ 
and  is  practically  identical  with  that  of  the  neutral  atom  of 
hydrogen  1-66  x  10"  ^^  grs.,  or  1-007  on  the  oxygen  scale. ^ 

88.  The  Nucleus  Atom. — Certain  experimental  results, 
notably  the  scattering  of  alpha  rays,  led  Sir  Ernest  Rutherford 
in  1911*  to  formulate  an  atom  model  which  has  resulted  in  the 
most  remarkable  advances  in  both  physics  and  chemistry,  and 
is  now  almost  universally  accepted  as  correct  in  fundamental 
principle.  This  is  that  an  atom  of  matter  consists  of  a  central 
massive  nucleus  carrying  a  positive  charge  which  is  surrounded, 
at  distances  relatively  great  compared  with  its  diameter,  by 
"  planetary  "  electrons.  The  central  nucleus  contains  aU  the 
positive  electricity  in  the  atom,  and  therefore  practically  all  its 
mass.  The  weight  of  the  atom  and  its  radioactive  properties 
are  associated  with  the  nucleus;  its  chemical  properties  and 

^  From  Greek  Trpwrov  first — the  primary  substance. 

» P.  67.  '  V.  p.   105. 

*  Rutherford,  Phil.  Mag.  41,  669,     1911. 


THE  ELECTRICAL  THEORY  OF  MATTER        93 

spectrum,  on  the  other  hand,  are  properties  of  its  planetary 
electrons.  It  is  clear  that  in  a  neutral  atom  the  positive  charge 
on  the  nucleus  must  be  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  negative  charges 
on  the  planetary  electrons. 

89.  Moseley's  Atomic  Numbers. — The  scattering  experi- 
ments mentioned  above  indicated  that  the  net  positive  charge 
on  the  nucleus  (expressed  in  terms  of  the  natural  unit  e)  was 
roughly  equal  to  half  the  atomic  weight.  Now  if  we  arrange  the 
elements  in  order  of  atomic  weight,  starting  with  hydrogen,  each 
element  will  have  a  position  the  number  of  which  will  be  about 
half  its  atomic  weight.  It  was  suggested  by  Van  den  Broek 
that  this  atomic  number  might  be  equal  to  the  charge  on  the 
nucleus.  Two  years  after  the  formulation  of  the  nucleus  atom 
theory  Moseley  undertook  an  investigation  of  the  changes  which 
took  place  in  the  wave-length  of  the  X-rays  given  off  when 
various  elements  were  used  in  turn  as  anticathodes.  The  result 
of  this  piece  of  work,  now  classical,^  was  the  estabhshment  of  the 
most  important  generaUsation  in  the  history  of  chemistry  since 
Mendeleef 's  Periodic  Law.  Discussing  a  quantity  Q  related  to 
wave-length  Moseley  writes  : — 

"  It  is  at  once  evident  that  Q  increases  by  a  constant  amount 
as  we  pass  from  one  element  to  the  next,  using  the  chemical 
order  of  the  elements  in  the  periodic  system.  Except  in  the 
case  of  Nickel  and  Cobalt ,2  this  is  also  the  order  of  the  atomic 
weights.  While,  however,  Q  increases  uniformly  the  atomic 
weights  vary  in  an  apparently  arbitrary  manner,  so  that  an 
exception  in  their  order  does  not  come  as  a  surprise.  We  have 
here  a  proof  that  there  is  in  the  atom  a  fundamental  quantity, 
which  increases  by  regular  steps  as  we  pass  from  one  element  to 
the  next.  This  quantity  can  only  be  the  charge  on  the  central 
positive  nucleus,  of  the  existence  of  which  we  already  have 
definite  proof.  Rutherford  has  shown,  from  the  magnitude  of 
the  scattering  of  a  particles  by  matter,  that  the  nucleus  carries  a 
positive  charge  approximately  equal  to  that  of  A/2  electrons 
when  A  is  the  atomic  weight.  Barkla,  from  the  scattering  of 
X-rays  by  matter,  has  shown  that  the  number  of  electrons  in  an 

1  Moseley,  Phil.  Mag.,  26,  1031,     1913. 
»Cf.  Barkla,  Phil.  Mag.,  14,  408,     1907. 


94  ISOTOPES 

atom  is  roughly  A/2,  which  for  an  electrically  neutral  atom  is 
the  same  thing.  Now  the  atomic  weights  increase  on  the 
average  by  about  2  units  at  a  time,  and  strongly  suggest  the 
view  that  N  increases  from  atom  to  atom  always  by  a  single 
electronic  unit.  We  are  therefore  led  by  experiment  to  the 
view  that  N  is  the  same  as  the  number  of  the  place  occupied  by 
the  element  in  the  periodic  system.  This  atomic  number  is 
then  for  H  1,  for  He  2,  for  Li  3— for  Ca  20— for  Zn  30,  etc. 
This  theory  was  originated  by  Broek  ^  and  since  used  by  Bohr. 
We  can  confidently  predict  that  in  the  few  cases  in  which  the 
order  of  the  atomic  weights  A  clashes  with  the  chemical  order  of 
the  periodic  system  the  chemical  properties  are  governed  by  N, 
while  A  itself  is  probably  some  compHcated  function  of  N." 

Subsequent  work  has  supported  in  an  unquestionable  manner 
the  ideas  so  expressed  by  Moseley.  That  the  number  of  the 
element  in  the  order  of  the  periodic  table  is  actually  the  same  as 
the  positive  charge  on  the  nuclei  of  its  atoms,  expressed  of 
course  in  terms  of  the  natural  unit  of  electric  charge  e,  has  been 
proved  by  direct  experiment  for  some  of  the  heavier  elements. 
The  recent  work  of  Chadwick^  leaves  little  room  for  doubt  on 
that  point.  At  the  other  end  of  the  scale  all  the  known  pro- 
perties of  hydrogen  point  to  the  conclusion  that  its  atomic 
number  is  1 ;  its  exceptional  atomic  weight,  as  will  be  seen  later, 
is  itself  strong  corroborative  evidence  of  this. 

A  complete  table  of  the  elements  with  their  Atomic  Numbers, 
Atomic  Weights  and  isotopes  (where  these  are  known)  is  given 
on  page  142. 

From  Moseley's  law  of  atomic  numbers  the  explanation  of  the 
empirical  rule  of  radioactive  transformation  given  on  page  11 
follows  at  once.  An  alpha  particle  carries  two  positive  charges, 
a  beta  particle  one  negative  one.  If  therefore  the  atom  of 
a  radioactive  substance  emits  one  alpha  particle  from  its 
nucleus  it  naturally  descends  two  units  in  atomic  number,  that 
is  moves  back  two  places  in  the  periodic  table.  If  on  the  other 
hand  it  emits  one  beta  particle  it  clearly  moves  forward  one 
place,  for  by  the  operation  the  nucleus  has  acquired  one 
additional  charge. 

1  Van  den  Brock,  Phys.  Zeit.  14,  33,     1913. 
'Chadwick,  Phil.  Mag.,l40,  734,     1920. 


THE   ELECTRICAL  THEORY   OF  MATTER        95 

90.  The  Bohr  Atom. — In  this  atom  model  the  electrons 
outside  the  nucleus  are  supposed  to  be  in  a  state  of  continual 
revolution  about  it,  like  planets  round  the  sun.  This  rotation 
is  considered  to  take  place  in  orbits  defined  in  a  very  special 
manner  by  means  of  a  "  quantum  relation."  This  postulates 
that  when,  and  only  when,  an  electron  changes  its  orbit, 
radiation  is  given  out  and  the  energy  acquired  by  the  change  of 
orbit  is  entirely  given  off  as  radiation  of  frequency  v  where  the 
change  of  energy  equals  hv — where  h  is  Planck's  quantum  or 
element  of  action  (6-55  x  10"  ^^  C.G.S.).^  This  theory  lends  itself 
to  exact  mathematical  analysis  but  unfortunately  it  can  only  be 
worked  out  adequately  for  the  two  simplest  cases,  the  neutral 
hydrogen  atom  and  the  singly  charged  heUum  atom.  Here, 
however, its  success  is  most  remarkable;  for  not  only  is  itpossible 
to  calculate  by  its  means  the  wave  length  of  the  chief  series  lines 
of  the  hydrogen  spectrum,  to  an  accuracy  almost  unprecedented 
in  physics,  but,  by  applying  the  relativity  correction  for  change 
of  mass  with  velocity  to  the  rotating  electron,  the  fine  structure 
of  the  fines  and  the  effects  of  electric  and  magnetic  fields  have 
been  predicted  with  the  most  astonishing  exactness  by  Sommer- 
f eld,  Epstein  and  others.  ^  Bohr  has  recently  expressed  the  hope 
of  extending  his  theory  to  heavier  atoms  by  means  of  a  new 
device  which  he  terms  the  principle  of  "correspondence."^ 

91.  The  Lewis  Langmuir  Atom. — This  form  of  atom 
model  was  primarily  designed  to  afford  some  theoretical  basis 
for  the  numerous  general  quahtative  properties  of  elements  and 
their  compounds.  In  it  the  electrons  outside  the  nucleus  are 
supposed  to  be  at  rest  at,  or  vibrating  about,  definite  points. 
The  first  two  electrons  wiU  form  a  pair,  the  next  eight  will  tend 
to  set  in  positions  corresponding  to  the  eight  corners  of  a  cube, 
or  some  other  soUd  figure,  and  so  on.  In  this  way  we  shall  get  a 
series  of  shells  or  sheaths  one  outside  the  other.  Langmuir  has 
recently  *  reduced  his  postulates  to  the  following  three  : — 

(1)  The  electrons  in  atoms  tend  to  surround  the  nucleus  in 

iBohr,  Phil  Mag.  36,  1,  476,  857,     1913. 

2  Sommerfeld,  Atombau  and  SpektralUnien,  Brunschweig,  1921. 

3  Bohr,  Nature,  107,  104,     1921. 

*  Langmuir,  Brit.  Assoc.  Edinburgh  meeting,  1921. 


96  ISOTOPES 

successive  layers  containing  2,  8,  8,  18,  18,  32  electrons  re- 
spectively. 

(2)  The  atoms  may  be  coupled  together  by  one  or  more 
"  duplets  "  held  in  common  by  the  complete  sheaths  of  the 
atoms. 

(3)  The  residual  charge  on  the  atom  and  on  each  group  of 
atoms  tends  to  a  minimum. 

This  atom  model  is  not  amenable  to  mathematical  treatment, 
but  it  has  been  exceedingly  successful  in  accounting  for  the 
general  chemical  qualitative  properties  of  many  of  the  elements 
and  in  predicting  those  of  their  compounds. 

92.  Diagrammatical  representation  of  atoms  of 
Isotopes  and  Isobares. — The  accompanying  diagrams  (Fig. 
16)  are  intended  to  indicate  the  sort  of  arrangements  which 
may  take  place  in  atoms.  The  smaU  dark  circle  is  the  nucleus, 
the  number  of  protons  and  electrons  comprising  it  being  indi- 
cated by  the  numerals.  The  electrons  outside  the  nucleus  are 
indicated  by  small  Light  circles. 

(1)  is  an  atom  of  atomic  weight  6.  Its  nucleus  contains  6 
protons  and  3  electrons,  hence  its  atomic  number  is  3.  It  is  in 
fact  the  atom  of  the  lighter  isotope  of  lithium  of  atomic  weight 
6,  Li^.  To  be  electrically  neutral  it  must  have  3  electrons  out- 
side the  nucleus.  Now  the  principles  underlying  Langmuir's first 
postulate  are  derived  from  the  Periodic  Table  and  are  certainly 
correct.  Langmuir  explains  this  by  saying  that  the  first  two  of 
these  electrons  will  form  an  innermost  ring  or  shell  of  two. 
This  sheU  being  now  complete,  any  more  electrons  will  go  out- 
side and  start  the  next  shell  of  eight,  so  we  indicate  this  by 
putting  the  third  electron  in  a  circle  of  greater  diameter. 

Now  suppose  we  add  one  electron  and  one  proton  to  this  atom. 
If  both  enter  the  nucleus  we  shaU  get  the  configuration  repre- 
sented by  (2)  The  nuclear  charge  is  unaltered,  so  that  the 
arrangement  of  the  exterior  electrons  will  be  precisely  the  same- 
It  follows  that  all  properties  depending  on  these  electrons  such 
as  atomic  volume,  spectrum,  chemical  properties,  etc.,  will  be 
quite  unaltered.  But  the  weight  of  this  atom  is  now  7,  so  it 
is  an  isotope  of  lithium  ; '  it  is  actually  the  atom  of  the  heavier 
constituent  Li^     (1)  and  (2)  are  Isotopes. 


THE  ELECTRICAL  THEORY  OF  MATTER        97 

But  now  suppose  we  add  a  proton  and  an  electron  to  (1)  so 
that  the  proton  only  enters  the  nucleus  and  the  electron  remains 
outside  as  shown  at  (3)  We  shall  now  have  a  charge  4  on  the 
nucleus  and  two  electrons  in  the  outer  ring.     The  chemical 


0)  Atom  of  Li^ 

CZ)  Atom  of  Li^ 

(3)  Atom  of  hypothetical  isotope  of  Beryllium 

(4--)  Atom  of  F 

(5)  Atom  of  Ne^° 

re)  Atom  of  Ne^^ 

(7)  Atom  of  Na        O  =  Electron 

Fig.  16. — Diagrammatic  Representation  of  Nucleus  Atoms.  The  planetary 
electrons  are  shown  as  lying  on  plane  circles,  the  first  containing  2,  the 
second  8  and  so  on.  The  dark  circle  is  the  nucleus  and  the  +  and  — 
charges  within  it  are  indicated  by  figures.  (1)  and  (2)  are  Isotopes.  (2) 
and  (3)  are  Isobares  and  (5)  and  (6)  are  Isotopes. 


properties  of  such  an  atom,  if  it  could  exist,  would  be  completely 
different  from  those  of  Uthium,  but  would  be  identical  with  those 
of  beryUium,  of  which  it  would  be  an  isotope.  But  its  mass  is 
clearly  identically  the  same  as  that  of  (2)  so  that  (2)  and  (3) 
ARE  Isobares. 

H 


98  ISOTOPES 

In  the  same  way  (4)  will  be  recognised  as  the  atom  of  fluorine 
(5)  and  (6)  as  the  atoms  of  the  two  isotopes  of  neon  and  (7)  as 
the  atom  of  sodium. 

93.  The  relation  between  Isotopes  and  Elements  in  the 
same  Group. — As  far  as  can  be  seen  the  chemical  properties  by 
which  the  elements  are  divided  into  groups  depend  practically 
entirely  on  the  outermost  shell  of  electrons,  which  are  therefore 
called  valency  electrons.  Now  consider  all  that  part  called  by 
Langmuir  the  kernel  of  the  atom  lying  within  the  shell  of  these 
valency  electrons.  The  movements  or  configuration  of  the 
outermost  electrons  will  depend  in  the  first  degree  on  the  charge 
on  the  kernel,  which  may  be  looked  upon  as  a  virtual  nucleus. 
The  kernels  of  atoms  (1)  and  (7)  both  have  the  same  net  charge 
1,  so  that  the  elements  they  represent  should  have  many  chemi- 
cal similarities.  These  they  certainly  have  as  both  are  alkaU 
metals.  In  general  the  atoms  of  elements  belonging  to  the 
same  group  chemically  have  the  same  number  of  electrons  in 
the  outer  shell  and  the  same  net  charge  on  the  kernel.  On  this 
view  it  will  be  seen  that  the  similarity  of  isotopes  may  be 
regarded  as  the  extreme  limiting  case  of  the  similarities  long 
observed  between  elements  of  the  same  chemical  group. 

94.  Abnormal  compounds  formed  by  charged  atoms. — 

The  tendency  of  elements  to  form  compounds  with  each  other, 
that  is  the  property  with  which  the  idea  of  valency  is  associated, 
is  ascribed  to  the  tendency  of  the  atom  to  complete  its  outer 
shell.  This  it  can  do  either  by  parting  with  the  electrons  in 
this  sheU  and  so  promoting  the  next  inner  completed  shell  to 
outer  position,  or  by  sharing  the  electrons  in  the  atom  of 
another  element  so  that  they  fill  the  gaps  in  its  own  outer  shell. 
We  have  already  alluded  to  the  success  which  has  attended 
this  idea  in  explaining  valency  and  the  properties  of  chemical 
compounds.  For  the  present  argument  it  will  be  enough  if 
it  is  understood  that  lithium  and  sodium  (1)  (2)  (7)  will  verj^ 
readily  part  with  their  solitary  valency  electron  and  become 
positively  charged,  i.e.,  will  be  strongly  electropositive  elements 
with  valency  +  1  ;  whereas  a  fluorine  (4)  wiU  have  an  equally 
powerful  tendency  to  take  up  an  electron  and  become  nega- 
tively   charged    and    so    will   be    a    strongly    electronegative 


THE   ELECTRICAL  THEORY  OF  MATTER        99 

element  with  valency  —  1,  Both  of  these  tendencies  will  be 
satisfied  if  (4)  and  (7)  combine  forming  the  compound  molecule 
NaF,  for  the  outer  electron  of  (7)  will  enter  the  outer  shell  of 
(4)  thus  forming  two  complete  shells  of  eight  (Langmuir's 
octets).  We  trace  the  tendency  of  the  atom  of  fluorine,  or  any 
other  halogen,  to  form  compounds  with  the  atom  of  an  electro- 
positive element,  or  with  the  atom  of  hydrogen,  to  the  fact 
that  it  has  one  too  few  electrons  in  its  outer  shell. 

Now  the  only  way  we  can  give  a  positive  charge  to  an  atom 
of  neon  (5)  or  (6)  is  by  knocking  one  or  more  electrons  out  of 
its  outer  shell.  Suppose  we  remove  one  from  (5)  as  indicated 
by  the  dotted  line.  (5)  now  will  have  a  similar  outer  shell  to 
(4)  and  a  valency  —  1,  so  we  may  expect  that  atoms  of  the 
inert  gases  carrying  a  single  positive  charge  will  behave 
chemically  in  a  similar  manner  to  neutral  halogen  atoms  and 
will  therefore  be  capable  so  long  as  they  are  charged  of  forming 
hydrides.  This  very  important  idea  was  first  suggested  by 
Sir  J.  J.  Thomson  in  connection  with  the  charged  atoms  of 
chlorine  ^  and  certainly  supplies  a  very  satisfactory  explana- 
tion of  the  very  abnormal  hydrides  of  inert  gases  and  com- 
pounds such  as  OH3  discovered  in  positive  rays.  The  line 
at  41  (Spectrum  VI,  Plate  III)  is  probably  to  be  put  down 
to  a  charged  hydride  of  argon  of  this  type.  Exceedingly 
faint  lines  at  5  in  the  case  of  hehum,  and  21  in  the  case  of 
neon,  are  probably  to  be  ascribed  to  similar  abnormal  compound 
(HeH)  and  (NeH)  respectively.  In  the  case  of  atoms  carrying 
more  than  one  charge  it  can  be  generally  stated  that  each 
positive  charge  given  to  an  atom  wiU  increase  its  negative 
valency  by  one. 

95.  The  failure  of  the  additive  law  in  respect  to  mass. — 

We  have  seen  that,  for  velocities  smaU  compared  with  that  of 
light,  the  masses  of  the  proton  and  the  electron  may  be 
regarded  as  universal  constants.  If  the  additive  law  were 
strictly  true  as  regards  the  summation  of  their  masses  it  is 
clear  that  any  mass  whatever,  whether  it  were  that  of  an  atom 
or  a  molecule,  a  planet  or  a  star,  or  even  the  universe  itself 
could  be  expressed  in  the  form  NM  where  N  is  a  pure  integer 

1  J.  J.  Thomson,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  99A,  90,     1921, 


100  ISOTOPES 

and  M  the  mass  of  the  neutral  system  1  proton  +  1  electron 
( =  the  atom  of  hydrogen).  The  simplicity  of  this  idea,  which 
is  Prout's  theory  in  the  language  of  modern  physics,  is  extremely 
attractive  ;  but  we  know  it  to  be  false,  for  although  the 
discovery  of  isotopes  has  removed  the  difficulty  of  the  grosser 
fractions  associated  with  such  elements  as  neon  and  chlorine, 
we  are  still  left  with  the  more  minute  but  none  the  less  real 
one  associated  with  hydrogen  itself.  To  explain  this  the 
additive  law  must  be  qualified  by  some  such  reasoning  as  is 
contained  in  the  following  paragraph. 

96.  The  explanation  of  the  fractional  mass  of  the 
hydrogen    atom    by    the    hypothesis    of    ''packing." — 

According  to  generally  accepted  views  the  proton  and  the 

electron  possess  mass,  or  what  on  the  relativity  theory  is 

regarded  as  the  same  thing,  weight,  by  virtue  of  the  energy 

in   the    electromagnetical   field    which    surrounds   them.     It 

can  easily  be  shown  on  classical  lines  that  if  we  give  it  a 

spherical  form  a  charge  e  spread  uniformly  over  the  surface 

of  the  sphere  will  have  a  mass  m  when  its  radius  a  is  such  that 

2    e^ 
m  =  —  — ;  hence  to  give  the  electron  its  proper  mass  its  charge 

must  be  compressed  to  a  sphere  of  diameter  about  3-8  x  lO"  ^^ 
cm.  By  the  same  argument  the  proton  will  be  nearly  two 
thousand  times  smaller  and  have  a  diameter  2-06  x  10"  ^^  cm. 
The  extreme  range  of  the  diameter  of  atoms  themselves  is 
1  —  5  X  10~^  cm.,  so  that  it  will  at  once  be  realised  that  the 
structure  of  an  atom  is  an  exceedingly  open  one,  even  more 
so  than  that  of  our  solar  system. 

Now  it  can  be  shown  that  if  we  bring  two  charges  of  opposite 
sign  sufficiently  close  together  their  fields  will  aflfect  each 
other  in  such  a  way  that  the  mass  of  the  system  will  be  reduced. 
This  effect  is  quite  inappreciable  for  distances  comparable 
with  the  diameter  of  an  atom,  but  begins  to  make  itself  felt 
when  the  distance  apart  is  of  the  order  of  the  size  of  the  electron 
itself  as  given  above.  The  nucleus  of  the  atom  of  an  ordinary 
element  (not  hydrogen)  contains  both  protons  and  electrons 
and  is  very  small  compared  with  the  atom  itself.  Its  dimen- 
BJons  can  be  roughly  determined  by  actual  experiment  in  the 


THE  ELECTRICAL  THEORY  OF  MATTER      101 

case  of  the  heavy  elements  and  are  found  to  be  so  small  that 
even  to  get  in  the  electrons  alone  these  would  have  to  be 
packed  very  closely  together.  Such  a  nucleus  wiU  contain 
more  protons  than  electrons,  roughly  twice  as  many,  so  that 
it  may  be  regarded  as  practically  certain  that : — In  the  nuclei 
of  normal  atoms  the  packing  of  the  electrons  and  protons  is  so 
close  that  the  additive  law  of  mass  will  not  hold  and  the  mass  of 
the  nucleus  will  be  less  than  the  sum  of  the  masses  of  its  con- 
stituent charges. 

The  nucleus  of  a  hydrogen  atom  consists  of  one  single  free 
proton,  its  planetary  electron  is  too  far  away  to  cause  any 
effect  so  that  it  is  clear  that  we  shaU  find  the  mass  associated 
with  the  atom  of  hydrogen  greater  than  one -fourth  the  mass 
of  a  hehum  atom  or  one-sixteenth  the  mass  of  an  oxygen 
atom.  The  mass  lost  when  four  free  protons  and  two  free 
electrons  are  packed  close  together  to  form  a  helium  nucleus 
(No.  9,  p.  106)  is  roughly  0-7  per  cent,  of  the  whole  and  it  can 
be  calculated  that,  if  we  take  the  value  of  the  diameter  of 
the  electron  given  above,  the  protons  must  approach  nearer 
than  half  of  this  to  give  so  large  a  reduction.  This  means  that 
the  charges  must  be  so  closely  packed  that  the  electrons  are 
actually  deformed. 

The  whole  number  rule  may  now  be  simply  translated  into 
a  statement  that  the  mean  packing  effect  in  all  atoms  is 
approximately  constant,  and  the  unit  of  mass  1  when  0=16 
wiU  be  (mass  of  a  packed  proton)  -f  |  (mass  of  free  electron) 
+  I  (mass  of  packed  electron).  The  whole  number  rule  is  not, 
and  never  was  supposed  to  be,  mathematically  exact,  for  this 
would  imply  an  identical  packing  effect  in  the  case  of  all 
atoms,  an  exceedingly  improbable  supposition.  It  is  almost 
certain  that  atoms  of  some  elements,  such  as  nitrogen,  weigh 
slightly  more  than  a  whole  number  (looser  packing)  while 
those  of  others  such  as  caesium  or  iodine  may  weigh 
slightly  less  (closer  packing).  The  Umit  of  accuracy  so  far 
attained  in  mass-spectrum  measurement  is  not  sufficient  to 
detect  a  change  of  the  order  expected,  except  in  the  case  of 
hydrogen,  where  the  variation  in  mass  is  exceptionally  high. 

97.  The  structure  of  the  nucleus. — The  manner  in  which 


102  ISOTOPES 

the  units  of  electricity  are  arranged  in  the  nucleus  of  an  atom 
has  received  a  good  deal  of  attention  from  theorists  but  ideas 
on  this  subject  are  almost  entirely  of  a  conjectural  character. 
Thus  Harkins  ^  has  proposed  a  constitutional  formula  for  the 
nuclei  of  all  the  elements.  In  this,  besides  electrons  and 
protons,  he  uses  as  building  units  a  particles  (4  protons  +  2 
electrons)  of  mass  4,  and  hypothetical  units  of  mass  3  with  a 
single  positive  charge  (3  protons  +  2  electrons).  The  matter 
has  been  more  recently  discussed  and  nucleus  models  sug- 
gested by  Rutherford, 2  E.  Gehrcke  ^  and  others. 

The  fact  that  the  helium  nucleus  is  almost  exactly  an 
integer  on  the  oxygen  scale — that  is  to  say  helium  has  approxi- 
mately normal  packing — gives  a  distinct  balance  of  probability 
that  helium  nuclei  actually  exist  as  such  in  the  nuclei  of  normal 
elements.  In  support  of  this  idea  it  has  been  stated  that  the 
presence  of  heUum  nuclei  inside  the  nuclei  of  radioactive 
atoms  is  definitely  proved  by  the  ejection  of  a  particles  by 
the  latter.  In  the  writer's  opinion  this  is  much  the  same  as 
saying  that  a  pistol  contains  smoke,  for  it  is  quite  possible 
that  the  a  particle,  Hke  the  smoke  of  the  pistol,  is  only  formed 
at  the  moment  of  its  ejection.  Brosslera  *  defends  this  view 
and  points  out  that  if  the  alteration  from  looser  to  closer 
packing  of  the  charges  forming  the  particle  is  at  all  large 
energy  will  be  liberated  amply  sufficient  for  the  purpose  of 
detaching  it  and  giving  it  the  energy  of  an  a  ray.  The 
reason  to  expect  that  this  energy  will  be  set  free  will  be 
described  in  the  next  section.  Brosslera's  suggestion  that 
in  the  nuclei  of  radioactive  atoms  there  are  loosely  bound 
protons  and  electrons  and  that  these,  given  something  of  the 
nature  of  a  certain  exact  and  instantaneous  correlation, 
might  combine  to  form  an  a  particle  is  in  good  accordance 
with  the  most  reasonable  theory  of  radioactive  disintegration, 
which  was  first  put  forward  by  Lindemann.^ 

There  are  therefore  two  different  ideas  which  we  may  regard 

1  Harkins,  Phys.  Rev.,  15,  73,     1920. 

2  Rutherford,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc,  97A,  374,     1920. 

3  Gehrcke,  Phys.  ZeiL,  22,  151,  1921. 

*  Brosslera,  Rev.  Chwi.,  1,  42,  74,     1921. 
»  Lindemann,  Phil.  Mag.,  30,  560,     1915. 


THE  ELECTRICAL  THEORY  OF  MATTER      103 

as  working  hypotheses.  According  to  the  first  the  nuclei  of 
atoms  consist  of  helium  nuclei,  or  a  particles,  held  together 
in  some  way  so  that  their  packing  effect  wpon  each  other  is 
small ;  and,  in  the  case  of  atoms  not  having  a  mass  of  the 
type  4w,  additional  protons  and  electrons.  According  to 
the  second  we  only  have  to  suppose  that  the  mean  packing 
of  all  the  charges  in  the  nucleus  is  such  as  will  account  for  the 
whole  number  rule  with  sufficient  exactness,  but  that  the 
actual  arrangement  of  the  protons  and  electrons  need  not 
necessarily  be  at  aU  similar  to  that  in  a  helium  nucleus. 

The  experimental  evidence  is,  so  far,  definitely  in  favour 
of  the  first  of  these  views.  In  their  remarkable  work  on  the 
disintegration  of  light  atoms  by  the  collision  of  swift  a  rays 
Rutherford  and  Chadwick  i  show  that  as  the  result  of  such 
collisions  swift  hydrogen  rays,  i.e.  free  protons,  are  liberated 
from  the  atoms  of  boron,  nitrogen,  fluorine,  sodium,  aluminium 
and  phosphorus.  They  point  out  that  the  masses  of  the 
atoms  of  aU  these  elements  are  of  the  types  4w  +  2  and 
4w  -|-  3.  The  effect  is  not  obtained  from  atoms  of  the  type 
471  so  that  this  result  suggests  that  in  these  the  protons  are 
already  all  bound  together  to  form  helium  nuclei. 

98.  Cosmical  effects  due  to  change  of  mass. — It  has 

long  been  known  that  the  chemical  atomic  weight  of  hydrogen 
was  greater  than  one  quarter  of  that  of  helium,  but  so  long  as 
fractional  weights  were  general  there  was  no  particular  need 
to  explain  this  fact,  nor  could  any  definite  conclusions  be 
drawn  from  it.  The  results  obtained  by  means  of  the  mass- 
spectrograph  2  remove  all  doubt  on  this  point,  and  no  matter 
whether  the  explanation  is  to  be  ascribed  to  pacldng  or  not, 
we  may  consider  it  absolutely  certain  that  if  hydrogen  is 
transformed  into  helium  a  certain  quantity  of  mass  must  be 
annihilated  in  the  process.  The  cosmical  importance  of  this 
conclusion  is  profound  and  the  possibilities  it  opens  for  the 
future  very  remarkable,  greater  in  fact  than  any  suggested 
before  by  science  in  the  whole  history  of  the  human  race. 
We  know  from  Einstein's  Theory  of  Relativity  that  mass 

1  Rutherford  and  Chadwick,  Phil.  Mag.,  42,  809,     1921. 
^  V.  p.  70. 


104  ISOTOPES 

and  energy  are  interchangeable  i  and  that  in  C.G.S.  units  a 
mass  m  at  rest  may  be  expressed  as  a  quantity  of  energy 
mc"^,  where  c  is  the  velocity  of  light.  Even  in  the  case  of  the 
smallest  mass  this  energy  is  enormous.  The  loss  of  mass  when 
a  single  helium  nucleus  is  formed  from  free  protons  and 
electrons  amounts  in  energy  to  that  acquired  by  a  charge  e 
falling  through  a  potential  of  nearly  thirty  million  volts.  A 
swift  a  ray  has  an  energy  of  three  to  four  million  volts  so  that 
the  change  of  packing  suggested  by  Brosslera  need  not  be 
nearly  so  great  to  provide  the  energy  needed.  If  instead  of 
considering  single  atoms  we  deal  with  quantities  of  matter 
in  ordinary  experience  the  figures  for  the  energy  become 
prodigious. 

Take  the  case  of  one  gramme  atom  of  hydrogen,  that  is  to 
say  the  quantity  of  hydrogen  in  9  c.c.  of  water.  If  this  is 
entirely  transformed  into  helium  the  energy  liberated  will  be 

•0077  X  9  X  1020  =  6-93  X  lO^^  ergs. 

Expressed  in  terms  of  heat  this  is  1-66  x  10^^  calories  or  in 
terms  of  work  200,000  kilowatt  hours.  We  have  here  at  last 
a  source  of  energy  sufficient  to  account  for  the  heat  of  the 
Sun.2  In  this  connection  Eddington  remarks  that  if  only 
10  per  cent,  of  the  total  hydrogen  on  the  Sun  were  trans- 
formed into  helium  enough  energy  would  be  liberated  to  main- 
tain its  present  radiation  for  a  thousand  million  years. 

Should  the  research  worker  of  the  future  discover  some 
means  of  releasing  this  energy  in  a  form  which  could  be 
employed,  the  human  race  will  have  at  its  command  powers 
beyond  the  dreams  of  scientific  fiction ;  but  the  remote 
possibility  must  always  be  considered  that  the  energy  once 
liberated  will  be  completely  uncontrollable  and  by  its  intense 
violence  detonate  all  neighbouring  substances.  In  this  event 
the  whole  of  the  hydrogen  on  the  earth  might  be  transformed 
at  once  and  the  success  of  the  experiment  published  at  large 
to  the  universe  as  a  new  star. 

^Eddington,  Time,  Space  and  Gravitation,  p.  146,  Cambridge,  1920. 
•Eddington,  Brit.  Assoc,  address,  1920  ;    Perrin,  Scientia,  Nov.,  1921. 


THE   ELECTRICAL  THEORY   OF  MATTER      105 

99.  The  stable  systems  of  protons  and  electrons 
known  to  occur. — ^Starting  with  our  standard  bricks,  the 
protons  and  electrons,  we  may  make,  theoretically  at  least, 
an  infinity  of  systems  by  the  combination  of  any  number  of 
each.  It  is  interesting  to  consider  the  systems  actually  occur- 
ring in  practice,  that  is  to  say  those  which  are  sufficiently  stable 
to  give  definite  evidence  of  their  existence.  The  follow- 
ing table  gives,  in  order  of  mass,  the  first  twenty-four  known. 
Where  the  circles  representing  the  charges  touch  each  other, 
to  form  nuclei,  the  packing  is  extremely  close,  where  they  do 
not  touch  they  are  to  be  taken  as  distant  thousands  of  times 
further  from  each  other.  The  masses  of  the  first  twelve  are 
deduced  as  follows  : — The  most  accurate  value  for  the  chemical 
atomic  weight  of  hydrogen  is  1-0077  (0  =  16),  and  as  it  is  very 
improbable  that  it  consists  of  isotopes  we  take  this  as  the 
mass  of  a  neutral  hydrogen  atom.  The  mass  of  the  electron 
is  0*00054  and  as  the  packing  effect  is  nil  we  arrive  at  the 
figure  1-0072  for  the  mass  of  the  proton,  and  this  agrees  within 
the  experimental  error  with  that  directly  determined  by  the 
mass-spectrograph.  The  most  probable  value  of  the  mass  of 
a  neutral  helium  atom  is  4-00(0)  we  wiU  assume  the  last  figure 
for  the  sake  of  simplicity.  The  masses  of  (13)  to  (24)  are  less 
accurately  known. 

The  stability,  where  known,  is  expressed  in  volts  and 
represents  the  potential  through  which  a  charge  e  must  faU 
in  order  to  acquire  sufficient  energy  to  disrupt  the  particular 
configuration  concerned.  This  is  the  ionisation  potential  in 
the  case  of  atoms. 


106 


ISOTOPES 


^:s 


i-e     £■ 


Nuclear 
institution. 

6 

r 

a 

i^ 

O 

0 

-1 

0-00054 

1  + 

+1 

1-0072 

1  + 

0 

1-0077 

1  + 

-1 

1-0082 

1  + 

+1 

2-0149 

1  + 

0 

2-0154 

1  + 

+1 

3-0226 

1  + 

0 

3-0231 

4+2- 

+2 

3-999 

4+2- 

+  1 

3-999 

4+2- 

0 

4-000 

Description. 


o 


o 


o    •    o 


•     o     • 


o    •    o 


•    o    •    o 


•   o   •   o   •   o 


10 


11 


o 


O  CO  o 


14 


4-3 


small 


small 


>3x  106 


55 


25 


Electron 


Proton       or 
positively 
charged  H 
atom 

Neutral      H 
atom 

Negatively- 
charged  H 
atom 

Positively 
charged  H 
molecule 

Neutral    Hg 
molecule 

Positively 
charged 
H3 

Neutral  H, 


Doubly 
charged 
heUum 
atom      or 
alpha  ray 

Singly 
charged 
helium 
atom 

Neutral 
helium 
atom. 


THE  ELECTRICAL  THEORY  OF  MATTER       107 


^i 

a  3 

sl 

>> 

o 

§1 
^1 

II 

S 

Description. 

12 

m 

lo. 

2 

4+2- 

+  1 

5-007 

Positively 
charged 
HeH 

13 

°l 

% 

3 

6  +  3- 

+  1 

6-0 

Positively 
charged 
Li8  atom 

14 

J 

io   o 

3 

6  +  3- 

0 

6-0 

4-9* 

Neutral  Li'' 
atom 

15 

6\ 

i 

^o 

3 

7+4- 

+  1 

7-0 

Positively 
charged 
Li'  atom 

16 

M 

^  0    o 

3 

7+4- 

0 

7-0 

4-9* 

Neutral   Li' 
atom 

17 

O    O  J 

3 

6+3- 

0 

6-0(07) 

Neutral 

Li^H 

{ 

l^k       0 

molecule 

18 

O   O  j 

^^  • 

3 

7+4- 

0 

7-0(07) 

Neutral 

{ 

Li'H 

#04 

IC# 

molecule 

19 

°8 

<^o  o 

4 

9  +  5- 

+1 

9-0 

Positively 
charged 
Be  atom 

20 

4 

9+5- 

0 

9-0 

3-3* 

Neutral     Be 
atom 

21 

5 

10  +  5- 

+2 

10-00 

Doubly 
charged 
B^o  atom 

22 

oo| 

^      o 
)#0©       o 

5 

10  +  5- 

0 

10-00 

Positively 
charged 
B^«  atom 

23 

o  ot 

1 

5 

10  +  5-     0 

10-00 

Neutral    B^" 

•■- 

atom 

24 

°^ 

3°  ° 

5 

11+6- 

+2 

11-00 

Doubly 
charged 
B"  atom 

*  Calculated  from  frequency  of  radiation. 


CHAPTER  IX 
ISOTOPES  AND  ATOMIC  NUMBERS 

100.  The  relation  between  chemical  atomic  weight 
and  atomic  number. — Inasmuch  as  it  is  now  recognised 
to  be  in  general  merely  a  statistical  mean  value  the  importance 
of  the  chemical  atomic  weight  has  been  greatly  reduced  by 
the  discovery  of  isotopes.  Its  position  as  the  natural  numerical 
constant  associated  with  an  element  has  been  taken  by  the 
atomic  number,  though  from  the  point  of  view  of  chemical 
analysis  the  chemical  atomic  weight  is  just  as  important  as 
it  ever  was. 

The  possibility  of  anomalies  in  the  order  of  the  elements 
in  the  periodic  table  when  their  chemical  atomic  weights  are 
considered,  is  now  obvious  enough.  The  true  weights  of  the 
atoms  as  directly  determined,  are  so  intermingled  in  the  order 
of  the  natural  numbers  and  the  proportions  present  in  complex 
elements  so  varied  that  such  anomalies  are  bound  to  occur, 
indeed  it  is  rather  surprising  there  are  not  more. 

The  following  table  (Fig,  17)  shows  the  masses  of  the  isotopes 
of  three  groups  of  elements  now  completely  investigated.  The 
approximate  proportions  present  are  indicated  by  the  heights 
of  the  columns  ;  plain  for  the  alliali  metals,  black  for  the  inert 
gases,  and  hatched  for  the  halogens.  The  anomalous  order 
of  argon  and  potassium  is  at  once  seen  to  be  due  to  the  fact 
that  whereas  the  heavier  constituent  of  argon  is  present  in 
much  the  greater  proportion,  in  potassium  the  reverse  is  the 
case.  Had  the  proportions  of  heavier  and  Ughter  isotopes 
been  similar  in  each  case  the  atomic  weight  of  potassium  would 
have  been  greater  instead  of  less  than  that  of  argon. 

108 


ISOTOPES  AND  ATOMIC  NUMBERS 


109 


:s 


19 


20 


21 


22        23 


Fluorine  (9)  Neon  (10) 
Sodium  (11) 


35        36        37        38         39        40        41 

(Chlorine  17)  Argon  (18) 
Potassium  (19) 


¥ 


1 


I-D 


78 


I 

127 


79        80         81        82        83        84        85        86        87 
Bromine  (35)  Krypton   (36)  Rubidium   (37). 


I     n 


W 


136 


128     129       130     131     132       133       134       135 
Iodine  (53)  Xenon  (54)  Caesium  (55) 

Fig.  17. — Isotopes  of  the  Halogens,  the  inert  gases  and  the  alkali  metals. 

101.  Statistical  relations  exhibited  by  elements  and 
their  isotopes. — -Although  our  knowledge  of  true  atomic 
weights  is  far  from  complete,  for  out  of  eighty-seven  existing 
elements  only  twenty-seven  have  been  analysed,  of  which 
thirteen  are  simple,  interesting  relations  have  already  become 
clear  which  are  stated  in  the  form  of  rules  as  follows  : — 

In  the  nucleus  of  an  atom  there  is  never  less  than  one  electron  to 
every  two  protons.  There  is  no  known  exception  to  this  law. 
It  is  the  expression  of  the  fact  that  if  an  element  has  an  atomic 
number  N  the  atomic  weight  of  its  lightest  isotope  cannot  be 
less  than  2N.  Worded  as  above,  the  exception  in  the  case  of 
hydrogen  is  avoided.  True  atomic  weights  corresponding 
exactly  to  2N  are  known  in  the  majority  of  the  Ughter  elements 
]jp  to  A^^     Among  the  heavier  elements  the  difference  between 


110  ISOTOPES 

the  weight  of  the  lightest  isotope  and  the  value  2N  tends  to 
increase  with  the  atomic  weight ;  in  the  cases  of  mercury  it 
amounts  to  37  units.  The  corresponding  divergence  of  the 
mean  atomic  weights  from  the  value  2N  has  of  course  been 
noticed  from  the  beginning  of  the  idea  of  atomic  number. 

The  number  of  isotopes  of  an  element  and  their  range  of 
atomic  weight  appear  to  have  definite  limits.  Since  the 
atomic  number  only  depends  on  the  net  positive  charge  in 
the  nucleus  there  is  no  arithmetical  reason  why  an  element 
should  not  have  any  number  of  possible  isotopes.  An 
examination  of  the  tables  of  results  given  on  p.  89  and 
at  the  end  of  the  book  show  that  so  far  the  largest  number 
determined  with  certainty  is  6  in  the  case  of  krypton.  It 
is  possible  that  xenon  has  even  more,  but  the  majority  of 
complex  elements  have  only  two  each.  The  maximum  differ- 
ence between  the  lightest  and  heaviest  isotope  of  the  same 
element  so  far  determined  is  8  units  in  the  cases  of  krypton 
and  xenon.  The  greatest  proportional  difference,  calculated 
on  the  lighter  weight,  is  recorded  in  the  case  of  lithium,  where 
it  amounts  to  one-sixth.  It  is  about  one-tenth  in  the  case  of 
boron,  neon,  argon  and  krypton. 

The  number  of  electrons  in  the  nucleus  tends  to  be  even.  This 
rule  expresses  the  fact  that  in  the  majority  of  cases  even 
atomic  number  is  associated  with  even  atomic  weight 
and  odd  with  odd.  If  we  consider  the  three  groups  of 
elements,  the  halogens,  the  inert  gases  and  the  alkah  metals, 
this  tendency  is  very  strongly  marked.  Of  the  halogens — odd 
atomic  numbers — all  6  (  +  1  ?)  atomic  weights  are  odd.  Of 
the  inert  gases — even  atomic  numbers — 13  (+  2  ?)  are  even  and 
3  odd.  Of  the  alkali  metals — odd  atomic  numbers — 7  are 
odd  and  1  even.  In  the  few  known  cases  of  elements  of  the 
other  groups  the  preponderance,  though  not  so  large,  is  still 
very  marked  and  nitrogen  is  the  only  element  yet  discovered 
to  consist  entirely  of  atoms  whose  nuclei  contain  an  odd  number 
of  electrons. 

A  further  interesting  result  is  the  absence  of  isobares.  So 
far  none  have  been  definitely  identified,  but  it  is  quite  obvious 
that  in  the  cases  of  elements  such  as  calcium  and  selenium  they 
must  exist,  for  the  supply  of  integers  in  the  region  of  their 


ISOTOPES   AND   ATOMIC  NUMBERS  HI 

atomic  weights  have  been  exhausted  by  the  needs  of  other 
elements. 

A  table  of  the  first  40  natural  numbers  and  the  true  atomic 
weights  corresponding  to  them  is  given  in  Fig.  18.     The  gaps 


H 

He 

Li 

Li 

Be 

B 

B 

c 

N 

O 

F 

Ne 

1 

2       3       4^      5       6      7       8       9      10     11      12 

13     14 

15     16     17 

18 

19     20 

Ne 

Na 

Mg 

m 

Mg 

Al? 

Si 

Si  Si? 

P 

s 

CI 

A 

CI 

K 

A 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

Fig.   18. — The  first  40  natural  numbers,  showing  those  occupied 
by  atomic  weights  of  known  elements. 

are  particularly  interesting  and  seem  to  show  no  semblance 
of  regularity.  It  is  very  clear  that  many  more  experimental 
results  will  have  to  be  obtained  before  any  satisfactory  theory 
for  the  occurrence  of  these,  or  of  the  other  laws,  is  to  be  formu- 
lated. 

102.  The  preponderance  of  elements  of  even  atomic 
number. — In  discussing  the  nuclear  structure  of  elements 
the  question  of  their  relative  abundance  in  nature  is  one  of 
great  interest.  This  may  be  estimated  by  direct  chemical 
analysis  of  the  Earth's  crust,  and  such  extra-terrestrial  sources 
as  are  available  in  the  form  of  meteorites.  The  spectroscope 
will  teU  us  what  elements  are  present  in  the  stars,  but  unfortu- 
nately it  does  not  give  much  direct  information  as  to  their 
relative  quantities. 

On  this  question  we  can  classify — to  use  biological  terms 
— either  by  individuals  or  by  species.  We  may  examine  the 
percentage  composition,  which  wiU  give  a  measure  of  the  total 
number  of  individual  atoms  of  each  element  present,  or  we 
may  inquire  into  the  number  of  different  nuclear  species  which 
occur  and  classify  them  without  respect  to  their  individual 
abundance. 

A  very  valuable  discussion  from  the  first  point  of  view  has 
been  published  by  Harkins,^  who  considers  the  percentage 
composition  of  meteorites  and  of  parts  of  the  Earth's  crust. 
He  demonstrates  in  a  most  convincing  manner  that  there  are 

^Harkins,  Jour.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc,  39,  856,     1917. 


112  ISOTOPES 

immensely  more  atoms  of  elements  of  even  atomic  number. 
This  interesting  preponderance  can,  with  a  reasonable  amount 
of  probability,  now  be  extended  to  even  atomic  weight,  by 
the  statistics  given  in  the  preceding  paragraphs,  but  it  will 
not  be  certain  until  the  constitution  of  certain  abundant 
elements  such  as  iron  has  been  actually  determined. 

The  second  point  of  view  can  be  examined  by  means  of  the 
atomic  weights  of  the  radioactive  isotopes  and  also  by  the  true 
atomic  weights  given  by  the  mass-spectra.  In  both  cases 
nuclear  systems  of  even  atomic  number  are  found  to  predomi- 
nate. The  mass-spectra  of  13  elements  of  even,  and  14  ele- 
ments of  odd  atomic  number  indicate  32  isotopes  of  even 
atomic  number  and  20  of  odd.  The  average  element  of  even 
atomic  number  has  therefore  2-5  isotopes  to  1-4  for  each  element 
of  odd  atomic  number. 

The  table  on  p.  15  shows  that  among  the  radioactive  isotopes 
the  preponderance  is  greater — 32  as  against  10 — but  it  is 
possible  that  the  former  figure  may  include  some  atomic 
systems  absolutely  identical  though  of  different  origin. 

103.  The   constancy   of  chemical   atomic   weights. — 

One  of  the  first  difficulties  in  the  way  of  accepting  the  idea  of 
the  complex  constitution  of  an  element  such  as  chlorine  was 
the  constancy  of  its  atomic  weight.  This  had  been  determined 
by  many  different  observers  using  different  methods  and  the 
results  were  always  the  same  within  a  very  small  experimental 
error.  This  difficulty  may  be  met,  in  the  first  place,  by  noting 
that  the  vast  majority,  if  not  all,  of  the  really  accurate  values 
were  obtained  from  chlorine  which  must  have  been  originally 
derived  from  the  sea.  The  sea  has  been  mixed  for  so  long 
that  it  would  be  absurd  to  expect  to  find  chlorines  of  different 
chemical  atomic  weights  in  it.  Had  ordinary  galena  been 
the  only  source  of  lead  used  in  the  atomic  weight  determina- 
tions given  on  page  16  no  difference  would  have  been  found. 
It  was  only  by  examining  the  lead  from  extraordinary  radio- 
active sources  that  the  results  were  obtained  which  gave  such 
definite  and  valuable  support  to  the  theory  of  isotopes. 

The  atomic  weight  of  chlorine  from  sources  other  than  the 
sea  is  now  receiving  the  attention  of  chemists,  though  it  is 


ISOTOPES  AND  ATOMIC  NUMBERS  113 

naturally  very  difficult  to  be  at  all  sure  that  any  known  source 
of  chlorine  is  not  of  marine  origin.  Mile.  Irene  Curie  ^  has 
examined  the  atomic  weight  of  chlorine  from  three  minerals 
whose  marine  origin  seems  unlikely.  The  values  obtained 
from  a  sample  of  sodalite  (sodium  aluminium  chlorosilicate) 
from  Canada,  and  from  a  sample  of  calcium  chlorophosphate 
from  Norway  agree  with  the  value  for  chlorine  from  sea-water. 
The  value  35-60,  for  chlorine  from  a  sample  of  sodium  chloride 
from  a  desert  region  in  Central  Africa  was  slightly  high. 

The  comparison  of  the  atomic  weights  of  terrestrial  and 
meteoric  nickel  made  by  Baxter  and  Parsons  ^  is  interesting 
in  this  connection.  As  a  mean  of  nine  determinations  with 
the  terrestrial  material  the  figure  58-70  was  found,  whilst 
three  experiments  with  meteoric  nickel  gave  58-68.  The 
standard  value  found  by  Richards  and  Cushman  was  58-68 
(Ag  =  107-88).  The  difference  found  between  terrestrial  and 
meteoric  nickel  is  considered  to  be  within  the  limits  of  experi- 
mental error,  but  further  comparisons  are  to  be  made. 

The  writer  regards  these  negative  results  as  having  a  cause 
probably  much  more  fundamental  than  the  mere  mechanical 
mixing  of  the  different  constituent  isotopes  during  the  history 
of  the  body  containing  them,  namely  a  constancy  of  proportion 
during  the  evolution  of  the  elements  themselves.  This  will 
be  considered  later.  The  case  of  the  radioactive  leads  is 
entirely  exceptional.  These  substances  have  been  produced 
continuously  during  the  history  of  the  earth's  crust  and  are 
being  so  produced  to-day.  Although  ordinary  lead  may  con- 
sist of  isotopes — which  is  practically  certain — and  these  isotopes 
may  be  identical  in  every  respect  with  those  produced  in  the 
last  stage  of  radioactive  disintegration,  yet  there  is  no  reason 
whatever  to  assume  that  ordinary  lead  is  itself  the  accumulated 
result  of  these  processes.  It  takes  its  place  among  the  other 
ordinary  elements  and  would  doubtless  have  done  so  had 
thorium  and  uranium  never  existed. 

104.  The  agreement  between  the  chemical  atomic 
weight  and  the  mean  atomic  weight  deduced  from  the 
mass  spectrum. — The  mean  atomic  weight  of  the  isotopes 

II.  Curie,  Compt.  Retid.  172,  1025,     1921. 

*  Baxter  and  Parsons,  Jour.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc,  43,  607,     1921. 

I 


114 


ISOTOPES 


of  a  complex  element  can  be  calculated  if  the  relative  intensities 
of  their  lines  in  the  mass-spectrum  is  known.  This  has  been 
directly  measured  by  Dempster.  ^  The  charged  particles  of 
isotopes  of  the  same  element  are  practically  certain  to  afEect 
the  photographic  plate  to  the  same  extent  as  each  other, 
hence  we  can  obtain  a  rough  estimate  of  their  relative  pro- 
portion by  comparing  the  intensities  of  the  lines.  If  this  is 
done  it  is  found  that  the  great  majority  of  the  elements  so 
far  tested  give  mean  results  in  good  agreement  with  the 
accepted  chemical  values.  The  following  table  gives  the  data 
concerning  four  in  which  the  difference  is  noteworthy  : — 


Element. 

Atomic 
Weight. 

Mean  from 
Mass-spectrum. 

Difference. 

Per  cent. 
Difference. 

Boron  .... 
Krypton     . 
Xenon 
Caesium 

10-90 
82-92 
130-2 
132-81 

10-75^0-07 
83-5  ±0-3 
131-3  ±0-3 
133      ±0-3 

0-15 
0-6 
1-1 
0-2 

1-37 

0-72 
0-85 
0-05 

The  case  of  boron  is  the  most  difficult  to  account  for.  The 
masses  of  its  isotopes  10  and  11  certainly  do  not  differ  from 
integers  by  more  than  one  or  two  parts  in  a  thousand.  The 
ratio  of  the  intensities  of  their  second  order  lines  5  and  5-5 
(and  there  were  no  other  substances  present  which  could 
possibly  give  such  lines)  is  equally  certainly  not  as  high  as 
9:1.  It  was  for  this  reason  that  a  third  isotope  12  was 
suspected,  but  as  no  evidence  of  this  has  been  found  it  seems 
most  probable  that  the  chemical  atomic  weight  is  still  slightly 
too  high. 

The  atomic  weights  of  krypton  and  xenon  are  not  of  course 
chemical  in  the  ordinary  sense,  as  they  are  deduced  direct 
from  density  determinations.  Any  trace  of  the  impurity  most 
likely  to  be  present,  argon  in  the  first  case,  krypton  in  the 
second,  would  tend  to  make  the  densities  too  low,  and  this 
appears  the  most  hkely  explanation. 

In  the  case  of  caesium  the  chemical  result  may  be  correct, 
for  the  probable  error  in  the  determination  of  mass  is  at  least 
as   large   as   the   discrepancy.     On  the   other   hand  caesium 

1  V.  p.  81. 


ISOTOPES  AND  ATOMIC  NUMBERS  115 

appears  to  be  a  simple  element,  in  which  case  its  chemical 
atomic  weight  must  represent  the  true  weight  of  its  atoms. 
Any  error  in  this  figure  would  probably  be  of  the  sign  suggested, 
for  it  is  the  heaviest  member  of  its  chemical  group.  If,  how- 
ever, as  is  possible,  the  true  mass  of  its  atom  differs  from  an 
integer  by  as  much  as  0-2  it  is  a  fact  of  the  greatest  interest. 

105.  The    meaning    of    the    word    "  element." — The 

exact  idea  conveyed  by  the  word  "  element  "  in  chemistry 
and  physics  has  given  rise  to  endless  difficulties  in  the  past. 
In  this  connection  Crookes  in  1886  sums  up  the  matter  as 
follows  : — "  Of  the  attempts  hitherto  made  to  define  or  explain 
an  element,  none  satisfy  the  demands  of  the  human  intellect. 
The  textbooks  tell  us  that  an  element  is  '  a  body  which  has 
not  been  decomposed  '  ;  that  it  is  '  a  something  to  which  we 
can  add,  but  from  which  we  can  take  away  nothing,'  or  '  a 
body  which  increases  in  weight  with  every  chemical  change.' 
Such  definitions  are  doubly  unsatisfactory  :  they  are  provi- 
sional, and  may  cease  to-morrow  to  be  applicable  to  any 
given  case.  They  take  their  stand,  not  on  any  attribute  of 
things  to  be  defined,  but  on  the  limitations  of  human  power  ; 
they  are  confessions  of  intellectual  impotence." 

There  was  good  reason  for  this  dissatisfaction.  The  dis- 
covery ten  years  later  of  the  electron,  and  the  subsequent 
electrical  theory  of  matter  robbed  the  word  of  any  pretence 
to  its  original  meaning  ;  for  although  Ramsay  attempted  to 
introduce  into  chemistry  electricity  itself  as  an  element,  it 
soon  became  obvious  that  this  extension  was  unsuitable.  The 
discovery  of  isotopes  brings  us  face  to  face  with  two  possible 
alternatives.  The  first  is  to  call  each  isotope,  as  it  is  dis- 
covered, a  new  element.  The  second  is  to  fix  the  word  pre- 
cisely, now  and  for  the  future,  as  meaning  a  substance  with 
definite  chemical  and  spectroscopic  properties  which  may  or 
may  not  be  a  mixture  of  isotopes — in  other  words  to  associate 
it  exclusively  with  the  conception  of  atomic  number.  On 
this  view  there  would  be,  corresponding  to  Moseley's  numbers, 
92  possible  elements,  of  which  87  are  known. 

If  we  adopt  the  first  of  these  alternatives  a  new  word  will 
be  necessary  to  express  such  substances  as  chlorine  or  mag- 


116  ISOTOPES 

nesium,  hitherto  called  elements,  and  also  the  word  element 
would  mean  something  entirely  different  from  what  it  has 
meant  in  all  the  chemical  and  physical  Uterature  of  the  past 
century.  It  would  moreover  be  still  subject  to  alterations  in 
the  future. 

In  the  opinion  of  the  writer  the  second  alternative — the 
association  of  element  with  atomic  number — is  much  the 
more  preferable.  The  difficulties  arising  from  it  are  practi- 
cally confined  to  the  radioactive  substances  which  can  differ 
from  one  another  even  when  their  atomic  numbers  and  atomic 
weights  are  identical.  This  is  not  very  serious,  for  the  radio- 
active elements  are  in  a  class  by  themselves  and  the  special 
nomenclature  already  applied  to  them  could  be  retained  or  re- 
vised as  convenient  without  affecting  that  of  general  chemistry. 

106.  Disintegration  theory  of  the  evolution  of  the 
elements. — A  theory  has  been  put  forward  by  some  writers 
that  all  the  elements  occurring  in  nature  are  the  result  of 
radioactive  disintegrations  of  the  ordinary  type,  but  continued 
far  beyond  the  ordinary  limit  observed  at  present.  For 
instance,  if  we  continue  the  a  ray  changes  of  the  thorium  series 
far  enough  we  shall  ultimately  reach  helium.  The  emission 
of  an  a  particle  is  the  only  change  known  to  occur  which  alters 
the  atomic  weight  and  it  always  does  so  by  4  units  at  a  time. 
Hence  from  thorium  we  shall  get  a  series  of  elements  or  iso- 
topes of  atomic  weights  from  232  to  4  of  the  general  type  4w. 
Uranium  in  the  same  way  will  yield  a  similar  series  of  the  type 
4:71  +  2.  In  order  to  obtain  isotopes  of  odd  atomic  weight 
it  is  necessary  to  postulate  parent  elements  of  the  type  4n  +  1 
and  4:%  -f  3. 

Using  hypotheses  based  on  this  general  idea  Van  den  Broek,  ^ 
Harkins,^  Kohlweiler,^  Kirchoff  ^  and  others  have  built  up  the 
most  elaborate  systems  of  isotopes, 

1  Van  den  Broek,  Phys.  Zeit.,  17,  260,  579,      1  916  ;    23,  164,      1921. 

"Harkins  and  Wilson,  Jour.  Am.  Chem.  Soc,  37,  1367,  1915  ;  Har- 
kins  and  Hall,  ibid.,  38,  169,  1916  ;  Harkins,  Phys.  Rev.,  15,  73, 
1920;  Nature,  105,  230,  1920;  Jour.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc,  42,  1956, 
1920  ;    PhU.  Mag.,  42,  305,     1921. 

*  Kohlweiler,  Zeit.  fur  physikal.  Chem. ,  94,  51 3,  1 920  ;  Phys.  Zeit. ,  21, 
311,  543;   22,  243,     1921.  *  Kirchoff,  idid.,  21,  711,     1920. 


ISOTOPES  AND  ATOMIC  NUMBERS  117 

The  writer  regards  this  view  as  unhkely  and  misleading. 
In  the  first  place  it  does  not  appear  to  succeed  in  its  objects. 
As  an  explanation  of  how  the  elements  may  have  been  evolved 
it  starts  with  at  least  fom:  elements  as  complicated  as  any 
known  to  exist,  which  does  not  advance  the  inquiry  very 
much.  On  the  other  hand  it  may  be  used  to  predict  the 
atomic  weights  of  the  isotopes  composing  known  elements, 
and  a  great  many  predictions  of  this  kind  have  been  made. 
Here,  though  the  measure  of  its  success  has  varied  to  some 
extent  with  the  particular  modification  of  the  theory  employed, 
it  has  never  been  worthy  of  serious  consideration.  In  cases 
where  two  or  three  isotopes  of  a  given  element  were  pre- 
dicted they  proved  as  often  wrong  as  right,  and  when  the 
number  of  isotopes  of  integral  atomic  weights  was  so  large 
that  some  agreements  were  inevitable  the  argument  obviously 
loses  all  its  force. 

Another  objection  is  that  radioactive  transformations  do 
not  continue,  as  far  as  we  can  see,  beyond  the  stage  (lead) 
indicated  in  the  diagrams  on  p.  15.  The  lighter  elements  are 
definitely  not  radioactive.  The  radioactivity  of  potassium 
and  rubidium  is  exceedingly  small  and  its  nature  doubtful ; 
in  any  case  it  is  best  ascribed  to  minute  vestiges  of  radioactive 
isotopes,  not  to  feeble  radioactivity  of  the  main  constituents. 
It  seems  therefore  more  reasonable,  for  the  present,  to  regard 
the  property  of  radioactivity  as  absent  entirely  from  the 
inactive  elements  than  to  suppose  it  present  but  too  weak  to 
be  detected.  It  must  not  be  gathered  from  these  remarks 
that  it  is  considered  impossible  to  imagine  physical  conditions 
violent  enough  to  disrupt  the  nuclei  of  light  atoms,  but  rather 
that  the  mechanism  causing  such  disruption  need  not  be 
similar  in  any  way  to  that  causing  normal  radioactivity. 

107.  Grookes'  theory  of  the  evolution  of  the  elements. 

• — A  more  attractive  theory  than  the  one  given  above  is  that 
the  complex  atoms  of  matter  have  been  evolved  by  the  aggre- 
gation of  simpler  atoms.     This  idea  has  received  a  good  deal  of 
attention  in  the  past.     Crookes^  remarks  on  it  as  follows  : — ■ 
"  Let  us  picture  the  very  beginnings  of  time,  before  geological 

^  Crookes,  Brit.  Assoc,  address,  1886. 


118  ISOTOPES 

ases,  before  the  earth  was  thrown  off  from  the  central  nucleus 
of  molten  fluid,  before  even  the  sun  himself  had  consolidated 
from  the  original  pivtyle.  Let  us  still  imagine  that  at  this 
primal  stage  aU  was  in  an  ultra-gaseous  state,  at  a  temperature 
inconceivably  hotter  than  anything  now  existing  in  the  visible 
universe  ;  so  high  indeed  that  the  chemical  atoms  could  not 
yet  have  been  formed,  being  still  far  above  their  dissociation 
point.  In  so  far  as  protyle  is  capable  of  radiating  or  reflectmg 
light,  this  vast  sea  of  incandescent  mist,  to  an  astronomer  in  a 
distant  star,  might  have  appeared  as  a  nebula,  showing  in 
the  spectroscope  a  few  isolated  hues,  forecasts  of  hydrogen, 
carbon  and  nitrogen  spectra. 

"  But  in  due  course  of  time  some  process  akin  to  cooling, 
probably  internal,  reduces  the  temperature  of  the  cosmic 
protyle  to  a  pomt  at  which  the  first  step  in  granulation  takes 
place  ;  matter  as  we  know  it  comes  into  existence,  and  atoms 
are   formed." 

This  vivid  picture  may  be  brought  up  to  date  by  the  sub- 
stitution of  free  protons  and  electrons  for  the  hypothetical 
protyle.  We  can  imagme  regions  containing  matter  where 
the  temperature  is  so  high  that  not  only  is  the  dissociation  of 
atoms  from  atoms  and  nuclei  from  planetary  electrons  com- 
plete but  also  protons  and  electrons  are  in  a  state  of  agitation 
so  violent  that  even  the  most  stable  nuclei  cannot  be  formed. 
We  should  have  here  matter  of  the  simplest  form  we  can 
imagine,  or  rather  of  no  form  at  all,  simply  a  more  or  less 
neutral  electric  gas.  Such  a  condition  is  by  no  means  impos- 
sible in  our  miiverse  and  may  actually  occur  during  one  of  those 
excessively  violent  catastrophes  occurring  in  far  distant  space 
and  observed  by  us  as  new  stars. 

By  some  such  cooling  process  as  that  suggested  by  Crookes 
we  easily  imagine  the  free  charges  combining  to  form  the 
nuclei  of  elements.  Whether  those  of  heavier  elements  are 
formed  direct  by  the  charges  getting  into  particular  geometrical 
relations  with  each  other,  or  whether  hehum  nuclei  are  formed 
first  and  then  subsequently  coalesce  depends  on  which  theory 
of  nuclear  structure  is  adopted.  In  any  case  vast  quantities  of 
energy  will  have  to  be  radiated  off  and  this  radiation  may  be 
of  such  extremely  high  frequency  that  it  is  capable  of  dis- 


ISOTOPES  AND  ATOMIC  NUMBERS  119 

rupting  nuclei  themselves,  so  that  there  might  be  at  this  stage 
rapid  and  continuous  transformations  from  heavier  to  lighter 
nuclei  and  vice  versa. 

For  the  present  we  are  interested  in  the  number  of  each 
type  of  atom  which  survives.  It  is  obvious  that  if  the  con- 
ditions of  cooling  are  practically  identical  throughout  the  whole 
mass  there  is  no  reason  why  the  composition  of  the  matter 
produced  should  vary.  If  3  atoms  of  CP^  are  formed  to  every 
1  of  CP^  at  any  one  point  the  same  ratio  must  hold  at  every 
point  so  that  a  complex  element  of  constant  atomic  weight 
will  be  formed.  But  it  is  much  more  likely  that  different  parts 
of  this  primordial  mass  will  undergo  their  transformations 
under  different  rates  of  cooling,  etc.,  so  it  is  worth  while 
inquiring  if  variation  in  the  mean  atomic  weight  of  a  complex 
element  is  to  be  expected. 

The  quantity  of  one  particular  atomic  nucleus  formed  will 
probably  depend  (a)  on  the  probability  of  a  certain  configura- 
tion of  charges  happening  as  a  chance  event ;  (b)  the  stability  of 
the  particular  nucleus  formed  as  the  result  of  that  event. 
Again  to  take  the  case  of  chlorine  each  isotope  may  be  regarded 
as  completely  stable  and  the  relative  quantities  formed  will 
simply  depend  on  condition  (a).  Now  it  is  not  unreasonable 
to  suppose  that  this  is  not  seriously  affected  by  different  rates 
of  cooUng,  and  in  this  case  the  isotopes  will  be  evolved  in 
constant  proportion.  As  we  know  of  no  natural  process  by 
which  the  proportion  of  isotopes  can  be  altered  appreciably 
the  complex  elements  will  have  to-day  the  same  chemical 
atomic  weight  as  when  they  were  first  formed. 

The  above  argument  is  of  course  purely  a  speculative  one, 
and  the  conclusion  drawn  from  it  would  fall  to  the  ground  at 
once  if  noteworthy  differences  of  atomic  weight  in  a  single 
complex  element  were  found — supposing  that  element  was  not 
the  product  of  a  radioactive  change — at  different  points  on  the 
earth's  surface.  It  may  be  worth  noting  that  condition  (a) 
suggests  that,  in  general,  the  lighter  atoms  will  outnumber 
the  heavier  ones.  In  aU  matter  available  in  nature  this 
preponderance  is  actually  enormous. 

If  the  matter  forming  the  earth  ever  went  through  a  prim- 
ordial stage  such  as  that  suggested  above  it  certainly  did  so 


120  ISOTOPES 

more  than  10^  years  ago.  It  follows  that  of  the  radioactive 
elements  then  formed  only  two,  thorium  and  uranium,  wiU 
now  be  found  on  the  earth,  for  the  other  radioactive  elements 
existing  to-day  are  of  such  short  period  that  they  must  have 
been  formed  since.  Hence  we  may  divide  the  original  elements 
very  simply  and  definitely  into  two  groups  :  (1)  All  the 
inactive  elements,  whose  nuclei  are  sufficiently  simple  to  be 
stable ;  (2)  Thorium  and  Uranium,  whose  nuclei  are  so 
complex  that  they  are  only  partially  stable. 

Other  less  stable  elements  vfiay  have  been  formed  then  but 
there  can  be  no  proof  of  this  for  they  would,  in  any  case,  have 
disappeared  long  ago,  and  it  is  clear  that  the  other  radioactive 
elements  now  found  can  all  be  regarded  as  formed  from  the 
two  parent  elements  in  comparatively  recent  times. 


CHAPTER  X 
THE  SPECTRA  OF  ISOTOPES 

108.  The  Spectra  of  isotopes. — As  has  already  been 
stated^  the  first  experimental  work  on  the  spectra  of  isotopes 
was  that  of  Russell  and  Rossi  in  1912  who  failed  to  distinguish 
any  difference  between  the  spectrum  of  thorium  and  that  of  a 
mixture  of  thorium  and  ionium  containing  a  considerable 
percentage  of  the  latter.  The  same  negative  result  was 
obtained  by  Exner  and  Haschek.^  During  the  fractional 
diffusion  of  neon^  no  spectroscopic  difference  was  detected 
between  the  heaviest  and  the  lightest  fraction,  though  as  the 
separation  was  small  this  negative  evidence  was  not  very 
strong.  In  1914  Soddy  and  Hyman  showed  that  the  spectrum 
of  lead  derived  from  thorium  was  identical  with  that  of  ordinary 
lead.*  Furthermore  in  the  same  year  the  experiments  of 
Richards  and  Lembert,^  Honigschmidt  and  HoroAvitz,*^  and 
Merton '' proved  the  same  result.  Merton  concluded  from  his 
1914  experiments  that  the  difference  in  wave-length  for  the 
A  4058  line  must  be  less  than  0-003  A.  Before  going  on  to 
consider  the  more  recent  results  it  will  be  as  well  to  discuss  the 
magnitude  of  the  difference  to  be  expected  from  theory. 

109.  The  magnitude  of  the  Gravitational  effect. — In 

the  Bohr  theory  of  spectra  the  planetary  electrons  of  the  atom 
rotate  round  the  central  positively  charged  nucleus  in  various 

1  F.  p.  9. 

2  Exiier  and  Haschek,  Sitz.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  iia,  121,  175,     1912. 

3  V.  p.  39. 

*  Soddy  and  Hyman,  Jour.  Chem.  Soc,  105,  1402,     1914. 
^  Richards  and  Lembert,  Jour.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc,  36,  1329,     1914. 
^  Honigschmidt  and  Horowitz,   Sitz.   Akad.    Wiss.    Wien,   iia,   123, 
1914. 

'  Merton,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc,  91A,  198,     1914. 

121 


122  ISOTOPES 

stable  orbits.  The  frequencies  of  the  spectral  lines  emitted 
by  the  element  are  associated  in  an  absolutely  definite  manner 
with  the  rotational  frequencies  of  these  orbits  which  are 
calculated  by  what  is  known  as  a  "  quantum "  relation. 
Without  going  further  into  the  theory  it  will  be  seen  at  once 
that  if  we  alter  the  force  acting  between  the  central  nucleus 
and  its  planetary  electrons  these  orbits  will  change  and  with 
them  the  frequency  of  the  light  emitted.  It  is  therefore  of 
interest  to  examine  the  magnitude  of  the  change,  to  be  expected 
from  this  theory,  when  we  alter  the  mass  of  the  nucleus  without 
changing  its  charge,  and  so  pass  from  one  isotope  to  another. 

The  difference  in  the  system  which  will  first  occur  to  one  is 
that  although  the  electrical  force  remains  the  same  the  gravi- 
tational force  must  be  altered.  The  order  of  magnitude  of 
the  change  expected  in  the  total  force  will  clearly  be  given  by 
considering  the  ratio  between  the  electrical  and  gravitational 
forces  acting,  to  take  the  simplest  case,  between  the  protou 
and  the  electron  in  a  neutral  hydrogen  atom. 

Assuming  the  law  of  force  to  be  the  same  in  both  cases,  this 
ratio  is  simply  e^/GMm  ;  where  e  is  the  electronic  charge 
4-77  X  10~i",  G  the  universal  gravitational  constant  6-6  x  10"^, 
M  the  mass  of  the  proton  1-66  x  lO"^*^  and  m  the  mass  of  the 
electron  9-0  x  10~  2^.  Putting  in  these  numerical  values  we 
obtain  the  prodigious  ratio  2-3  x  10  ^9.  In  other  words  the 
effect  of  doubling  the  mass  of  the  nucleus  without  altering  its 
charge  would  give  the  same  percentage  increase  in  the  total 
pull  on  the  planetary  electron,  as  would  be  produced  in  the 
pull  between  the  earth  and  the  moon  by  a  quantity  of  meteoric 
dust  weighing  less  than  one  million  millionth  of  a  gramme 
falling  upon  the  surface  of  the  former  body.  The  gravitational 
effect  may  therefore  be  dismissed  as  entirely  negligible. 

110.  Deviation  of  the  Bohr  orbits  due  to  change  in 
the  position  of  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  rotating 
system. — Although  we  may  neglect  the  gravitational  effect 
there  is  another,  of  quite  a  different  order,  which  arises  in  the 
following  manner.  The  mass  of  the  electron  compared  with 
that  of  the  nucleus  is  small  but  not  absolutely  negligible,  hence 
it  will  not  rotate  about  the  nucleus  as  though  that  were  a 


THE  SPECTRA  OF  ISOTOPES  123 

fixed  point,  but  both  will  rotate  about  their  common  centre 
of  gravity.  The  position  of  this  centre  of  gravity  will  be 
shifted  by  any  alteration  in  the  mass  of  the  nucleus.  If  E,  M 
and  e,  m  are  the  respective  charge  and  mass  of  the  nucleus  and 
the  rotating  electron,  the  equation  of  motion  is 

rM         ,       Ee 

M  +  m  r^ 

where  r  is  the  distance  between  the  two  charges  and  w  the 
angular  velocity.  Bohr  ^  introduced  this  effect  of  the  mass  of 
the  nucleus  in  order  to  account  for  the  results  obtained  by 
Fowler.  2     The  Bohr  expression  for  the  frequency  then  becomes 

where  e,  E  and  m,  M  are  the  charges  and  masses  of  the  electron 
and  nucleus  respectively.  If  we  suppose  that  the  atomic 
weight  of  lead  from  radium  to  be  one  unit  less  than  that  of 
ordinary  lead,  this  theory  predicts  a  difference  in  wave-length, 
for  the  principle  line,  of  000005  A  between  the  two,  a  quantity 
beyond  the  reach  of  the  most  delicate  methods  of  spectrum 
analysis  used  up  to  the  present. 

111.  Later  experiments  of  Aronberg  and  Merton. — 

In  1917  Aronberg,^  applying  the  extremely  high  dispersion 
derived  from  the  spectrum  of  the  sixth  order  of  a  Michelson 
10-inch  grating  to  the  line  A  4058  emitted  from  a  specimen  of 
radio-lead  of  atomic  weight  206-318,  observed  a  difiference  of 
0-0044  A  between  this  and  ordinary  lead,  of  atomic  weight 
207-20.  This  remarkable  result  has  been  since  confirmed  by 
Merton  of  Oxford*  who  gives  the  difference  of  wave-length 
between  radio-lead  from  pitchblende  and  ordinary  lead  as 
0-0050^2 0-0007,  Merton  made  use  of  a  totally  different  optical 
system,  namely  a  Fabry  and  Perot  etalon,  so  that  the  agreement 
is  very  striking. 

It  is  to  be  noticed  that  the  effect  observed  was  not  a  mere 

1  Bohr,  Nature,  92,  231,     1913. 

2  Fowler,  Nature,  92,  95,     1913. 

3  Aronberg,   Proc.   Nat.   Acad.   Sci.,  Z,   710,     1917,   and  Astrophys, 
Jour.,  47,  96,     1918. 

4  Merton,  Proc.  Boy.  Soc,  96A,  388,       920. 


124 


ISOTOPES 


broadening  of  the  line  but  a  definite  shift,  and  that,  though 
of  the  same  sign,  it  is  about  one  hundred  times  greater  than 
that  predicted  by  the  Bohr  theory,  Merton  also  found  a  shift 
of  0-0022 ±0-0008  A  between  the  wave-length  of  thorite-lead 
and  ordinary  lead,  differing  in  atomic  weight  by  about  0-6. 
The  heavier  atom  shows  the  higher  frequency  in  all  cases. 
This  remarkable  discrepancy  between  the  shift  predicted  by 
theory  and  that  actually  observed  has  been  discussed  by 
Harkins  and  Aronberg.^ 

At  a  recent  discussion  on  isotopes  at  the  Royal  Society  ^ 
Merton  commented  upon  the  line  6708  A  emitted  by  the 
element  lithium,  which  consists  of  two  components  0-151  A 
apart.  If  lithium  is  accepted  as  a  mixture  of  isotopes  6  and  7,^ 
he  calculated  that  each  of  these  components  should  be  accom- 
panied by  a  satellite,  some  sixteen  times  as  faint,  displaced  by 
0-087  A.  So  far  he  had  not  been  able  to  observe  such  satellites. 
Previous  experiments  of  Merton  and  Lindemann*  on  the 
expected  doubling  in  the  case  of  neon  had  given  no  conclusive 
results  on  account  of  the  physical  width  of  the  lines.  It  was 
hoped  that  this  difficulty  could  be  overcome  by  the  use  of 
liquid  hydrogen  temperatures. 

StiU  more  recently  Merton^  has  repeated  his  experiments  on 
lead,  using  a  very  pure  sample  of  uranium  lead  from  Australian 
Carnotite.  His  final  results  are  indicated  in  the  following 
table  : 


A 

(Carnotite  lead)"! 
. — ^(ordinary  lead)  J 

r     Wave  niimber  (ordinary  lead) ' 
. — Wave-number  (Carnotite  lead). 

4058 
3740 
3684 
3640 
3573 

0-011   ±0-0008 
0-0074±0-0011 
0-0048±0-0007 
0-0070±0-0003 
0-0048±0-0005 

0-065±0-005 
0-053±0-008 
0-035±0-005 
0-C52±0-002 
0-037±0-004 

1  Harkiiis  and  Aronberg,  Jour.  Am.  Chem.  Soc,  42,  1328, 

« Merton,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.»  99A,  87,     1921. 

»  V.  p.  86. 

*  Lindemann,  ibid. 

«  Merton,  Roy.  Soc.  Proc,  lOOA,  84,     1921. 


1920. 


THE   SPECTRA   OF  ISOTOPES  125 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  shift  for  the  line  A  4058  is  rather 
more  than  twice  that  obtained  before.  Merton  suggests  that 
the  most  probable  explanation  of  this  difference  is  evidently 
that  the  Carnotite  lead  used  is  a  purer  sample  of  uranium  lead 
than  that  obtained  from  the  pitchblende  residues.  It  is  also 
apparent  that  the  differences  are  not  the  same  for  different 
lines,  an  interesting  and  somewhat  surprising  result. 

112.  "Isotope"  effect  on  the  Infra-red  spectrum  of 
molecules. — The  extreme  smaUness  of  the  isotope  "  shift  " 
described  above  in  the  case  of  line  spectra  emitted  by  atoms  is 
due  to  the  fact  that  one  of  the  particles  concerned  in  the 
vibration  is  the  electron  itself,  whose  mass  is  minute  compared 
with  that  of  the  nucleus.  Very  much  larger  effects  should  be 
expected  for  any  vibration  in  which  two  atoms  or  nuclei  are 
concerned,  instead  of  one  atom  and  an  electron.  Such  a 
vibration  would  be  in  the  infra-red  region  of  the  spectrum. 

This  effect  was  first  observed  by  Imes^  when  mapping  the 
fine  structure  of  the  infra-red  absorption  bands  of  the  halogen 
acids.  In  the  case  of  the  HCl  "  Harmonic  "  band  at  1-76^, 
mapped  with  a  20,000  line  grating,  the  maxima  were  noticed 
to  be  attended  by  satellites.  Imes  remarks  :  "  The  apparent 
tendency  of  some  of  the  maxima  to  resolve  into  doublets  in  the 
case  of  the  HCl  harmonic  may  be  due  to  errors  of  observation, 
but  it  seems  significant  that  the  small  secondary  maxima  are 
all  on  the  long-wave  side  of  the  principal  maxima  they  accom- 
pany. It  is,  of  course,  possible  that  still  higher  dispersion 
applied  to  the  problem  may  show  even  the  present  curves  to 
be  composite." 

Loomis^  pointed  out  that  these  satellites  could  be  attributed 
to  the  recently  discovered  isotopes  of  chlorine.  In  a  later 
paper ^  he  has  shown  that,  if  mi  is  the  mass  of  the  hydrogen 
nucleus,  and  ma  the  mass  of  the  charged  halogen  atom,  the 

difference  should  be  expressed  by  the  quanity  — ^ — ~   the 

square  root  of  which  occurs  in  the  denominator  of  the  expression 

^  Imes,  Astrophysical  Journal,  50,  251,     1919. 

2  Loomis,  Nature,  Oct.  7,  179,     1920. 

^  Loomis,  Astrophysical  Journal,  52,  248,     1920. 


126  ISOTOPES 

for  frequency.  "  Consequently  the  net  difference  between 
the  spectra  of  isotopes  will  be  that  the  wave-lengths  of  lines 
in  the  spectrum  of  the  heavier  isotope  will  be  longer  than  the 
corresponding  lines  for  the  lighter  isotope  in  the  ratio 
1  +  1/1330  :  1  for  chlorine  and  1  -f  1/6478  :  1  for  bromine. 
Since  the  average  atomic  weight  of  chlorine  is  35-46  the  amounts 
of  CP^  and  CP'  present  in  ordinary  chlorine  must  be  as 
1-54  :  0-46  or  as  3-35  :  1  and,  if  the  lines  were  absolutely  sharp 
and  perfectly  resolved,  the  absorption  spectrum  of  ordinary 
HCl  should  consist  of  pairs  of  lines  separated  by  1/1330  of 
their  frequency  and  the  one  of  shorter  wave-length  should  have 
about  3-35  the  intensity  of  the  other.  The  average  atomic 
weight  of  bromine  is  79-92,  hence  the  two  isotopes  are  present 
in  nearly  equal  proportions  and  the  absorption  spectrum  of 
HBr  should  consist  of  lines  of  nearly  equal  intensity  separated 
by  1/6478  of  their  frequency." 

The  latter  will  be  too  close  to  be  observed  with  the  dispersion 
employed.  In  the  case  of  the  HCl  band  at  IIQ  ju  the  difference 
of  wave  number  on  this  view  should  be  4-3.  The  mean  differ- 
ence of  wave  number  given  by  Loomis'  measurements  of  13 
lines  on  Imes'  original  curves  for  this  band  is  4-5  ^  0-4  corre- 
sponding to  14  A  in  wave-length. 

The  spectroscopic  confirmation  of  the  isotopes  of  chlorine 
has  also  been  discussed  by  Kratzer,!  who  considers  that  the 
oscillation-rotation  bands  of  hydrogen  chloride  due  to  Imes^ 
are  in  complete  accordance  with  the  theory. 

1  H.  Ivratzer,  Zeit.  Physik.,  3,  60,     1920. 
*  Loc.  cit. 


CHAPTER   XI 
THE   SEPARATION   OF   ISOTOPES 

113.  The  Separation  of  Isotopes. — The  importance, 
from  purely  practical  and  technical  points  of  view,  of  the 
theory  of  isotopes  would  have  been  insignificant  had  its 
application  been  confined  to  the  radioactive  elements  and  their 
products,  which  are  only  present  in  infinitesimal  quantities 
on  the  Earth.  But  now  that  the  isotopic  nature  of  many 
elements  in  everyday  use  has  been  demonstrated,  the  possi- 
bility of  their  separation,  to  any  reasonable  extent,  raises 
questions  of  the  most  profound  importance  to  applied  science. 
In  physics  all  constants  involving,  e.g.,  the  density  of  mercury 
or  the  atomic  weight  of  silver  may  have  to  be  redefined,  while 
in  chemistry  the  most  wholesale  reconstruction  may  be 
necessary  for  that  part  of  the  science  the  numerical  founda- 
tions of  which  have  hitherto  rested  securely  upon  the  constancy 
of  atomic  weights. 

It  is  therefore  of  great  interest  to  consider  in  turn  the 
various  methods  of  separation  proposed  and  examine  how 
far  they  have  been  successful  in  practice. 

114.  Separation  by  Diffusion. — The  subject  of  the 
separation  of  a  mixture  of  two  gases  by  the  method  of  Atmoly- 
sis  or  Dijffusion  has  been  thoroughly  investigated  by  the  late 
Lord  Rayleigh.^  The  diffusion  is  supposed  to  take  place 
through  porous  material.  The  conditions  under  which 
maximum  separation  is  to  be  obtained  are  that  "  mixing  " 
is  perfect,  so  that  there  can  be  no  accumulation  of  the  less 
diffusible  gas  at  the  surface  of  the  porous  material,  and  that 
the  apertures  in  the  material  through  which  the  gases  must 

iRayleigh,  Phil.  Mag.,  42,  493,     1896. 
127 


128  ISOTOPES 

pass  are  very  small  compared  with  the  mean  free  path  of  the 
molecules.  If  these  conditions  are  satisfied  he  obtains  as  an 
expression  for  the  effect  of  a  single  operation  : — 


X  +  y    _     ^  .     _^       Y 


r  '^ 


X  +  Y       X  +  Y  "-'^       X  +  Y     "-'- 

where  (X  Y)  {x,  y)  are  the  initial  and  final  volumes  of  the 
gases,  /I,  V,  the  velocities  of  diffusion,  and  r  the  enrichment 
of  the  residue  as  regards  the  second  constituent. 

The  velocity  of  diffusion  of  a  gas  is  proportional  to  the 
square  root  of  the  mass  of  its  molecules,  so  that  if  a  mixture 
of  two  isotopes  is  allowed  to  diffuse  a  change  in  composition 
must  be  brought  about.  Now  no  known  isotopes  differ  from 
each  other  much  in  mass,  so  the  difference  between  their 
rates  of  diffusion  will  also  be  small,  hence  the  above  equation 
may  be  written  in  the  approximate  form — 

^-  =  rTc     where     h  = ^    a     small     quantity     and, 

and,  finally,  the  enrichment  by  diffusion  of  the  residue  as 
regards  the  heavier  constituent  may  be  expressed  with  sufficient 
accm'acy  by  the  expression 


mi-m  /Initial  volume 


Final  volume 


where  Wi,  mg  are  the  molecular  masses  of  the  lighter  and 
heavier  isotope  respectively.  In  the  most  favourable  case 
known  at  present,  that  of  the  isotopes  of  neon,  the  number 
over  the  root  is  21  so  that  the  change  in  composition  obtain- 
able in  a  single  operation  will  in  practice  be  very  small. 

If  we  take  the  density  of  the  original  mixture  as  unity,  the 
increase  in  density  of  the  residual  gas  to  be  expected  from  the 
operation  of  diffusion  will  be  approximately 

(r  —  1)  X  ^  X  2      ^ 


X  Wg  +  Wi 

Now  neon  consists  of  monatomic  molecules  differing  between 
each  other  in  mass  by  10  per  cent,  and  the  heavier  is  present 
to  the  extent  of  10  per  cent.  In  the  diffusion  experiments 
described  on  p.  39  the  effective  ratio  of  the  initial  volume  to 


THE   SEPARATION   OF  ISOTOPES  129 

the  final  volume  was  estimated  as  certainly  greater  than  500 
and  probably  less  than  10,000,  so  that  r  lies  between  1-3 
and  1-5.  Hence  the  increase  of  density  of  the  heavier  residue 
should  have  been  between  -003  and  -005.  It  was  actually 
•004. 

115.  The  separation  of  the  isotopes  of  chlorine  by  the 
diffusion  of  HCl. — In  the  case  of  other  isotopic  gaseous 
mixtures  the  numerical  obstacles  in  the  way  of  practical 
separation  wiU  be  correspondingly  greater.  Thus  in  the  case 
of  HCl  the  36th  root  is  involved,  and  in  that  of  HBr  the  80th 
root.  The  only  way  by  which  measurable  increase  in  density 
may  be  hoped  for  wiU  clearly  be  by  increasing  the  effective 
ratio  of  the  initial  to  final  volumes  to  an  heroic  degree.  This 
can  be  done  by  experiments  on  a  huge  scale  or  by  a  vast 
number  of  mechanical  repetitions. 

Harkins  started  to  attack  the  HCl  problem  in  1916  ^  using 
th€  first  of  these  two  alternatives.  In  1920  he  mentions  a 
quantity  of  19,000  litres  of  HCl  as  having  been  dealt  with  in 
these  experiments. 2  In  the  following  year^  he  published 
numerical  results  indicating  that  a  change  in  atomic  weight 
of  0-055  of  a  unit  had  been  achieved. 

At  the  recent  discussion  on  isotopes  *  Sir  J.  J.  Thomson 
pointed  out  that  a  change  in  the  molecular  weight  of  HCl 
should  be  caused  by  allowing  a  stream  of  the  gas  to  flow  over 
the  surface  of  a  material  which  absorbed  it.  The  higher 
diffusion  coefficient  of  the  lighter  isotope  would  result  in  it 
being  absorbed  more  rapidly  than  the  heavier  one,  so  that  the 
residue  of  unabsorbed  gas  should  give  a  higher  molecular 
weight.  This  "  free  diffusion  "  without  the  interposition  of 
porous  material  has  been  recently  tried  in  the  Cavendish 
Laboratory  by  E.  B.  Ludlam,  but  no  measurable  difference 
has  so  far  been  detected. 

116.  Separation  by   Thermal  Diffusion. — It  has  been 

^  Harkins,  Jour.  Amer.  Cheni.  Soc,  Feb.,     1916. 

2  Harkins,  Science,  Mar.  19,  1920 ;  Nature,  Apl.  22,  1920 ;  see 
also  Phys.  Rev.,  15,  74,  1920  ;  Science,  51,  289,  1920 ;  Jour.  Amer, 
Chem.  Soc,  42,  1328,     1920. 

3  Harkins,  Science,  Oct.  14,    1921  ;    Nature,  Oct.  3,     1921. 
*  J.  J.  Thomson,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc,  99A,  98,    1921. 

K 


130  ISOTOPES 

shown  on  theoretical  grounds  independently  by  Enskog  ^ 
and  Chapman  ^  that  if  a  mixture  of  two  gases  of  different 
molecular  weights  is  allowed  to  diffuse  freely,  in  a  vessel  of 
which  the  ends  are  maintained  at  two  different  temperatures 
T,T',  until  equilibrium  conditions  are  reached,  there  will  be 
a  slight  excess  of  the  heavier  gas  at  the  cold  end,  and  of  the 
lighter  gas  at  the  hot  end.  The  separation  attained  depends 
on  the  law  of  force  between  the  molecules  and  is  a  maximum 
if  they  behave  as  elastic  spheres.  The  effect  was  experi- 
mentally verified  for  a  mixture  of  CO2  and  Ha  by  Chapman 
and  Dootson,^  and  recently  Ibbs  *  has  demonstrated  that  the 
separation  can  be  carried  out  continuously  and  that  the  time 
for  equilibrium  to  be  established  is  quite  short. 

Chapman  has  suggested  ^  that  thermal  diffusion  might  be 
used  to  separate  isotopes.  He  shows  that  the  separating 
power  depends  on  a  constant  ^x.  And  when  the  difference 
between  the  molecular  masses  mi,  ma  is  smaU  the  value  of 
this  is  approximately  given  by 

,     _  17  ma  —  mi  AiAj 

^^  ~~  3     ma  +  mi  9-15  — 8-25  AiAa 
where  ^1,^2  denote  the  proportions  by  volume  of  each  gas  in 
the  mixture  ;    thus  Ai  -f  Aa  ==1.      The  actual  separation  is 
given  by 

Ai  — A'l  =  — (Ai  — A'a)  =A;t  log  T'/T. 

He  gives  the  following  numerical  example  :  "  Suppose  that  it  is 
desired  to  separate  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  of  Ne^"  and  Ne^^, 
then,  writing  mi  =  20,  ma  =  22,  Ai  =  A3  =  ^,  we  find  that 
Ic,^  =  0-0095.  Suppose  that  the  mixture  is  placed  in  a  vessel 
consisting  of  two  bulbs  joined  by  a  tube,  and  one  bulb  is 
maintained  at  80°  absolute  by  liquid  air,  while  the  other  is 
heated  to  800°  absolute  (or  527°  C).  When  the  steady  state 
has  been  attained  the  difference  of  relative  concentration 
between  the  two  bulbs  is  given  by  the  equation 

1  Enskog,  Phys.  Zeit.,  12,  538,     1911  ;  Ann.  d.  Phys.,  38,  750,      1912. 

2  Chapman,  Phil.  Trans.,  217A,  115,  1916;  Phil.  Mag.,  34,  146, 
1917. 

3  Chapman  and  Dootson,  Phil.  Mag.,  34,  248,     1917. 
*  Ibbs,  Proc.  Boy.  Soc,  99A,  385,     1921. 

^Chapman,  Phil  Mag.,  38,  182,     1919. 


THE   SEPARATION  OF  ISOTOPES  131 

Ai  —  A'l  =  —  (A 2  —  A' 2)  =  0-0095  log,  800/80 

=  0-022 

or  2-2  per  cent.  Thus  the  cold  bulb  would  contain  48-9  per 
cent.  Ne^"  to  51-1  per  cent.  Ne^^,  and  vice  versa  in  the  hot 
bulb.  By  drawing  o£f  the  contents  of  each  bulb  separately, 
and  by  repeating  the  process  with  each  portion  of  the  gas,  the 
difference  of  relative  concentrations  can  be  much  increased. 
But  as  the  proportions  of  the  two  gases  become  more  unequal, 
the  separation  effected  at  each  operation  slowly  decreases. 
For  instance,  when  the  proportions  are  as  3  :  1,  the  variation 
at  each  operation  falls  to  1-8  per  cent.  ;  while  if  they  are  as 
10  :  1  the  value  is  1-2  per  cent.  This  assumes  that  the  mole- 
cules behave  like  elastic  spheres  :  if  they  behave  like  point 
centres  of  force  varying  as  the  inverse  nth.  power  of  the  distance, 
the  separation  is  rather  less;  e.g.,  ii  n=9,  it  is  just  over 
half  the  above  quantities." 

Chapman  points  out  that  for  equal  values  of  log  p/p  and 
log  T/T  pressure  diffusion  (centrifuging)  is  about  three  times 
as  powerful  as  thermal  diffusion  but  suggests  that  it  may  be 
more  convenient  to  maintain  large  differences  of  temperature 
than  of  pressure. 

117.  Separation  by  Gravitation  or  "Pressure  Dif- 
fusion."— When  a  heterogeneous  fluid  is  subjected  to  a 
gravitational  field  its  heavier  particles  tend  to  concentrate 
in  the  direction  of  the  field,  and  if  there  is  no  mixing  to  counter- 
act this  a  certain  amount  of  separation  must  take  place.  If 
therefore  we  have  a  mixture  of  isotopes  in  a  gaseous  or  liquid 
state  partial  separation  should  be  possible  by  gravity  or 
centrifuging. 

The  simplest  case  to  consider  is  that  of  the  isotopes  of  neon 
in  the  atmosphere  and,  before  the  matter  had  been  settled  by 
the  mass-spectrograph,  analysis  of  the  neon  in  the  air  at  very 
great  heights  was  suggested  as  a  possible  means  of  proving 
its  isotopic  constitution.  1     The  reasoning  is  as  follows: — 

If  M  be  the  atomic  weight,  g  the  gravitational  constant, 
p  the  pressure,  and  p  the  density,  then  if  no  mixing  takes 
place  dp  =  —gpdh,  h  being  the  height.     In  the  isothermal 

1  Lindemann  and  Aston,  Phil.  Mag.,  37,  530,     1919. 


132  ISOTOPES 

layer  convection  is  small.  If  it  is  small  compared  with 
diffusion  the  gases  will  separate  to  a  certain  extent.  Since 
T  is  constant 

RTp        ,  dp      Mp ,, 

whence  p  =  pffi  Rt     , 

Po  being  the  density  at  the  height  Jiq  at  'which  mixing  by 
convection  ceases,  about  10  kilometres,  and  A^  the  height 
above  this  level.  If  two  isotopes  are  present  in  the  ratio  1 
to  Ko,  so  that  the  density  of  one  is  po  and  of  the  other  Kopo 
at  height  Jiq,  then  their  relative  density  at  height  h^  +  /SJi  is 
given  by 

Putting  T  =  220  as  is  approximately  true  in  England, 

XT 

A^  being  measured  in  kilometres.     If  Mi  —  Ma  =  2,  therefore 

It  might  be  possible  to  design  a  balloon  which  would  rise  to 
100,000  feet  and  there  fill  itself  with  air.  In  this  case  the 
relative  quantity  of  the  heavier  constituent  would  be  reduced 
from  10  per  cent,  to  about  8-15,  so  that  the  atomic  weight  of 
neon  from  this  height  should  be  20-163  instead  of  20-2.  If 
one  could  get  air  from  200,000  feet,  e.g.  by  means  of  a  long- 
range  gun  firing  vertically  upwards,  the  atomic  weight  of  the 
neon  should  be  20-12. 

A  more  practicable  method  is  to  make  use  of  the  enormous 
gravitational  fields  produced  by  a  high  speed  centrifuge. 

In  this  case  the  same  equation  holds  as  above  except  that 
g  varies  from  the  centre  to  the  edge.     In  a  gas  therefore 
<ip__Mv2     dr  _  _Mo)'^ 
~^  ~       Rf  "y  ~       RT       ' 

whence  p  =  poe  2rt, 

Vq  being  the  peripheral  velocity.      Here  again,  if  Kq  is  the 


THE  SEPARATION  OF  ISOTOPES  133 

ratio  of  the  quantities  present  at  the  centre,  the  ratio  at  the 
edge  will  be 

A  peripheral  velocity  of  10^  cm,/s.  or  perhaps  even  1-3  x  10^ 
cm./s.   might  probably  be  attained  in  a  specially  designed 

rr 

centrifuge,  so  that:^^  might  be  made  as  great  as  e"°'2^^'^'~^*^  or 

even  e  ~0'^'^^'^>~^2), 

If  Ml  —  M2  is  taken  as  2  a  single  operation  would  therefore 
give  fractions  with  a  change  of  K  of  0-65.  In  the  case  of  neon 
the  apparent  atomic  weight  of  gas  from  the  edge  would  be 
about  0-65  per  cent,  greater  than  that  of  gas  from  the  centre, 
i.e.  a  separation  as  great  as  the  best  yet  achieved  in  practice 
by  any  method  could  be  achieved  in  one  operation.  By 
centrifuging  several  times  or  by  operating  at  a  lower  tempera- 
ture the  enrichment  might  be  increased  exponentially. 

Centrifuging  a  liquid,  e.g.  liquid  lead,  would  not  appear  so 
favourable,  though  it  is  difficult  to  form  an  accurate  idea  of 
the  quantities  without  a  knowledge  of  the  equation  of  state. 
If  compression  is  neglected  and  the  one  lead  treated  as  a 
solution  in  the  other,  a  similar  formula  to  that  given  above 
holds.  On  assumptions  similar  to  these  Poole ^  has  calculated 
that  a  centrifuge  working  with  a  peripheral  velocity  of  about 
10^  cm. /sec  should  separate  the  isotopes  of  mercury  to  an 
extent  corresponding  to  a  change  of  density  of  0-000015. 

The  only  experiments  on  the  separation  of  isotopes  by  the 
use  of  a  centrifuge,  so  far  described,  are  those  of  Joly  and 
Poole  2  who  attempted  to  separate  the  hypothetical  isotopic 
constituents  of  ordinary  lead  by  this  means.  No  positive 
results  were  obtained  and  the  check  experiments  made  with 
definite  alloys  of  lighter  metals  with  lead  were  by  no  means 
encouraging. 

118.  Separation  by  Chemical  Action  or  Ordinary 
Fractional  Distillation. — The  possibility  of  separating  iso- 
topes by  means  of  the  difference  between  their  chemical 
affinities  or  vapour  pressures  has  been  investigated  very  fully 

1  Poole,  Phil.  Mag.,  41,  818,     1921. 

2  Joly  and  Poole,  Phil.  Mag.,  39,  372,     1920. 


134  ISOTOPES 

from  the  theoretical  standpoint  by  Lindemann.  The  thermo- 
dynamical  considerations  involved  are  the  same  in  both  cases. 
The  reader  is  referred  to  the  original  papers  ^  for  the  details 
of  the  reasoning  by  which  the  following  conclusion  is  reached  : — 
"  Isotopes  must  in  principle  be  separable  both  by  fractiona- 
tion and  by  chemical  means.  The  amount  of  separation  to 
be  expected  depends  upon  the  way  the  chemical  constant  is 
calculated  and  upon  whether  '  NuUpunktsenergie  '  is  assumed. 
At  temperatures  large  compared  with  ^v,^  which  are  the  only 
practicable  temperatures  as  far  as  lead  is  concerned,  the 
difference  of  the  vapour  pressure  and  the  constant  of  the 

Bv 
law  of  mass  action  may  be  expanded  in  powers  of  ^.     The 

Bv 
most  important  term  of  the  type  log  "^  is  cancelled  by  the 

chemical  constant  if  this  is  calculated  by  what  seems  the  only 

Bv 
reasonable  way.     The  next  term  in  —  is  cancelled  by  the 

'  NuUpunktsenergie '   if   this  exists.     All    that    remains    are 

Bv 
terms  containing  the  higher  powers  of  ^.  In  practice  there- 
fore fractionation  does  not  appear  to  hold  out  prospects  of 
success  unless  one  of  the  above  assumptions  is  wrong.  If  the 
first  is  wrong  a  difference  of  as  much  as  3  per  cent,  should 
occur  at  1200  and  a  difference  of  electromotive  force  of  one 
miUivolt  might  be  expected.  Negative  results  would  seem 
to  indicate  that  both  assumptions  are  right." 

As  regards  experimental  evidence  it  has  already  been  pointed 
out  that  the  most  careful  chemical  analysis,  assisted  by  radio- 
active methods  of  extraordinary  delicacy,  was  unable  to  achieve 
the  shghtest  separation  of  the  radioactive  isotopes.  The 
laborious  efforts  to  separate  the  isotopes  of  neon  by  a  differ- 
ence of  vapour  pressure  over  charcoal  cooled  in  hquid  air  also 
gave  a  completely  negative  result. 

119.  Separation  by  evaporation  at  very  low  pressure. 

— If  a  liquid  consisting  of  isotopes  of  different  mass  is  allowed 

1  Lindemann,  Phil.  Mag.,  37,  523,     1919  ;   38,  173,     1919. 

*  (iv  is  the  "  characteristic  "  and  T  the  "  Absolute  "  temperature. 


THE  SEPARATION   OF    ISOTOPES  135 

to  evaporate  it  can  be  shown  that  the  number  of  Hght  atoms 
escaping  from  the  sm'face  in  a  given  time  will  be  greater  than 
the  number  of  heavier  atoms  in  inverse  proportion  to  the 
square  roots  of  their  weights.  If  the  pressure  above  the 
surface  is  kept  so  low  that  none  of  these  atoms  return  the 
concentration  of  the  heavier  atoms  in  the  residue  will  steadily 
increase.  This  method  has  been  used  for  the  separation  of 
isotopes  by  Bronsted  and  Hevesy,  who  appUed  it  first  to  the 
element  mercury. 

The  mercury  was  allowed  to  evaporate  at  temperatures  from 
40°  to  60°  C.  in  the  highest  vacuum  attainable.  The  evaporat- 
ing and  condensing  surfaces  were  only  1  to  2  cms.  apart,  the 
latter  was  cooled  in  liquid  air  so  that  all  atoms  escaping 
reached  it  without  coUision  and  there  condensed  in  the  sohd 
form. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  Uquid  surface  acts  exactly  Uke  the 
porous  diaphragm  in  the  diffusion  of  gases.  ^  The  diffusion 
rate  of  mercury  can  be  obtained  approximately  from  the 
diffusion  rate  of  lead  in  mercury  ^  and  is  such  that  the  mean 
displacement  of  the  mercury  molecule  in  Uquid  mercury  is 
about  5  X  10"^  cm.  sec."^.  It  follows  that  if  not  more  than 
5  X  10"^  c.cm.  per  cm.^  surface  evaporate  during  one  second 
no  disturbing  accumulation  of  the  heavier  isotope  in  the 
surface  layer  takes  place. 

The  separation  was  measured  by  density  determination. 
Mercury  is  particularly  well  suited  for  this  and  a  notable 
feature  of  this  work  was  the  amazing  deUcacy  with  which  it 
could  be  performed.  With  a  5  c.cm.  pyknometer  an  accuracy 
of  one  part  in  two  millions  is  claimed.  The  first  figures 
pubhshed  ^  were  : 

Condensed  mercury.  .  .  .     0-999981 

Residual  mercury    ....      1-000031 

The  densities  being  referred  to  ordinary  mercury  as  unity. 

The  later  work  was  on  a  larger  scale.*  2700  c.cm.  of  mercm-y 
were    employed    and    fractionated    systematically    to    about 

1  V.  p.  127. 

*  Groh  and  Hevesy,  Ann.  der  Phys.,  63,  92,     1920. 
^  Bronsted  and  Hevesy,  Nature,  Sept.  30,      1920. 

*  Bronsted  and  Hevesy,  Phil.  Mag.,  43,  31,     1922. 


136  ISOTOPES 

1/100,000  of  its  original  volume  in  each  direction.     The  final 
figures  were  : 

Lightest  fraction  vol.  0-2  c.c.     .  .     0-99974 

Heaviest  fraction  vol.  0-3  c.c.    .  .      1-00023 

Mercury  behaves  as  though  it  was  a  mixture  of  equal  parts 
of  two  isotopes  with  atomic  weights  202-0,  199-2  in  equal 
parts  or  of  isotopes  201-3,  199-8  when  the  former  is  four  times 
as  strong  as  the  latter,  and  so  on. 

120.  Separation  of  the  isotopes  of  chlorine  by  free 
evaporation. — The  same  two  investigators  were  able  to 
announce  the  first  separation  of  the  isotopes  of  chlorine  ^ 
by  applying  the  above  method  to  a  solution  of  HCl  in  water. 
This  was  allowed  to  evaporate  at  a  temperature  of  —  50°  C. 
and  condense  on  a  surface  cooled  in  hquid  air.  Starting  with 
1  litre  8-6  mol.  solution  of  HCl  100  c.c.  each  of  the  lightest 
and  heaviest  fraction  were  obtained. 

The  degree  of  separation  achieved  was  tested  by  two  difiEerent 
methods.  In  the  first  the  density  of  a  saturated  solution  of 
NaCl  made  from  the  distillate  and  the  residue  respectively 
was  determined  with  the  following  results  : — 

Density  (salt  from  distillate)  =  1-20222 
Density  (salt  from  residue)      =  1-20235 

These  figures  correspond  to  a  change  in  atomic  weight  of  0-024 
of  a  unit. 

In  the  second  method  exactly  equal  weights  of  the  isotopic 
NaCls  were  taken  and  each  precipitated  with  accurately  the 
same  volume  of  AgNOg  solution,  in  shght  excess.  After  pre- 
cipitation and  dilution  to  2,000  c.c.  the  approximate  concen- 
tration of  the  filtrate  was  determined  by  titration,  also  the 
ratio  of  Ag  concentration  of  the  two  solutions  was  measured 
in  a  concentration  cell.  Calculation  showed  that  the  difference 
in  atomic  weight  of  the  two  samples  was  0-021  in  good  agree- 
ment with  the  density  result. 

121.  Separation  by  Positive  Rays. — The  only  method 
which  seems  to  offer  any  hope  of  separating  isotopes  completely, 
and  so  obtaining  pure  specimens  of  the  constituents  of  a  com- 

1  Bronsted  and  Hevesy,  Nature,  July  14,     1921. 


THE  SEPARATION  OF  ISOTOPES  137 

plex  element,  is  by  analysing  a  beam  of  positive  rays  and 
trapping  the  particles  so  sorted  out  in  different  vessels.  It  is 
therefore  worth  while  inquiring  into  the  quantities  obtainable 
by  this  means. 

Taking  the  case  of  neon  and  using  the  parabola  method  of 
analysis  with  long  parabolic  slits  as  collecting  vessels  we  find 
that  the  maximum  separation  of  the  parabolas  corresponding 
to  masses  20  and  22  (obtained  when  electric  deflexion  d  is 
haK  the  magnetic)  is  approximately 

^  1    M,-M,    _  d_ 
V2        Ml  28" 

Taking  a  reasonable  value  of  0  as  -3  the  maximum  angular 
width  of  the  beam  for  complete  separation  =  0-01.  If  the 
canal-ray  tube  is  made  in  the  form  of  a  slit  at  45°  to  axes, 
i.e.  parallel  to  the  curves,  the  maximum  angular  length  of 
the  beam  might  be  say  5  times  as  great,  which  would  collect 
the  positive  rays  contained  in  a  solid  angle  of  -0005  sq.  radian. 

The  concentration  of  the  discharge  at  the  axis  of  the  positive 
ray  bulb  is  considerable,  and  may  be  roughly  estimated  to 
correspond  to  a  uniform  distribution  of  the  entire  current 
over  a  |-  sq.  radian.  One  may  probably  assume  that  half  the 
current  is  carried  by  the  positive  rays,  and  that  at  least  half 
the  positive  rays  consist  of  the  gases  desired.  If  neon  is 
analysed  by  this  method  therefore  the  total  current  carried 
by  the  positive  rays  of  mass  20  is 

•0005  x4:Xixlxi=  -0005  i. 

If  i  is  as  large  as  5  miUiamperes  this  =  1-5  x    10*   E.S.U. 
1-5  X  10* 


or 


2-7  X  1019  X  4-77  X  10-1" 


=  1-2  X  10"^  c.c./sec. 


i.e.  one  might  obtain  about  one-tenth  of  a  cubic  millimetre  of 
Ne2o  and  1/100  cubic  miUimetre  of  Ne^^  per  100  seconds  run. 
It  is  obvious  that  even  if  the  difficulties  of  trapping  the  rays 
were  overcome,  the  quantities  produced,  under  the  most 
favourable  estimates,  are  hopelessly  small. 

122.  Separation   by   photochemical    methods.— A   re- 
markably   beautiful    method   of    separating    the    isotopes    of 


138  ISOTOPES 

chlorine  has  been  suggested  by  Merton  and  Hartley  which 
depends  upon  the  following  photochemical  considerations. 
Light  falling  on  a  mixture  of  chlorine  and  hydrogen  causes 
these  gases  to  combine  to  form  hydrochloric  acid.  This  must 
be  due  to  the  activation  of  the  atoms  of  hydrogen  or  those  of 
chlorine.  Supposing  it  to  be  the  latter  it  is  conceivable  that 
the  radiation  frequency  necessary  to  activate  the  atoms  of 
Cl^^  will  not  be  quite  the  same  as  that  necessary  to  activate 
those  of  CP'^.  CaUing  these  frequencies  5^35  and  V37  respectively 
it  would  seem  possible,  by  excluding  one  of  these  frequencies 
entirely  from  the  activating  beam,  to  cause  only  one  type  of 
chlorine  to  combine  and  so  to  produce  pure  HCI^^  or  HCI^'. 
Now  ordinary  chlorine  contains  about  three  times  as  much 
CP^  as  CP^  and  these  isotopes  must  absorb  their  own  activat- 
ing radiation  selectively.  In  this  gas  therefore  light  of 
frequency  V35  will  be  absorbed  much  more  rapidly  than  that 
of  frequency  V37,  so  that  if  we  aUow  the  activating  beam  to 
pass  through  the  right  amount  of  chlorine  gas  V35  might  be 
completely  absorbed  but  sufficient  V37  radiation  transmitted 
to  cause  reaction.  On  certain  theories  of  photo-chemistry 
light  containing  ^37  but  no  V35  would  cause  only  atoms  of 
CP^  to  combine  so  that  a  pure  preparation  of  HCP^  would 
result.  Pure  CP'^  made  from  this  product  could  now 
be  used  as  a  filter  for  the  preparation  of  pure  HCP^,  and 
this  in  its  turn  would  yield  pure  CP^  which  could  then  be 
used  as  a  more  efficient  filter  for  the  formation  of  more 
HCP^ 

Had  this  very  elegant  scheme  been  possible  in  practice  it 
would  have  resulted  in  a  separation  of  a  very  different  order 
to  those  previously  described  and  the  preparation  of  un- 
limited quantities  of  pure  isotopes  of  at  least  one  complex 
element.  There  is  however  little  hope  of  this,  for  so  far  the 
results  of  experiments  on  this  method  have  been  entirely 
negative. 

123.  Other  methods  of  separation  and  general  con- 
clusions.— The  following  methods  have  also  been  suggested. 
By  the  electron  impact  in  a  discharge  tube,  in  the  case  of  the 
inert  gases,  the  Ughter  atoms  being  more  strongly  urged  towards 


THE  SEPARATION  OF  ISOTOPES  139 

the  anode  ;^  by  the  migration  velocity  of  ions  in  gelatine  ;  ^ 
by  the  action  of  light  on  metallic  chlorides,^ 

A  survey  of  the  separations  actually  achieved  so  far  shows 
that  from  the  practical  point  of  view  they  are  very  small. 
In  cases  where  the  method  can  deal  with  fair  quantities  of 
the  substance  the  order  of  separation  is  small,  while  in  the 
case  of  complete  separation  (positive  rays)  the  quantities 
produced  are  quite  insignificant.  We  can  form  some  idea  by 
considering  the  quantity 

Q  =  (difference  in  atomic  weight  achieved)  X  (average 
quantity  of  two  fractions  produced  in  grammes).  As  regards 
the  first  of  these  factors  the  highest  figure  so  far  was  0-13 
obtained  by  the  writer  in  the  original  diffusion  experiments  on 
neon,  but  as  the  quantities  produced  were  only  a  few  milli- 
grams Q  is  negligibly  small.  The  highest  values  of  Q  have 
been  obtained  by  Bronsted  and  Hevesy  by  their  evaporation 
method.*  It  is  0-5  in  the  case  of  Hydrochloric  Acid,  0-34  in 
that  of  Mercury. 

When  we  consider. the  enormous  labour  and  difficulty  of 
obtaining  this  result  it  appears  that  unless  new  methods  are 
discovered  the  constants  of  chemical  combination  are  not 
likely  to  be  seriously  upset  for  some  considerable  time  to  come. 

1  Skaupy,  Zeitsch.  Phys.,  3,  289,  460,     1920. 

2  Lindemann,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc,  99A,  104,     1921. 

3  Renz,  Zeit.  Anorg.  Chem.,  116,  62,     1921. 
*  V.  p.  134. 


APPENDIX  I 

Table  of  atomic  weights  and  isotopes  of  the  elements. 

■ — The  elements  are  given  in  order  of  their  atomic  numbers.  The 
different  periods  are  indicated  by  gaps  after  the  inert  gases. 
A  curious  relation,  pointed  out  by  Rydberg,  is  that  the 
atomic  numbers  of  all  the  inert  gases  are  given  by  taking  the 
series  2  (P  +  2^  +  22  +  3^  +  3^  +  4^  +  •  •  •)  and  stoppmg  the 
summation  at  any  term.  This  gives  the  numbers  used  by  Langmuir 
(p.  95). 

The  atomic  weights  given  are  the  International  ones  except  in 
the  cases  marked  with  an  asterisk,  where  the  figures  are  taken  from 
some  of  the  recent  determinations  given  below. 

The  isotopes  where  known  are  given  in  order  of  their  atomic 
masses.  The  proportion  of  an  isotope  in  a  complex  element  is 
indicated  by  the  index  letters  a,  6,  c  ...  in  descending  order. 
In  the  case  of  isotopes  of  the  radioactive  elements  81-92  the  roman 
numeral  gives  the  number  of  them  believed  to  exist.  The  nomen- 
clature of  some  of  the  rare  earths  69-72  is  not  yet  standardised. 
The  names  here  are  those  used  by  Moseley.  Some  of  these  elements, 
though  detected  by  their  X-ray  spectra,  have  never  been  isolated. 
The  elements  corresponding  to  atomic  numbers  43,  61,  75,  85,  87 
(all  odd)  have  not  yet  been  discovered. 

Recent  atomic  weight  determinations. — The  following  is  a 
list  of  some  of  the  elements  whose  atomic  weights  have  been  re- 
determined quite  recently,  together  with  references  to  the  papers 
in  which  they  were  published.  Where  more  than  one  value  is 
given  different  methods  were  used  : 

Fluorine  19-001.     Moles   and  Batuecas,  Jour.  Chim.  Phys.,  18,  353, 

1920. 
Aluminium  26*963.     Richards  and  Krepelka,  Journ.  Am.  Chem.  Soc, 

42,  2221,     1920. 
Silicon  28-111.     Baxter,  Weatherelland  Holmes,  ibid.,  42, 1194,     1920. 
Scandium  45-10.     Honigschmid,  Zeit.  Electrochem.,  25,  93,     1919. 
Tin  118-703.     Baxter  and  Starkweather,  Journ.  Am.  Chem.  Soc,  42, 

905,     1920. 

118-699.     Brauner  and  Krepelka,  ibid.,  42,  917,     1920. 

141 


142 


APPENDIX  I 


Tellurium    127-73,    127-79.     Bruylants    and    Michielsen,    Bull.    Acad. 

Bdg.,  119,     1919. 
Samarium  150 "43.     Owens,  Balke  and   Kremers,  Journ.    Am.    Chem. 

Soc,  42,  515,     1920. 
Thtdium  169-44,  169-66.     James  and  Stewart,  ibid.,  42,  2022,     1920. 
Bismuth  209-02.     Honigschmid,  Zeit.  Electrochem.,  26,  403,     1920. 

208-9967.     Classen  and  Wey,  Ber.,  53,  2267,     1920. 
Antimony  121-773.     Willard  and  McAlpine,  Jouryi.  Am.  Chem.  Soc,  43, 

797,     1921. 
Lanthanum   138-912.     Baxter,  Tani  and  Chapin,   Journ.   Am.   Chem. 

Soc,  43,  1085,     1921. 
Germanium  72-418.     Miller,  Journ.  Am.  Chem.  Soc,  43,  1085,     1921. 
Zinc  65-38.     Baxter  and  Hodges,  i&id.,  43,  1242,     1921. 
Cadmium  112-411.     Baxter  and  Wilson,  ibid.,  43,  1230,     1921. 


-Q 

"  m 

o^ 

Element. 

2 

a 

if 

Masses  of  isotopes. 

£  -2  *^  Hydrogen      .      . 

H 

1 

1-008 

1 

1-008 

f^^'o  Helium     .      .      . 

He 

2 

4-00 

1 

4 

&>  1" 

00      Lithivim  . 

Li 

3 

6-94 

2 

- 

"      Beryllium 

Be 

4 

91 

1 

9 

r^      Boron 

B 

5 

10-9 

2 

10»  11" 

3      Carbon     . 

C 

6 

12-00 

1 

12 

S      Nitrogen  . 

N 

7 

14-008 

1 

14 

^      Oxygen    .      .      . 

0 

8 

16-00 

1 

16 

0      Fluorine  . 

F 

9 

19-00 

1 

19 

''^       Neon  .... 

Ne 

10 

20-20 

2 

20"  22* 
23 

oQ       Sodium    . 

Na 

11 

2300 

1 

^      Magnesium    . 

Mg 

12 

24-32* 

3 

24-=  25*  26^ 

Aluminium    . 

Al 

13 

26-96* 

_o      Silicon 

Si 

14 

28-3 

2 

28"  29*  (30) 

3      Phosphorus  . 

P 

15 

31-04 

1 

31 

^      Sulphur    .      .      . 

s 

16 

3206 

1 

32 

'S      Chlorine  .      .      . 

CI 

17 

35-46 

2 

35"  37*  (39) 

^      Argon       .      .      . 

A 

18 

39-9 

2 

36*  40" 
39"  41* 

Potassium 

K 

19 

39-10 

2 

Calcium   . 

Ca 

20 

40-07 

(2) 

40  (44) 

Scandium 

Sc 

21 

45-1* 

Titanium . 

Ti 

22 

48-1 

Vanadium 

V 

23 

510 

0 

2      Chromium      . 

Cr 

24 

52-0 

H      Manganese     . 

Mn 

25 

54-93 

•'      Iron    .... 

Fe 

26 

55-84 

n 

^      Cobalt      .      .      . 

Co 

27 

58-97 

J      Nickel 

Ni 

28 

58-68 

2 

58"  60* 

P 

n      Copper     . 

Cu 

29 

63-57 

J 

=      Zinc    .... 

Zn 

30 

65-37 

(4) 

(64°  66*  68«  7O<0 

*      Galliimi    .      .      . 

Ga 

31 

70-10 

Germanivmi  . 

Ge 

32 

72-5 

Arsenic     . 

As 

33 

74-96 

1 

75 

Seleniima . 

Se 

34 

79-2 

Bromine  . 

Br 

35 

79-92 

2 

79"  81* 

Krypton  . 

Kr 

36 

82-92 

6 

78/  80«  82'^    83-^  84» 

86* 

APPENDIX  I 


143 


"S   . 

^ 

o  *^ 

O^i 

o  ^^ 

Element 

o 

X! 

E 
>, 

00 

Masses  of  Isotopes. 

Rubidium 

Rb 

37 

85-45 

2 

85"  87* 

Strontium 

Sr 

38 

87-63 

Yttrium  . 

Y 

39 

89-33 

Zirconium 

Zr 

40 

90-6 

Niobium  . 

Nb 

41 

93-1 

00      Molybdenum 

Mo 

42 

96-0 

«*H                                          _     ~ 

— 

43 

— 

'-'      Ruthenium    . 

Ru 

44 

101-7 

'o      Rhodium. 

Rh 

45 

102-9 

■§      Palladium 

Pd 

46 

106-7 

An      Silver  .... 

Ag 

47 

107-88 

X       Cadmium 

Cd 

48 

112-40 

"O      Indiimi     . 

In 

49 

114-8 

Tin      ...      . 

Sn 

50 

118-7 

Antimony 

Sb 

51 

120-2 

Tellurium 

Te 

52 

127-5 

Iodine 

I 

53 

126-92 

1 

127 

L      Xenon 

X 

54 

130-2 

(7)5 

(128)  129"  (130)  13P  132» 
134''  136" 

Caesium  . 

Cs 

55 

132-81 

1 

133 

Barium     . 

Ba 

56 

137-37 

Lanthanum  . 

La 

57 

139-0 

Cerium 

Ce 

58 

140-25 

Praseodymium   . 

Pr 

59 

140-6 

Neodymiimi . 

Nd 

60 

144-3 

— 

— 

61 

— 

Samarium 

Sm 

62 

150-4 

Europium 

Eu 

63 

152-0 

Gadolinium   . 

Gd 

64 

157-3 

Terbium  . 

Tb 

65 

159-2 

Dysprosium  . 

Ds 

66 

162-5 

c 

5      Holmium 

Ho 

67 

163-5 

J,      Erbium    . 

Er 

68 

167-7 

°      Thulium  .      .      . 

Tu 

69 

168-5 

1      Ytterbiiun     .      . 

Yb 

70 

173-5 

'C      Lutecuim 

Lu 

71 

175 

Pm      (Keltium)       .      . 

(Kt) 

72 

ji      Tantalum 

Ta 

73 

181-5 

<»      Tungsten. 

W 

74 

1840 

— 

— 

75 

— 

Osmium  . 

Os 

76 

190-9 

Iridium    . 

Ir 

77 

193-1 

Platinimi . 

Pt 

78 

195-2 

1 

Gold   .... 

Au 

79 

197-2 

Mercury  . 

Hg 

80 

200-6 

(6) 

(197-200)  202  204 

Thallium .      .      . 

Tl 

81 

204-0 

IV 

Lead  .... 

Pb 

82 

207-2 

XI 

Bismuth  . 

Bi 

83 

209-0* 

V 

Poloniuna 

Po 

84 
85 

z 

VII 

L  Emanation 

Em 

86 

222-0 

III 

i 

87 

.2      Radium   . 
®      Actinium. 

Ra 

88 

226-0 

IV 

Ac 

89 

— 

II 

^      Thorium  .      .      . 

Th 

90 

23215 

VI 

^      Uranium  X   . 

UX 

91 

II 

t_     Uranium 

Ur 

92 

238-2 

II 

APPENDIX  II 

The  Periodic  Table  of  the  Elements. — The  atomic  numbers  are  given  in 
bold  type,  the  atomic  weights  in  italics  and  the  isotopes,  where  known,  in 
ordinary  numerals.  The  roman  ntmierals  indicate  the  chemical  groups  and 
the  most  important  associated  valencies  are  given  below  them.  Elements 
are  placed  to  the  left  or  to  the  right  of  the  columns  according  to  their  chemical 
properties,  those  in  the  same  vertical  line  as  each  other  have  strong  chemical 
similarities.  The  Rare  Earth  group  is  surrounded  by  a  thick  line.  Elements 
59-72  have  no  properties  pronounced  enough  to  give  them  definite  places 
in  the  table.     The  properties  of  the  missing  elements  can  be  predicted  with 

PERIODIC  TABLE  OF 


IH 

1-008 


Valency 

0 

I 

+  1 

II 

+  2 

III 

+  3 

IV 

+  4 

2  He 

4-00 
4 

3  Li 

6-94 
6,  7 

4  Be 

9-1 

9 

5B 
10-9 
10,   11 

60 

12-00 
12 

10  Ne 

20-2 
20,  22 

11  Na 

23-00 
23 

12  Mg 

24-32 

24,  25,  26 

13  AI 

26-96 

14  Si 
28-3 
28,29 

18  A 

39-9 
36,  40 

19  K 

39-1 
39,  41 

29  Cu 

63-57 

20  Ca 

40-07 

30  Zn 

65-37 

21  Sc 
45-1 

31  G 

70-1 

22  Ti 
48-1 

32  Ge 

72-5 

36  Kr 

82-92 

78,   80,   82,   83, 
84,  86 

37  Rb 

85-45 

85,  87 

47  Ag 
107-88 

38  Sr 

87-83 

48  Cd 
112-40 

39  Y 

89-33 

49  In 

114-8 

40  Zr 

90-6 

50  Sn 

118-7 

54  Xe 

130-2 

129,  131,  132, 
134,  136 

55  Cs 

132-81 

133 

56  Ba 

137-37 

57  La                      58  Ce 
139-0                        140-25 

59  Pr       eONd       61—         62  Sm           63  Eu             64  Gd           65  Tb 
140-6       144-3                         150-4            152-0                 157-3           159-2 

66  Ds      67  Ho     68  Ev         69  Tu          70  Yb              71  Lu           72  (Kt) 
162-5       163-5       1677            168-5           173-5               175 

79  Au 

197-2 

80  Hg 

200-6 
197-204 

81  Tl 

204-0 

82  Pb 

207-2 

86  Em 

222-0 

87- 

88  Ra 

226-0 

89  Ac 

90  Th 

232-15 

144 


APPENDIX  II 

coiosiderable  certainty  from  the  positions  of  their  atomic  numbers.  From 
the  point  of  view  of  the  construction  of  the  atom  the  inert  gases  should  mark 
the  end  of  the  periods  as  they  are  shown  to  do  ua  the  hst  of  atomic  weights 
in  Appendix  I,  on  the  other  hand  it  is  more  usual  in  chemistry  to  start  with 
valency  0.  From  principles  of  general  convenience  of  arrangement  the 
latter  plan  is  adopted  in  this  table,  which  is  intended  to  give  the  maximum 
amount  of  chemical  information.  Hydrogen,  which  belongs  equally  well 
to  group  I  or  group  VII,  is  best  omitted  from  the. table  altogether. 

THE  ELEMENTS 


V 

VI 

VII 

VIII 

—3 

—2 

- 

-1 

7N 

80 

9F 

14-01 

16-00 

1900 

14 

16 

19 

15  P 

16  S 

17  CI 

31-04 

32-06 

35-46 

31 

32 

35,   37 

23  V 

24  Cr 

25  Mn 

26  Fe 

27  Co 

28  Ni 

Sl-O 

33  As 

74-96 
75 

52-0 

34  Se 

79-2 

54-93 

35  Br 

79-92 
79,  81 

55-85 

58-97 

58-68 
58.60 

41  Nb 

42  Mo 

43— 

44  Ru 

45  Rh 

46  Pd 

93-5 

51  Sb 
120-2 

96-0 

52  Te 
127-5 

531 

126-92 
127 

101-7 

102-9 

106-7 

73  Ta 

74  W 

7&- 

76  0a 

77  Ir 

78  Pt 

181-5 

83  Bi 

209-0 

184-0 

84  Po 

85— 

190-9 

1931 

195-2 

91  UX 

ii 

92  U 

238-2 

145 


APPENDIX  III 

Recent  results  obtained  by  Dempster. — Thanks  to  a  private 
communication  the  writer  is  able  to  include  some  further  results 
obtained  by  Dempster  and  a  diagram  of  his  apparatus  for  obtaining 


Fig.  19. — Diagram  of  Anode  in  Dempster's  latest  apparatus. 

positive  rays  from  metals.  A  full  account  is  to  appear  in  the 
Physical  Review.  Fig.  19  shows  the  new  arrangement  of 
vaporising  furnace  A  and  ionising  filament  C.  The  analysing 
apparatus  has  already  been  described  on  p,  31  and  the  results  with 


.4F 


5-9 


f 

' 

1 

k 

Lithium. 

\ 

1 

\ 

1 

\ 

) 

J 

[ 

<=/ 

v.. 

^^ 

/ 

K 

9 

30 


ZO 


10 


60 


6-1 


6-9 

Atomic  Weight. 


7-0 


7-1 


Fig.  20. — Curve  for  Lithium. 
146 


APPENDIX  III 


147 


magnesium  on  p.  81.  Fig.  20  shows  one  of  the  curves  obtained 
with  lithium.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  relative  intensities  of  the 
isotopes  is  entirely  different  from  that  found  by  the  writer  (p.  86) 
and  also  disagrees  very  definitely  with  the  chemical  atomic  weight. 
Dempster  describes  these  relative  intensities  as  varying  very 
considerably.  This  is  a  most  remarkable  phenomenon  and  further 
information  upon  it  is  very  desirable.  There  seems  just  a  possibility 
that  the  6  line  is  enhanced  by  doubly  charged  carbon  but  it  is  not 
easy  to  see  where  such  particles  could  be  produced. 

l/oltS  943     928     913-5    899-5     886      873     860     847-5 


J 

\ 

Zinc. 

1 

t 

\ 

1 

\ 

1 

\ 

f 

\ 

r 

\ 

\ 

1 

1 

\ 

\i 

1 

1 

\ 

/ 

\ 

I 

/ 

1 

® 

l/ 

\ 

1 

i«^ 

\ 

^^ 

62       63      64       65      66       67 
Atomic  Weight. 

Fig.  21. — Curve  for  Zinc. 


68       69 


70 


Fig.  21  gives  a  remarkable  curve  obtained  from  zinc.  This 
indicates  three  strong  isotopes  and  a  faint  fourth.  The  absolute 
scale  of  atomic  weight  is  not  known  with  certainty,  and  the  values 
63,  65,  67,  69  are  given  by  Dempster  as  those  in  best  agreement 
with  the  atomic  weight  65-37.     Considering  that  the  error  in  the 


148  APPENDIX   III 

mean  atomic  weight  of  lithium,  when  calculated  on  these  lines, 
is  about  5  per  cent,  it  would  appear  possible  that  these  might  be  a 
unit  too  high  or  too  low.  The  probability  of  this  is  strengthened 
very  much  by  the  rule  given  on  p.  110  connecting  even  atomic 
number  with  even  atomic  weight. 

Results  with  calcium  show  only  one  line.  This  makes  it  extremely 
probable  that  this  is  a  simple  element  of  atomic  weight  40  and 
therefore  an  isobare  of  argon. ^ 

Note. — In  a  still  later  communication  Dempster  states  that  he 
has  been  successful  in  using  an  anode  of  calcium  to  which  a  smaU 
quantity  of  zinc  had  been  added.  By  this  means  he  is  able  to 
compare  the  masses  of  the  zinc  isotopes  with  the  strong  calcium 
maximum,  assumed  as  40.  This  gives  the  atomic  weights  as  64, 
66,  68  and  70.  The  intensities  are  quite  different  to  those  in  the 
curve  given  above  for  zinc.  64  is  now  the  strongest,  66  and  68 
fainter,  while  70  is  very  faint  indeed.  No  explanation  is  yet 
advanced  for  these  remarkable  irregularities  in  relative  intensity. 

He  has  also  observed  a  small  maximum  at  44  invariably  accom- 
panying the  strong  calcium  maximum  40.  This  he  considers  to  be 
probably  due  to  an  isotope  of  that  element  present  in  smaU  quantity 
as  suggested  by  the  atomic  weight  40  07. 

The  above  values  are  included  provisionally  in  the  tables  on 
pages  89  and  142. 

"■  V.  p.  88. 


INDEX 


Abnormal  hydrides,  98 

Abundance  of  the  elements,  111 

Accuracy  of  mass-spectrograph,  60 

Actinivim  chain,  14,  15 

Additive  law  of  mass,  99 

Alkali  metals,  mass-spectra  of,   83 

Alpha  ray  changes,  13 

Analysis  of  the  elements,  63 

Andrade    and    Rutherford,    11 

Anode,  composite,  80,  86 
„       hot,  80,  83,  84 

Anticathode,  silica,  48 

Antimony,  78 

Argon,  66 

Aronbeeg,  123 

,,  and  Harkins,  124 

Atmolysis,  separation  by,   127 

Atomic  number,  13,  93 
„       theory,  2 
,,       volume  of  isotopes,  18 
„       weights,  tables  of,  89,  141 
„       weights  of  radio -elements,  13, 
141 

Atoms,  structure  of,  90 

Balke,  Owens  and  Kremers,  142 
Barkla,  93 

Batuecas  and  Moles,  141 
Baxter  and  Hodges,  142 
and  Parsons,  113 
and  Starkweather,  141 
and  Wilson,  142 
Tani  and  Chapin,  142 
Weatherell  and  Holmes, 
73,  142 
Beryllium,  88 
Beta  ray  change,  13 
Bohr,  94,  95,  121,  122,  123 

,,  atom,  95 
BOLTWOOD,  1,  7 
Boron,  72 

„      anomalous  atomic  weight  of, 

114 
„      trifluoride,  73 
Bracketing,  method  of,  59,  69 
Brauner  and  Krepelka,  141 
Broek,  Van  den,  93,  94,  116 
Bromine,  76 


Bronsted  and  Hevesy,  135, 136, 139 

Brosslera,  102,  104 

Bruylants  and  Michielson,  142 

Caesium,  87 

,,        anomalous    atomic    weight 
of,  114 
Calcium,  88,  148 
Calibration  curve,  55 
Camera  of  mass-spectrograph,  51 

„       positive  ray,  26 
Canalstrahlen,  22 
Carbon,  63 

Carnotite,  lead  from,  124 
Cathode  rays,  22,  24 
Chadwick,  94 

„  and  Rutherford,  103 

Chapin,  Baxter  and  Tani,  142 
Chapman,  130 

„         and  DooTSON,  130 
Chemical  action,  separation  by,  133 
„        law  of  radioactive  change, 
11 
Chlorine,  65,  113 

„        separation  of   the  isotopes 
of,  136 
Classen,  31 

and  Wey,  142 
Claude,  35 
Cleveite,  lead  from,  17 
Coincidence,  method  of,  57 
Composite  anode,  80,  86 
Constancy  of  chemical  atomic  weights, 

22 
Cosmical  effect  of  change  of  mass,  103 
Crookes,  3,  4,  24,  115,  117 
,,         dark  space,  24,  35 
„        theory  of  the  evolution  of 
elements,  117 
Curie,  Mlle.  I.,  113 
„     M.,  18 

Dalton's  hypothesis,  2 
Darwin,  15 

Davies   and   Horton,    68 
Deflection  of  positive  rays,  27 
Dempster,  31,  80,  81,  86,  114,  146 


149 


150 


INDEX 


Dempster's  method  of  analysis,  31,146 
Density  balance,  35 

,,        of  isotopic  leads,  17,  18 
Diffusion  of  neon,  39 

separation  by,  127 
velocity,  determination  of, 
20 
Disintegration  theory  of  the  evolu- 
tion of  elements,  116 
Distillation  of  neon,  37 
Distribution     of     lines     on     mass- 

spectrum,  64 
DooTSON  and  Chapman,  130 
Du  Bois  magnet,  61 

Eddington,  104 

Einstein's  theory  of  relativity,  103 
Electrical  theory  of  matter,  90 
Electric  discharge  in  gases,  23 

,,        field    of    mass-spectrograph, 
50 
Electricity  as  an  element,   115 
Electrochemical  properties  of  isotopes, 

10 
Electron,  the,  91 

Element,  meaning  of  the  word,  115 
Enskog,  130 
Epstein,  95 
ExNER  and  Haschek,  121 

Fa  JANS,  11 

First  order  lines,  61 

Fleck, 12 

Fluorine,  72,  97 

Focussing  positive  rays,  44 

FOWLEB,  123 

„       and  Aston,  45 
Fractional  distillation,  separation  by, 

133 
Fbanck  and  Knipping,  68 

Gehrcke,  102 

,,         and  Reichenheim,  80,  83, 
88 
Geigek  and  Nuttall,  10,  13 
Goldstein,  22 
Gravitation  effect  on  spectra,  121 

„        separation  by,  131 
Groh  and  Hevesy,  20,  135 

Hahn,  8 

„        and  Meitner,  8 
Halation  effect,  60 
Half-tone  plates,  25 
Hall  and  Harkins,  116 
Harkins,  102,  111,  116,  129 

„         and  Aronberg,  124 

„         and  Hall,  116 

,,         and  Wilson,  116 
Haschek  and  Exner,  121 
Helium,  67,  69,  106 


Hevesy,  10,  12,  19 

„       and  Bronsted,  136,  136, 

139 
„       and  Groh,  20,  135 
„       and  Paneth,  11 
„       and  Zechmeisteb,  20 
Hodges  and  Baxter,  142 
Holmes,  Baxteb  and  Weathebell, 

73,  141 
Honigschmid,  17,  18,  141,  142 

„  and     Horovitz,     18, 

121 
Horovitz  and  Honigschmid,  18,  121 
HoBTON  and  Davies,  68 
Hot  anode,  80,  83,  84 
Hydrochloric  acid,  diffusion  of,  129 
Hydrogen,  67,  69,  106 
Hyman  and  Soddy,  17,  121 

Ibbs,  130 

Imes,  125,  126 

Indicators,   radioactive,    19 

Infra-red  spectrum  of  isotopes,  125 

Intensity  of  positive  rays,  44 

Iodine,  78 

Ionic  dissociation  theory,  proof  of,  20 

lonisation  in  discharge  tube,  24 

Ionium,  1,  7,  9,  18 

,,        atomic  weight  of,  18 
Isobares,  12,  13,  97,  110 
Isotopes,  definition  of,  12 

diagrams  of,  97 

discovery  of,  5 

melting  point  of,  18 

refractive  index  of,  18 

separation  of,  127 

solubility  of,  18 

table  of,  89,  141 

James  and  Stewabt,  142 
JoLY  and  Poole,  133 

Keetman,  7 

Kernel  of  atom,  98 

Kibchoff,  116 

Knipping  and  Franck,  68 

kohlweiler,  116 

Kratzer,  126 

Kremers,  Owens  and  Balke,  142 

Krepelka  and  Bbaun,  141 

,,  and  RiCHABDS,  141 

Krypton,  70 

,,        anomalous   atomic   weight 
of,  114 

Landaueb  and  Wendt,  70 
Langmuib,  95,  96,  99 
Lead,  atomic  weight  of,  16 

,,      from  carnotite,  124 

,,      from  thorite,  17 

„      isotopes  of,  14,  15 


INDEX 


15) 


Lembert  and  Richards,  17,  121 
Lewis-Langmuir  atom,  95 
LmDEMANN,  102,  124,  134,  139 

,,  and  Aston,  131 

Lines  of  first  and  second  order,  61,  76 

„      of  reference,  55,  64 
Lithium,  86,  97,  146 
LooMis,  125,  126 

LUDLAM,  129 

McAxpiNE  and  Willard,  142 

Magnesimn,  80 

Magnetic  field  of  mass-spectrograph, 

51 
Marckwald,  7,  8 
Mass,  change  of,  100 

„      deduced  from  parabolas,  28 

„     deduced  from  mass -spectrum, 
55 
Mass-spectrograph,  43 
Mass-spectrum,  47,  54 
Measurement     of     lines     on     mass- 

spectrum,  59 
Meitner,  21 

,,         and  Hahn,  8 
Melting  point  of  isotopes,  18 
Mercury,  72,  80 

„  parabolas  of,  30 

„         separation  of  the  isotopes 
of,  134 
Merton,  121,  123,  124,  125 
Mesothorium,  8,  10 
Meta-elements,  4 

Metallic  elements,  mass-spectra  of,  80 
Meteoric  nickel,  113 
MiCHiELSON  and  Bruylants,  142 
Microbalance  for  density,  35 
MiLLIKAN,  22,  91 

Molecular  lines  of  second  order,  75 
Moles  and  Batuecas,  141 
MOSELEY,  11,  93,  115 
Mtjller,  142 
Multiply  charged  rays,  30 

Natural  numbers  and  atomic  weights, 

111 
Negatively  charged  rays,  29,  62 
Negative  mass-spectra,  62,  66 
Neon,  1,  33,  64,  97 
Neuberger,  21 
Nickel,  79 

„      meteoric,  113 
Nitrogen,  67,  110 
Nomenclature  of  isotopes,  61 
Nucleus  atom,  10,  92,  97,  125 

„        structure  of,  101 
Ntjttall  and  Geiger,  10,  13 

Order,  lines  of  first  and  second,  61 
Owens,  Balke  and  Kremers,  142 
Oxygen,  63 


Packing  effect,  100 
Paneth  and  Hevesy,  11 
Parabola  method  of  analysis,  25 
Parsons  and  Baxter,  113 
Perforated  electrodes,  22,  24 
Periodic  law,  11,  12,  34 

„        table  of  the  elements,  144, 
145 
Period  of  radio-elements,  13 
Perrin,  104 
Phosphonas,  77 

Photochemical  separation,  137 
Photographic  plates  for  positive  rays, 

25 
Planck's  quantum,  95 
Planetary  electrons,  92 
Poole,  133 

„      and  JoLY,  133 
Positive  ray  paraljolas,  28 

„        rays,  22 

„  „    separation    by,    136 

Potassium,  87 
Pressure  diffusion,  131 
Proton,  the,  92 
Protyle,  90,  118 
Prout's  hypothesis,  2,  90,  100 


Radioactive  isotopes,  7,  14 

„  „      classification  of, 

21 
„  transformations,  13,  14, 

15 
Radium  B  and  lead,  11 
„        D  and  lead,  11 
Ramsay,  115 

„         and  Collie,  39 
„         and  Travers,  33 
Ratner,  24 
Rayleigh,  127 
Reference  lines,  55,  64 
Refractive  index  of  isotopes,   18 
Reichenheim  and  Gehrcke,  80,  83, 

88 
Renz,  139 

Resolving    power    of    mass-spectro- 
graph, 60 
Richards  17 

„         and  Krepelka,  141 
„         and  Lembert,   17,   121 
„         and  Wads  WORTH,  17 
Richardson,  85 
Rossi  and  Russell,  9,  120 
Rubidium,  87 
Russell,  U 

„        and  Rossi,  9,  120 
Rutherford,  Sir  E.,  7,  9,  13,  92,  93, 
102 
„  and  Chadwick,  103 

„  and  Andrade,  11 

Rydberg,  141 


162 


INDEX 


SCHUTZENBERGER,  3 

Screens,  willemite,  25 

Secondary  rays,  29 

Second  order,  lines  of  the,  61 

Selenium,  77 

Separation  of  isotopes,  127 

Silicon,  72 

„       fluoride,  74 
Skaupy,  139 

Slit  system  of  mass-spectrograph,  49 
Smith  and  Van  Haagen,  72 
SoDDY,  6,  8,  10,  11,  12,  13,  14,  16,  17, 
35 

„       and  Hyman,  17,  121 
Sodium,  86 
Solubility  of  isotopes,  18 

SOMMERFEIiD,  95 

Spectra  of  isotopes,  9,  121, 

Spectrum  lines,  form  of,  53 

Spencer,  91 

Starkweather  and  Baxter,  141 

Stas,  91 

Statistical  relation  of  isotopes,  109 

Stewart,  11,  12 

„         and  James,  142 
Sulphur,  76 

Tani,  Baxter  and  Chapin,  142 
Tellurium,  77 
Thermal  diffusion,  129 
Third  order  line  of  argon,  67 

„  „     lines  of,  61 

Thomson,  G.  P.,  86,  88 

Sir  J.  J.,  1,  22,  29,  33,  62, 
70,  72,  75,  84,  91,  129 
Thorite,  17,  18 
Thorium,  7,  9,  14,  15,  18,  120 


Thorium,  chain,  17,  18,  116 

,,  atomic   weight   of,    18 

Tin,  78 
Travers,  39 

„        and  Ramsay,  33 
Triatomic  hydrogen,  70 

Unitary  theory  of  matter,  90 
Uranium,  10,  120 
,,         chain,  15 

Valency  electrons,  98 

Van  Haagen  and  Smith,  72 

Wadsworth  and  Richards,  17 
Watson,  33 

„        and  Aston,  24,  35 
Weatherell,  Baxter  and  Holmes, 

73,  141 
Welsbach,  8 

Wendt  and  Landaueb,  70 
Wey  and  Classen,  142 
Whole  number  rule,  90 
WiEN,  22 

WiLLARD  and  McAlpine,  142 
Willemite  screens,  25 
Wilson  and  Baxter,  142 
„        and  Harkins,  116 

Xenon,  70 

„        anomalous  atomic  weight  of, 
114 
X-ray  spectra  of  isotopes,  1 1 

Zechmeister  and  Hevesy,  20 
Zinc,  147 


Printed  in  Great  Britain  by  Butler  &  Tanner,  Frome  mi  London. 


1 A  1. 1     A 

DATE  DUE 

iWW  " 

i  3^ 

Demco,  Inc.  38-2 

93 

NORTHEASTERN  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES    DUPL 


3  9358  01112364  0